diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/62855-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/62855-0.txt | 9266 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9266 deletions
diff --git a/old/62855-0.txt b/old/62855-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7e9502c..0000000 --- a/old/62855-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9266 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Treasury of American Indian Tales, by -Theodore Whitson Ressler - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Treasury of American Indian Tales - -Author: Theodore Whitson Ressler - -Release Date: August 5, 2020 [EBook #62855] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREASURY OF AMERICAN INDIAN TALES *** - - - - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - TREASURY - OF - AMERICAN INDIAN TALES - - - BY THEODORE WHITSON RESSLER - - [Illustration: {Logo}] - - BONANZA BOOKS · NEW YORK - - _517110660_ - -_Copyright © MCMLVII by National Board of Young Men’s Christian -Association. Library of Congress Catalog Number: 57-5046. All rights -reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form -or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, -recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without -permission in writing from the publisher. Inquiries should be addressed -to: BONANZA BOOKS, a division of Crown Publishers, Inc., 419 Park Avenue -South, New York, New York 10016._ - - _This edition is published by BONANZA BOOKS, - a division of Crown Publishers, Inc. - by arrangement with The Association Press. - a b c d e f g h - Manufactured in the United States of America._ - - -To William Frederick, My Son - - I dedicate this book to you, my son. The ways of the Indian were good. - Honesty and truth were sacred to them; courage, a part of their lives, - as much as eating and sleeping. May this book prove to bring you many - joyful hours of reading, for constantly were you with me during its - writing, not only in person but in spirit. - - - - - THE 44 STORIES FROM 27 TRIBES - - - _Introduction_ ix - 1. ADVENTURE - _Little Rabbit Discovers a Secret of Strength_, Pueblo 3 - _Atagahi—The Secret Lake_, Cherokee 10 - _Quarter Moon and Little Elk_, Iroquois 13 - _A Kitten Brings a Boy His Feather_, Nez Percé 20 - _Little Thunder Finds a Friend_, Wyandot 23 - _How Not to Catch a Fish_, Bella Coola 29 - _Little Fire Cloud’s Dream_, Delaware 33 - _The Cry of the Horned Owl_, Cayuga 38 - _The Dream That Led to Victory_, Apache 42 - 2. HUNTING AND FISHING - _Grey Calf Learns to Hunt Buffalo_, Crow 53 - _Little Fox and the Golden Eagle_, Apache 60 - _How Long Moose Became a Brave_, Powhatan 65 - _How a Fishing Trip Taught Loyalty to a Boy_, Iroquois 71 - _Little Bear’s First Hunt_, Apache 79 - _Crying Eagle Sees a Great Battle_, Iroquois 84 - _Spotted Tail and the Ghost Wolf_, Mohawk 89 - 3. CUSTOMS - _The Tribes Gather_, Cree 99 - _Singing Eagle’s First Clothes_, Huron 105 - _The New Tepee_, Blackfoot 108 - _Little Dove Learns to Weave_, Winnebago 112 - _Red Cloud’s Dream_, Algonquin 117 - _Broken Tooth and the War Bonnet_, Apache 127 - _Grey Squirrel Hears His Name_, Oneida 129 - 4. HEROISM - _Little Fawn and the Wolves_, Choctaw 139 - _The Island_, Iroquois 144 - _A New Bow for Tani_, Cherokee 149 - _Singing Waters and the Medicine Well_, Teton-Dakota 153 - _The War That Should Not Have Happened_, Comanche 160 - _Little Horse and the Painted Arrow_, Delaware 174 - _Falling Water Earns a Feather_, Dakota-Sioux 192 - _The Race with Death_, Apache 197 - _The Storm_, Algonquin 210 - 5. CHARACTER - _Sleeping Bear Makes a Mistake_, Montagnais 217 - _The Lesson of the Elm Tree_, Cherokee 220 - _The Race_, Oneida 225 - _Little Thunderbird Tells the Truth_, Blackfoot 241 - _The Prize No One Could See_, Kickapoo 247 - _The Mysterious Pony Raiders_, Blackfoot 253 - _The Canoe Race_, Ottawa 263 - _Standing Fawn Makes a Doll_, Shawnee 269 - _Black Cloud Remembers_, Seneca 274 - _The Miracle of the Pine Grove_, Iroquois 281 - _Crooked Arrow Finds a Friend_, Shawnee 286 - _The Boy and the Warrior Chief_, Seneca 300 - - - - - INTRODUCTION - - -This is a collection of American Indian tales for pre-teen boys and -girls, a fact that does not obviate the possibility of their interest to -parents and youth leaders, as well. All have been tested by the -author-compiler with youngsters in many settings—in homes, in church, -Scout and Y groups, by the campfire, in meeting rooms, and even in -buses. - -Those stories which the author has created are based upon Indian lore -and customs. Many of the traditional stories were related to him by his -Indian friends, descendants of the braves who first recounted them many -generations ago. Both the original and the traditional tales are set -down within the general context of Indian history, but without any -pretense that the events actually took place. - -Authenticity, however, in the life, customs, and moral standards of the -Indians has been striven for in each story. Throughout, an attempt has -been made to impart, without “preaching” at youngsters, three major -ethical values common to all American Indians—courage, honesty in -dealing with others, and truthfulness in speech. - -The tales are of varying length, but all are short to conform with the -interest span of average pre-teeners—and, hopefully, to leave them eager -for the next story session. - -It will be noted that both Indian boys and girls play leading roles. The -author has found that the appeal of each story has been equal for both -sexes irrespective of whether it has a young hero or heroine. - -Parents and youth leaders will observe, too, that stress is placed in -several stories upon the close father-son and mother-daughter -relationship—completely true in Indian culture, and as much coveted in -the formative pre-teen years of our own children today. - -Whether read to children, or adapted and retold to them, or read by -children themselves, it is hoped that these stories will be cherished as -much by them as by the hundreds of boys and girls who helped, -unwittingly, to select them for this book. - - Theodore Whitson Ressler - - - - - 1. ADVENTURE - - - - - LITTLE RABBIT DISCOVERS A SECRET OF STRENGTH - - -Little Rabbit was a young Pueblo brave who lived a very happy and -carefree life. There was nothing very special about Little Rabbit unless -you were to say that his spirits were never dampened by a sad turn of -events. When something went wrong and people were unhappy, Little Rabbit -usually found his way to their side, and would offer words of -encouragement. - -The village in which Little Rabbit was born was like all the Pueblo -adobe villages of centuries before him. Little Rabbit had to climb a -ladder in order to enter his home, because all ground floor rooms had -only a roof entrance. By pulling up the ladder at night, families made -their homes hard to enter. - -Little Rabbit had once watched several families make an adobe building, -several levels high. The walls were made of a mixture of yellowish clay -and sand, called adobe; the roofs were made of a heavy layer of the same -adobe laid over a strong frame of log beams, crisscrossed with poles, -willow branches, sticks, grass, and desert brush. The Spaniards had -taught the Pueblos how to mold the adobe into bricks. Small holes were -made for windows and doorways. Each family had one large room, and the -ground floor room (without windows or a doorway) was used by all the -families for storage, initiation of the boys into secret societies, and -for religious ceremonies. - -Because each floor was set back the depth of the room below, each level -had a porch which was used by the Pueblo women for making corn bread, -pottery, and baskets, and by the men to weave rugs and blankets. When -religious ceremonies, dances, and games were taking place, these porches -gave the whole family the best possible point from which to watch. - -Such was the village in which Little Rabbit had grown to the age of -twelve, a strong and tall young brave. - -One day he had just finished playing some running games with his friends -and was returning to his home when one of his friends called to him, -“Come, Little Rabbit, we are going to walk the ledges.” - -Now walking the ledges was a very difficult game and, most of the time, -was forbidden by the parents. But occasionally some of the more daring -young braves, willing to chance their necks, would organize a game of -ledge walking. The idea was something like “Follow the Leader,” but far -more dangerous. The boys would walk right on the edge of the roofs—along -the first floor and, if successful and daring enough, along the second, -and then along the third floor roof. As the boys went higher, fewer and -fewer would take part; a fall from any one of the roofs would be bad, -but a fall from the second or third could cause great injury or even -death. - -Now Little Rabbit was not a coward, but he hesitated to play the game -because his father had told him that he was not to go without his -father’s permission, and Little Rabbit knew that this was one game his -father would not permit him to play. So with sadness in his heart he -shouted back to the other boys that he had work to do, and continued on -his way home. - -Several days passed, and each day a few of the older boys would gather -to walk ledges, and each day they would ask Little Rabbit to take part, -and each day Little Rabbit would say no. Finally it got to be too much -for even Little Rabbit. The next time he was asked he answered yes, and -soon was playing the very dangerous game. - -The boys had all completed the first ledge of the round floor and were -starting for the second. Just as Little Rabbit reached the second ledge, -a voice called out, “Little Rabbit, my son, what are you doing?” - -The rest of the braves scattered, but the surprise at hearing his -father’s angry voice near by frightened Little Rabbit for a moment, and -he lost his balance. He tried to straighten up, but went tumbling down -the side of the dwelling. He managed to break his fall by grasping at -the ladder but was not able to hold on. When he landed, his leg was -doubled under him and a sharp pain shot through his body, and then he -fainted. - -When Little Rabbit awoke, he found he was stretched on his own bed, and -his father and mother were standing over him. - -“I am sorry, my son,” his father said softly. “I did not mean to startle -you so. But I was afraid for you, and the fear in my heart gave -harshness and anger to my voice. If I had waited until you were safely -over the edge and then called to you, this terrible thing might not have -happened.” - -“Do not blame yourself,” said Little Rabbit. “It is I who made the -mistake. I disobeyed my father. I am truly sorry for that. If I had not -been doing something wrong, I would not have been startled when you -called. It was a foolish thing for me to do. I let the other boys tease -me into playing. It would have been braver for me to tell them no. Truly -I am ashamed, my father.” - -“You must rest, my son. Your leg has been badly injured. When you have -rested we shall talk of this.” With that, Little Rabbit’s father left -the house to continue his work. - -For many days Little Rabbit lay in pain from his hurt leg; but more than -his leg, his heart and mind were hurt from the unhappiness he had -brought to his father by disobeying. He tried to talk with his mother -about how he felt but all his mother would say was, “Do not worry so, -Little Rabbit. Your father has forgiven you.” - -But this was not what concerned Little Rabbit. His father now had to -carry on the work of farming the corn and brans and cotton all alone for -the family. This made Little Rabbit feel very unhappy. He wanted to do -his share of the work, and he liked to see crops grow. - -His leg began to heal, and soon Little Rabbit was able to hobble around -with the aid of a stout staff. He began to help around the house as much -as he could. Before long, he was able to limp out to the garden after -his father and work a little there, too. - -Many moons passed and his leg healed and became strong. But it was -twisted so that when Little Rabbit walked or ran he would limp rather -badly. The other young braves felt sorry for Little Rabbit. Even though -he could move about rather easily with his twisted leg, he really could -not keep up with the other young braves in the many games they played. -Soon he found that he was not being asked so often to play the really -exciting games. - -One day as Little Rabbit was seated in front of his home, his father was -returning from the garden. As he came to where Little Rabbit was seated, -he stopped and spoke gently. - -“Why do you sit here so sad and forlorn, my son? Always you have been -gay and happy, but lately you have become quiet and sad. Tell your -father what it is that troubles you.” - -And so Little Rabbit explained that because he could not keep up with -them in the games of speed and skill, the other boys no longer invited -him to play. - -“My son, if you are going to sit here and let your life pass you by -because your leg will not obey every command it is given, you will soon -become very unhappy and bitter. You will be of no use to anyone, even -yourself. You must turn your thoughts to other things. If you cannot run -fast, you must practice. If you cannot jump, you must practice.” - -“I have tried, my father, but it seems to do no good. My leg is strong, -but the way it is twisted causes me to limp. If I try to run my leg -bends under me. I have tried day after day but it is of no use.” - -“You cannot sit here and think of the world as a sad, unhappy place. -Such thoughts will make your leg feel even more twisted than it really -is. You must be thankful for your opportunity to raise yourself to be -more than just an ordinary Indian brave. You have a battle inside -yourself now that calls for great courage and wisdom. How you will -overcome it I do not know, but you must try, my son.” - -That night Little Rabbit could not go to sleep because he was thinking -about what his father had said. Maybe he had not been working hard -enough to make his leg do what he commanded. Tomorrow he would try -harder. - -And so every day Little Rabbit practiced very hard. For many hours each -week, he would exercise his leg. Finally one day he awoke feeling strong -and fit. After breakfast he went forth from his home to find his friends -for a game. When he located them, they were beginning a foot race which -would take them around the village. Without waiting to be asked, Little -Rabbit trotted into line just as the race started. The other boys were -off to a big lead, but that didn’t worry Little Rabbit. He remembered -what his father had said and, with each running step, he repeated the -words, “I must try.” - -The race was going strong. Soon, to his own surprise, Little Rabbit -began to pass the other boys one after another. What he had lost in -ability, he made up in stamina—the strength to go on and on. His many -days of practice were now proving valuable. As the other boys began to -tire and drop back, Little Rabbit passed the leading young brave. Then -he began to widen the gap between himself and the next runner until -nearly one hundred paces separated him from the second place runner when -he crossed the finish line. - -When all the runners had come panting to the finish line, they gathered -around Little Rabbit, slapping his shoulders and congratulating him upon -his victory. Finally, one of the young braves asked, “How did you manage -to stay so fresh to the very end?” - -“Well, you see,” said Little Rabbit quietly, “when I fell from the ledge -that day and broke my leg, I was sure that I was being punished for -disobeying my father’s wishes. After my leg healed and I began to play -again, I found that I could not keep up with you in your games. Once -again I thought that I was still being punished. But my father told me I -must try harder. This brought me courage. Once again I began practicing -every day to learn to run and jump even though my leg was twisted. I do -not have the skill that I used to have, but I now have endurance which -may stand me in very good stead later on as it has here today.” - - - - - ATAGAHI—THE SECRET LAKE - - -Somewhere in the high ridges of the Great Smokies there was believed to -be a lake called Atagahi, the Secret Lake. Few people had heard of it, -and this is a story of a young Cherokee brave and his sister who enjoyed -the secret of this beautiful lake nestled in the Great Smokies. - -Utani placed his bright, shiny, new knife on the ground next to his new -moccasins and admired the gleaming of the blade in the sun. He was a -young Cherokee brave, rather tall for his age but very powerfully built -and with sharp penetrating black eyes. He was too busy admiring the -glint of the metal in the sun to notice the approach of Netani, his -sister, until the shadow of her body crossed the knife blade and shut -off the sun. - -“Get out of the way of the sun,” cried Utani. “You are blocking the rays -from shining on my knife.” Netani made no effort to move and so Utani -repeated his request. - -Netani could not understand Utani’s demand that she move, but he was her -big brother and so she must obey. As she stepped aside she inquired of -Utani why he watched so intently the blade of his knife in the sun. - -Utani, of course, now being a man, did not want to give a childish -answer such as, “I am watching the blade shine in the sun.” So he -quickly gave another answer: “I am receiving a message from the sun.” - -“What sort of message?” asked Netani. - -“Oh, the sun is telling me where Atagahi is and maybe if I study the -blade long enough the sun will tell me just where to find it.” - -This, Utani thought, would satisfy his little sister. But her curiosity -was too great, and she asked that Utani take her to the secret lake, -Atagahi. - -Now, Utani realized he had gone a little too far in his bragging; but -being very stubborn, he refused to tell his sister that he really could -not find the secret lake by looking at the knife blade in the sun. Utani -made up his mind that he would have to find the secret lake, Atagahi. He -rose and placed his knife carefully in his belt and, taking his sister’s -hand, started toward the ridges of the Great Smokies. For two hours, -Utani and Netani climbed higher and higher into the mountains; but as -the day wore on, Utani began to feel a bit frightened, for they were a -long way from home and had come upon nothing that looked like a lake. -Finally Netani stopped a few feet behind Utani and called out. - -“Let us rest here for a while, big brother. I am getting tired. Besides -it is late and I am hungry. Let us go back to the village and look -tomorrow.” - -Of course, Utani secretly thought that was a wonderful idea, for he was -tired and hungry too. He agreed to follow his little sister’s idea. - -As he grasped his sister’s hand to start home, his foot kicked a small -stone which rolled off the side of the trail and down a small embankment -of earth and landed at the bottom with a splash. Utani and Netani looked -at each other with great surprise and then carefully stepped to the edge -of the path. Utani pushed aside the branches that grew along the side of -the trail, and they both peered down into the waters of a beautiful blue -green lake nestled among the trees and rocks that hid it from human eyes -along the trail. They had found it! They had found Atagahi! It was fast -growing dark, so the two children decided to return to their village and -come back the following day to the secret lake. When they returned to -their village the older braves wanted to know where they had been. -Netani said, “We looked at Utani’s knife blade in the sun, and the sun -told us where to find Atagahi.” - -The older Cherokee braves all laughed and laughed very loudly. But -Netani and Utani did not laugh, for they knew where Atagahi was and they -could go there any time they pleased. They never told anyone their -secret, but every once in a while if you looked very carefully up the -trail into the mountains, you might see two Indian children kicking -stones off the side of the trail. - - - - - QUARTER MOON AND LITTLE ELK - - -“Quarter Moon! Where are you, Quarter Moon?” - -Little Elk was shouting for his friend as he trotted through the quiet -Iroquois village. - -It was July, and many of the older braves had gone off to fish and hunt. -There were few left in the village except the women, the old men, and -the children. Little Elk was now twelve and he was feeling like a big -warrior more and more each day. - -Finally just as Little Elk was about to give up, he heard his friend -answering him from behind his father’s wigwam. “Why do you call so -loudly, Little Elk?” - -“Because my mother said that I could go fishing this day and I would -like you, my friend, to go with me. I have a great deal of good fishing -equipment, and there is still one canoe left at the shore of the great -lake. Can you come with me?” - -Quarter Moon thought for a moment, especially of the work he was -supposed to do that day. Finally he said, “Wait, I will go and ask my -mother.” - -With that he disappeared into the wigwam and in a moment was out again, -smiling. - -“My mother says that I may go, but that I must be back when the sun has -climbed to the highest point in the sky. For any day now, my father is -expected back and I have not completed the chores he gave me to do when -he left.” - -“Come then,” said Little Elk. “We must hurry.” - -The two boys ran to the lake shore and, after placing their fishing -equipment in the canoe, they stepped in and pushed away from the shore. - -“We will paddle along the shore,” said Little Elk. - -The Indians of the Northeast made fishing tackle from young basswood -saplings and made their hooks from bone. With these they were able to -catch the mighty muskellunge of the northern waters and supplemented -their fresh meat diet with lake fish. - -The boys paddled for quite some time before they dropped their lines -into the water. They had picked a good spot because in a matter of -minutes they had several fish in the floor of the canoe. Suddenly, -Little Elk noticed that the canoe had been drifting and he spoke to his -friend about it. - -“We should start for home, Little Elk,” Quarter Moon said. “The sun is -climbing high in the heavens. We have many fine fish, and our mothers -will be proud.” - -As they picked up their paddles once again, Little Elk looked around to -make sure that they were headed in the right direction. They had been so -busy with their fishing that they had drifted far from where they had -started. Little Elk wasn’t quite sure which direction they should take -to go homeward, for the two boys had never been off by themselves -fishing and for a moment he was confused. Then, looking at the sun, he -decided that they had turned completely around and would have to turn -their canoe once again to be headed in the right direction. And after he -told Quarter Moon, the two boys turned the canoe around and began to -paddle in the direction they were sure was right. - -They paddled past several islands and toward the main shore, when -Quarter Moon cried out, “Little Elk, our canoe has sprung a leak.” - -Little Elk looked down at his moccasins. The water was beginning to rise -in the canoe. Then Little Elk knew why this old canoe had been left at -the shore of the lake. The bottom was not considered safe. So the canoe -had been left to be repaired and used later on. - -“Quarter Moon, we are not too far from the shore. Paddle harder and we -will be able to reach the shore before the canoe fills so full that we -cannot move it.” - -So the boys paddled with all their strength and soon felt the bow of the -canoe scrape against the sandy bottom of the lake shore. Jumping out, -the two boys pulled the leaking canoe ashore and up onto the brush. -Looking around, the boys realized that they were in unfamiliar -territory. Neither boy had ever been this far along the shore, but now, -by looking out upon the lake, they guessed that they were some distance -north of their village. - -“Well,” said Little Elk, “at least we are not lost, for by following the -shore south, we will come to our village. Come, Quarter Moon! We will -put our fish upon some green sticks and take them with us.” - -The boys took their knives and cut out two young branches from nearby -trees; by running the branch through the gills of the fish and out -through the mouth, they were able to carry them comfortably. The boys -then started to follow the shore for home. By this time the sun was -beginning to lower in the sky, and the boys knew that it was getting -quite late. So they hurried along the shore carrying their prize catch -of muskellunge. - -When they had gone less than halfway to the village, Quarter Moon -suddenly called out to his faster companion. - -“Wait, Little Elk, do not run so fast. I cannot keep up with you. I must -rest.” - -The two boys seated themselves on the side of the lake to catch their -breath. It was then that they suddenly heard a noise. Turning around, -Little Elk saw several feathers through the trees. He was about to call -out when a warrior came into his sight and he realized that these were -not Iroquois, but a roving band of Abnakes. Quickly he threw himself to -the ground and pushed Quarter Moon down beside him. Quarter Moon almost -cried out because he was so startled, but Little Elk motioned him to be -still. He pointed into the woods and Quarter Moon could see why Little -Elk had motioned him to be quiet. Then Little Elk counted the Abnakes -who were moving quietly along the trail in single file, headed in the -direction of his village. There were fourteen of them, all tall, strong, -young warriors, each carrying a stout bow and a quiver of arrows. - -When the band had passed, Little Elk turned to Quarter Moon and -whispered: - -“We must hurry. They are headed in the direction of our village and with -our warriors all gone, there are none but the old men, women, and -children. We must warn the village.” - -They jumped up and began to run as fast as they could along the shore -toward their village, forgetting all about their fish and fishing gear, -in their haste to get to their village and warn their people. - -Soon they saw smoke from campfires only a few hundred paces ahead. Even -though both boys felt as if their hearts would burst, they forced -themselves to continue running until the wigwams of the village were in -sight. The boys slowed to a trot, and entered the village all out of -breath. They ran straight to the wigwam of Quarter Moon’s uncle and -tried, between gasps for breath, to tell him what they had seen. Finally -Quarter Moon’s uncle raised his hand. “Wait! Wait! My boy, get your -breath and then tell me what has brought you to my wigwam breathing so -heavily and looking like a frightened deer.” - -The boys took several deep breaths and then Little Elk told his story to -the old man. - -“But we are not at war with the Abnakes and surely we have nothing they -would want in our village. But if this is an attack, we must warn the -others. Go through the village and tell all the others to gather at the -medicine lodge. There are some of us left who can handle weapons. Rather -than give our few supplies or our women to an attacking band of Abnakes, -we will gather every able-bodied man and woman and fight if we have to.” - -Word was sent out through the village, and soon everyone gathered at the -medicine lodge. Quarter Moon was ready to repeat to all what he had told -the old brave when Little Elk looked through the fringe in the trees and -spotted some warriors approaching. He was about to shout a warning when -he saw his father in the lead of the party. Little Elk ran to his -father, shouting that the Abnakes were near by. And then he saw, -standing next to his father, a very tall and handsome Abnake. For some -reason, Little Elk felt that this was no ordinary warrior. Then his -father spoke. - -“Wait, Little Elk, my son. What is this you say about our village being -invaded?” - -Little Elk was embarrassed and looked down at the ground. “My father, -when Quarter Moon and I were returning from our fishing trip, we saw -some Abnakes through the trees. They carried many bows and quivers of -arrows, and they were moving swiftly and quietly toward our village. -Quarter Moon and I ran as fast as we could to warn the village.” - -“You did well, my son. But come, I want you to welcome a friend of mine. -This is Chief Big Running Fox of the Abnakes. With him are fourteen of -his finest hunters. Our hunting party searched far and wide for game but -with little success. After many days of searching, we were ready to -start for home, sad and empty handed, when we were met by Chief Big -Running Fox. After explaining to him our presence in Abnake lands, we -were invited to their village, where we received food and shelter for -the night. The next morning Chief Big Running Fox explained that the bad -weather this past spring had driven the game north. The Abnakes had -plenty, but knew that their neighbors to the south would not have much -game. So Chief Big Running Fox let us hunt on the Abnake grounds to get -plenty of meat for our tribe. In return we have invited them here for a -feast to thank them for this great kindness.” - -“I am sorry, great chief, that I thought you were going to attack our -village,” said Little Elk, feeling very much ashamed. - -Chief Big Running Fox placed his hands upon the boy’s shoulders. “Do not -feel ashamed. It could have been an unfriendly visit and you were right -to warn your people of strangers near your home. Your father can be -proud to have you for a son, and we are glad to have you as a friend.” - -The hunting party of Iroquois and Abnakes moved into the village side by -side. That night, instead of war dances, there were happy dances -celebrating their good hunting and finding a new friend. Right in the -center of all the excitement sat Little Elk and Quarter Moon, the heroes -of the day. - - - - - A KITTEN BRINGS A BOY HIS FEATHER - - -Between the swift running Snake River and the rumbling Grande Ronde in -the beautiful Valley of Winding Waters, there lived a band of Indians -called the Wallows, a branch of the Nez Percé tribe. - -Little White Wolf was one of the young boys who was trying to earn his -first feathers which would show that he had become a full-fledged brave. -Often he would wander from the camp into the forests that covered the -slopes of the valley. There he would try to think of things he could do -to get his feather—an act of bravery or great hunting skill. Two summers -had passed since he first tried to win his feather. His little friends, -Swift Owl and Gray Frog, had earned their feathers and now strutted -proudly through the village to call attention to their feathers. They -both took special care to spend most of their time playing near Little -White Wolf, no doubt to make him jealous of their awards. - -One day, when Little White Wolf was watching his mother mold a small -bowl from clay, he caught sight of his father, Big White Wolf, striding -into the village with a large brown animal slung over his shoulders. -Little White Wolf knew that his father had made a kill. The boy raced -forward excitedly to greet his father. As his father came nearer, the -boy saw the large claws of a mountain lion. He was thrilled and proud -and asked impatiently for his father to tell him the story of the kill. -But his father only shook his head and put his hand on Little White -Wolf’s shoulder to quiet him. - -“My son,” he told him, “you will have to wait until the big fire tonight -when I tell the tale for all to hear.” - -That night as the braves gathered around the evening fire, Little White -Wolf settled as close as he could to the spot where his father would -stand to tell his tale of adventure. After the other braves had told -their stories, Little White Wolf’s father walked with long, firm steps -to the center of the circle and began to speak. While Little White Wolf -listened, he thought that his father looked unusually strong and tall. - -Big White Wolf told how he had been tracking a deer in a small glen at -the southern end of the valley when he heard a snarl. Turning quickly, -he saw a large female puma poised to spring at him from a tree. Just as -the cat leaped, Big White Wolf shot his arrow. The cat fell dead at his -feet. He could not explain why the big cat had been roused unless he had -been close to a lair of kittens which this mother cat had been guarding. - -Little White Wolf leaned forward listening intently. Suddenly a thought -flashed through his mind. He could not sleep soundly that night because -he kept thinking of his secret plan. As dawn broke, Little White Wolf -arose silently and gathered his bow and arrow and a small pouch of food. -Then he started off for the southern end of the valley. He came soon to -the place where his father had killed the big cat. The boy began to -search every nook and cranny for the little kittens that must be here. -He felt sure his father had been right in guessing why the cat had -sprung at him. - -Finally, after many hours of searching, Little White Wolf was about to -give up when he heard a faint cry coming from his right. He moved behind -a small tree and parted the branches to see what had made the sound. -Just a few paces away in the hollow of a rock lay a small ball of brown -fur. Now Little White Wolf must carry out his plan to bring the puma -kitten back to camp alive. He moved slowly and quietly so that he would -not frighten the kitten. The little puma was looking away from Little -White Wolf. - -When the boy was only two paces away, the kitten heard him. The animal -jumped up quickly and started to run. But the Indian was too fast. He -leaped and caught the kitten by the scruff of the neck. Then he lifted -the little puma gently and began to scratch its head and pet it. In a -few moments, the animal was curled up in Little White Wolf’s arms, -leaning contentedly against the boy’s chest. The boy started back to -camp with his prize. - -No one had known why he had left or where he had gone, so Little White -Wolf was greeted excitedly by the other boys as he marched into the -camp. Even Swift Owl and Gray Frog praised him for having rescued the -little puma and for having braved a possible attack from some grown -puma. - -That night Little White Wolf told his story. With great dignity, the -Chief awarded the boy his feather. He was a very proud young brave. Now -he could strut with Gray Frog and Swift Owl throughout the camp. - -Little White Wolf never realized how thankful his father was that his -son had returned safely. Big White Wolf knew that the father cat might -have returned while the boy was taking the kitten. If that had happened, -there might have been no feather award council fire that night. - - - - - LITTLE THUNDER FINDS A FRIEND - - -Little Thunder was always the first one awake in his woodland Wyandot -village, running about doing many chores before his parents were even -awake. He would build up the breakfast fire and make sure there was -enough wood to keep it going during the day. He would take the water -bags to the cool spring and refill them with fresh water for that day -and do many other little chores. - -Finally when the rest of the village began to stir, Little Thunder would -rush about gathering up his many small treasures and lay them all out in -front of him on the ground to choose the ones he would carry with him -that day. He had pieces of flint, a deer’s horn, colored stones from the -brooks, birch bark on which he had burned pictures, and many other -things important to an Indian boy. Then his mother would call him in to -eat. When breakfast was over, his father and mother would explain the -family’s plans for the day. Then each would set about doing his share of -the work. - -One morning just before Little Thunder’s father was to go off on a hunt -with the other warriors of the village, he called Little Thunder to him. - -“You must take care of your mother while I am away,” Big Thunder told -the boy. “You must be the man of the house now. You must protect your -mother and your home and see that all of the work is done.” He smiled -and pressed his son’s shoulders. “You will soon be a man and then we can -go on the big hunt together. But you are man enough now to watch over -your mother while I am away.” - -Little Thunder felt very proud of the way his father had spoken to him. -When all was in readiness and the hunters had left the village, Little -Thunder turned to his mother and stood very straight as he looked at -her. - -“Do not be afraid, for I will watch over you, mother,” he promised. “To -show that I can get all the food we need, I will go into the woods and -bring us a fine fat rabbit for supper.” - -Now Little Thunder had a good hunting bow which his grandfather had made -for him many moons ago. It was of stout hickory and had an even curve to -it when the sinew string was pulled tight. Little Thunder had worked -carefully to make straight, strong arrow shafts. He had chosen the best -willow shoots from which be peeled the bark. Then he seasoned and -straightened them over the fire, and rubbed them smooth with sandstone. -His arrowpoints were made of flint which he had chipped with a piece of -deer’s antler after much practice under the eyes of his father. These -were his best arrows and he was saving them for the time he would go -with his father on the hunt. - -Little Thunder laid these big-game arrows aside and picked up the set he -had made for use now as a young Indian boy. They had bone points which -he had ground sharp and bound into the split end of the shaft with wet -sinew that tightened as it dried. On the other end he had glued and tied -carefully trimmed goose and turkey feathers to help the arrow fly -straight to its mark. He selected several arrows and tested his bow. -Little Thunder knew he would find plenty of game because the Indians -never killed without needing the food or skin of an animal. Having -finished all preparations for the hunt, he said good-bye to his mother -and started off to find the fat juicy rabbit he had promised her. - -Little Thunder trotted along the forest trails at a fast jog, looking in -all directions for signs of game. He moved softly on his toes and the -balls of his feet, as his father had taught him, so that he would not -frighten the creatures of the forest. - -Soon he came out of the forest into a large clearing that he believed -would yield the game he was after. He had walked watchfully only a short -while when, not seven paces from him, he saw a rather large clump of -tall grass move. He dropped to the ground, pressed his body flat against -the earth and waited. The grass did not move again. He tested the slight -breeze by wetting a finger in his mouth and holding his finger in the -air. The side of his finger away from him felt cool and he knew that the -breeze was blowing toward him. Whatever was in the grass ahead of him -would not be able to catch his scent. He crept forward softly. When he -was about three paces from the clump of grass, he stood up with bow and -arrow ready to shoot. - -But before he let the arrow fly, he stopped short. There, nestled in the -grass, was a young fawn which appeared to have been born only a short -while ago. The fawn, frightened by Little Thunder, lay perfectly still, -his coat blending in almost perfectly with the grasses and shrubs around -him. - -Little Thunder put the arrow back in his quiver. He moved toward the -animal slowly. The fawn struggled to his spindly little legs and wobbled -slightly. Then his legs gave way and he fell to the ground. Little -Thunder could not help laughing at the awkward little animal. This -scared the fawn even more and he rose to his feet again and tried to run -but again tumbled to the ground. Little Thunder ran forward to where the -fawn lay, fearful that the fawn might have hurt himself. When he reached -the side of the fawn he knelt down and placed his hands along the soft -silky neck. The fawn trembled but he made no attempt to move. Gently, -Little Thunder stroked his neck and head and back and soon the little -fawn quieted down. It was not too long before a rough little tongue -reached up and swiped at Little Thunder’s face. Little Thunder laughed -again and the fawn trembled. Speaking softly, Little Thunder told the -fawn that everything was all right and that no one would harm him. - -Little Thunder realized that the mother deer must not be too far off, -because only rarely would a mother deer leave her young—and then only to -get a drink of water or find a new place to hide her fawn. Little -Thunder rose from the ground and decided to look around for the fawn’s -mother. Walking to the opposite edge of the clearing, he looked down -through the forest and saw a lake. Winding his way through the trees and -brush, he was soon standing upon the shore of the lake. There he found -fresh tracks of a full-grown deer. Then he saw some blood on the shore -near more deer tracks, but he could find no further trace of the deer. -Then he spotted the prints of a pair of moccasins. He realized that a -warrior from a neighboring tribe in search of food had probably come -upon the doe while she was drinking, shot her, and carried her away. He -knew his guess was right when he saw a deer’s stubby tail tied to the -branch of a low-hanging tree—a sign always left by an Indian near the -place where he had killed an animal for food or clothing. - -Little Thunder ran back quickly to the little fawn, still nestled in the -tall grass. Even though he trembled as Little Thunder came near, he soon -became calm as the young Indian petted him gently. - -“Your mother has been killed, little one,” Little Thunder murmured to -the fawn. “That leaves you with no one to look out for you. Do not -worry. I, Little Thunder, will be your friend. But first we must get you -to a safer place, for there are many animals that would make life -dangerous for you here in the open.” - -Little Thunder lifted the young fawn in his arms and carried him into -the woods where he found a small thicket. Hiding the fawn in the -thicket, he returned to the lake and brought some water to the fawn. -Then picking up his bow and arrows, he trotted swiftly toward home to -tell his mother of his adventure. On the way, a plump rabbit ran across -his path. Little Thunder’s shot was easy and accurate. So he brought his -mother the big rabbit he had promised—and a big but true story, too. - -For many days after that, Little Thunder went back with food to his -newly found friend. The young fawn soon became strong and was able to -frisk about. Soon Little Thunder and the fawn were playing games -together in the clearing. He even taught the fawn to come when he -whistled. - -At last, his father returned from the long hunting trip and Little -Thunder told him all about his adventure with the young fawn. - -“This I will have to see for myself,” Big Thunder told the boy. -“Tomorrow we shall go together to the thicket in the forest.” - -So the next morning Little Thunder took his father to the forest, but -when they reached the thicket, it was empty. Big Thunder smiled at his -son as if to say that the boy had dreamed the whole adventure. - -“He is probably out frisking in the clearing,” Little Thunder said -hastily, “or he’s down at the lake having a drink. He will be back soon. -Come, father, we will sit over here and wait.” - -Though they waited patiently long into the afternoon, the deer did not -return. For several days after that, Little Thunder came back to the -forest and clearing and lake, but there was no sign of his animal -friend. Little Thunder lost all hope of finding the fawn and soon forgot -all about him, until one day about twelve moons later. - -Little Thunder had gone hunting that day and found himself on the trail -of a young buck. He followed the buck all morning and just as he was -about to give up the trail and return home, he saw the clearing where he -had found the fawn. Approaching quietly he looked out across the -clearing. At first he could see nothing. Then as he gazed along the side -of the clearing near the forest, his eyes stopped at the small thicket. -Something moved. Could it be the fawn, he wondered hopefully. - -Slowly he stood up and moved toward the thicket. Then something stirred -again. A beautiful young buck stood up in the thicket. The buck turned -to run. Little Thunder whistled and called out softly. The buck stopped, -turned and looked at the boy. Then, without fear, the buck ran forward -to where Little Thunder stood with his hand outstretched. The animal’s -tongue licked the Indian’s hand, and Little Thunder reached up and -scratched the young buck’s head. The boy knew that his friend had come -back at last. He would have much to talk about to the buck—and even more -to tell his father. - - - - - HOW NOT TO CATCH A FISH - - -The Bella Coola were a tribe that lived along the Northwest coast. Like -most of the Indians in this part of the land, they were fishermen and -woodcarvers. Some of the most beautiful carvings in the world have come -from these tribes. Their chief source of food was fish. Each year at the -time the salmon were running, the Indians would go out to the great -rivers with spears and fish nets to make large catches. Each salmon was -then split and dried and stored. - -As soon as the Bella Coola boys were old and strong enough, they were -taken out to the rivers and taught how to throw the fish spear with its -long line attached. They were also taught the use of the large fish -nets. Both the spear and the net were hard to handle and sometimes -dangerous. - -One day Little Twig (who had that name because of his size and the -thinness of his body when he was born) begged his father to take him on -the salmon hunt. All the men of the tribe were getting ready to head for -the river steps where the salmon would be leaping. But Little Twig’s -father stooped beside his son and spoke slowly to him. - -“My son, I would like to take you along, but this is man’s work and you -are still a young boy with much to learn. Stay here in the village and -play with the other children. Your day of hunting and spearing the great -salmon will come before you know it. But this time the answer must be -No.” - -Little Twig watched his father leave the village. When all the other -fishermen had left, Little Twig went in search of his friend, Running -Turtle. He found him carving a new handle for his knife. - -“Running Turtle, let us go and watch our fathers fish for the great -salmon,” he said. “We can go far above them on the river and watch from -the ledge. We will stay only for a short while and will be back in the -village before we are missed. I have never seen them fish for the great -salmon because my father says that it is too dangerous for Indian boys. -Will you go?” - -“My father will not let me go to fish with the men of the village -either. But he never said that I could not watch the men as they fish. -Come, Little Twig, let us hurry. The men are probably already there.” - -The two boys set out swiftly after the fishing party. Soon they could -hear the river roaring just ahead of them. They stopped at the trees -that grew close to the river shore. Peering through the branches, they -could see the men of the tribe spread out on both sides of the river, -some with nets and some with spears. At the feet of each fisherman were -large baskets into which he threw the fish he caught. - -The boys worked their way around and above the fishermen until they were -about three hundred paces upstream from the fishermen. Edging close to -the side of the river near the top of the waterfalls, the boys crept out -on a sloping ledge of rock that was only an arm’s length from the -rushing water. They were so close that the spray wet their faces as they -gazed downstream at the fishermen. - -Soon Little Twig became so excited by what he was watching that he stood -up and began to pretend that he was fishing for salmon, too. But he was -not used to the slippery rocks as the men were, and he suddenly found -that he was losing his balance. He called to Running Turtle to help him, -but before Running Turtle could grab him Little Twig was tumbling into -the rushing river. His body was caught in the great swirling waters that -swept him downstream. He choked as his eyes and nose and ears filled -with water. Just as he began to think he would die, he felt his body -being lifted from the water, and heard a voice shouting. - -“Look at this fine fish that I have caught,” someone yelled, laughing. - -Then Little Twig realized that one of the fishermen had reached out with -his net and snatched him from the river. Little Twig sputtered and -coughed and rubbed his eyes as strong hands set him on his feet. There -he was, in the middle of a circle of grinning warriors from the village. -He began rubbing all the sore spots where river rocks had struck his -body. Suddenly he recognized his father’s face. Instead of wearing the -stern look which Little Twig had expected, his father was smiling. - -“Were you so eager to take a swim that you dove into the river?” he -asked the boy. “Or did you hope to catch brother salmon with your bare -hands?” - -“I disobeyed you, my father, and I am truly sorry. I was a foolish young -boy to come to the river when you told me to stay at home. Now I know -why I have not been brought on the fishing trips. This is truly a job -for men.” - -Little Twig looked toward the ground. His father reached down and lifted -the lad into the air. - -“Yes, my son, this is a job for men. Someday soon you will join us in -hunting the swift salmon with spear and net. But for now, be happy to -remain in the village with your friends. You were lucky that my brother -had his net where he did, or we might have missed you and your body -would have been carried away. Come, we will go back to the village to -tell your mother of your swim this fine day.” - -Then he laughed again. Little Twig laughed this time, too, and all the -braves joined in the laughter. No one would speak harshly to him about -his foolish act even though it had brought him near death. Indians -believed that angry words make people sick. So Indian parents, like -Little Twig’s father, always tried to speak happily. - -Just then Running Turtle came out of hiding, and he started to laugh -with the others. - - - - - LITTLE FIRE CLOUD’S DREAM - - -The Delawares were a peaceful tribe, hunting and fishing in their rich -valley and not bothering their neighbors, for they had plenty and needed -little more than they were able to obtain themselves with their strong -bows and sharp arrows and their well-kept fishing gear. - -It was late spring, and one day as Little Fire Cloud romped and played -in the village his father called to him. - -“Come, Little Fire Cloud, it is time we built a new canoe. Shortly we -shall be needing a new canoe and if we do not start work now it will not -be ready when the time comes to leave camp.” - -So father and son started out to gather the materials to make a fine new -canoe. - -The Indians of the forest and lakes depended a great deal upon the canoe -and were wise enough to construct them of material that was easy to -obtain. Light cedar made the ribs and the planking of the canoe, and -over this the Indians stretched a tight cover of birch bark. Then they -took spruce roots and split them and these they used to sew the seams of -the canoe together. They then would calk the spaces with a tarlike -substance which was made from pine pitch and soot. When finished the -product was firm and sturdy, but above all if the canoe should become -injured in any way, the materials were always handy in the forest with -which to make repairs. - -Finally Little Fire Cloud and his father had gathered all the necessary -equipment together and the work on the canoe was started. Father and son -worked very hard at the job, and a few days later the canoe was -completed. As the two finished their work they stood back to admire the -job and Little Fire Cloud said, - -“Is it not beautiful, father? It is the most beautiful canoe I have ever -seen either in our own village or any of our neighbors.” - -“Yes, Little Fire Cloud, it really is a beautiful canoe and one which we -can be proud of.” - -For the rest of that day that remained, Little Fire Cloud could talk of -nothing else but the beautiful canoe that he helped his father to build. -Finally supper was over, and it was time to retire. - -That night as Little Fire Cloud fell asleep his head was all full of -visions of canoes and rapids and great lakes and rivers. Soon the -confusion of many things became one thing, and Little Fire Cloud found -himself standing on the shore of a great lake. He did not know how he -got there or what lake it was, but the water was a beautiful blue green -and it was calm and smooth. It was daytime and, as Little Fire Cloud -looked upon the lake, in the distance he saw a canoe coming toward him. -In the bow of the canoe stood a great warrior, his arms folded across -his chest and his eyes looking right at Little Fire Cloud. - -In the stern of the canoe, a young warrior softly paddled the canoe -forward toward the shore, directly to where Little Fire Cloud was -standing. As the canoe drew closer, Little Fire Cloud saw that it was -made of shimmering silver birch bark and it looked so clean and new. - -As the bow scraped the shore, the warrior stepped from the canoe and -walked to where Little Fire Cloud was standing. - -“Come, Little Fire Cloud, step into the canoe, and we shall take a short -trip.” - -“I do not know if I should,” said Little Fire Cloud overcome by the -great warrior who stood before him. “My father might wonder where I had -gone.” - -“Do not worry about your father for you will be gone only a short while -and we shall return you to this point on the shore. I have something I -want to show you.” - -So Little Fire Cloud feeling a warmth toward this great warrior stepped -in and seated himself in the middle of the canoe. Then the great warrior -stepped in and pushed away from shore. The warrior in the stern turned -the canoe toward the middle of the lake and began to paddle steadily, -his blade cutting the water neatly and hardly making a ripple. - -The canoe glided softly and smoothly across the water. Up ahead a mist -had settled upon the water, and soon the canoe had entered this mist and -was gliding softly through the water with nothing on any side but the -cloudy white mist. All that Little Fire Cloud could see was water right -next to the canoe. - -Little Fire Cloud called to the warrior. - -“Where are you taking me, O great warrior of the lake?” - -“You shall see, little brave,” said the great warrior without turning in -the canoe. - -Soon the mist lifted, and there surrounding the canoe was a beautiful -pool of water with many streams running off in different directions. - -The Indian who was paddling guided the canoe into one of these streams, -and as the canoe moved forward the warrior pointed toward the shore. -There along the shore, Little Fire Cloud could see many beaver working -diligently at gathering material for their homes. As the canoe continued -along the stream, Little Fire Cloud saw many beautiful flowers and -plants, and occasionally a deer could be seen drinking at the water’s -edge. Little Fire Cloud was quick to notice that the animals seemed to -pay no attention to the canoe when it sailed past where they stood -except to lift their heads and look at this craft as it moved smoothly -along the stream under the expert hands of the brave in the stern. - -Little Fire Cloud noticed that there were no weapons in the canoe. - -Soon they had reached a fork in the stream, and again the canoe was -guided into one of the openings and the trip continued. Many more wild -flowers and animals were observed by Little Fire Cloud until suddenly -they were in the mist once again and all the beauty was behind them as -they moved swiftly through the mist. - -When they broke from the cloud, Little Fire Cloud could see the shore of -the lake once again and he realized that they must have traveled in a -circle. Soon the canoe scraped the shore and the warrior stepped out and -assisted Little Fire Cloud. When the boy was safely ashore the warrior -said, “Did you enjoy your trip?” - -“Oh, yes,” answered Little Fire Cloud. “Everything was so beautiful. -Thank you very much for the nice ride and for showing me all the -beautiful things of nature.” - -“Yes, Little Fire Cloud, there are many many beautiful things in nature -that can be seen if one travels quietly and peacefully in a good canoe. -Nature is our friend and, if we remember this, many pleasant hours will -be spent seeing nature. Do not do anything to spoil this picture which -will remain with you always. If you never raise your bow to kill unless -you have need for food or clothing game will always be plentiful. But if -you wasted this beauty which is given to the Indian you yourself and -your people would soon die from hunger and cold. To kill for the sake of -killing is cruel and wasteful. Now I must say good-bye, for I have many -miles to travel. Good-bye, Little Fire Cloud, and remember your trip -into the misty lake.” - -With that the warrior stepped into the canoe, and soon the canoe turned -and disappeared into the distance. - -Suddenly Little Fire Cloud felt a hand upon his shoulder and someone was -shaking him. - -“My son, my son, wake up, you have been dreaming.” - -When Little Fire Cloud opened his eyes he was lying on his bed, and his -father was standing over him. - -“Oh, father, I had the most beautiful dream. A great warrior came and -took me for a ride in a beautiful canoe and showed me the wonders of -nature in all their splendor.” - -And Little Fire Cloud went on to tell his dream in all the beautiful -detail that he could remember. His father was a good father and so he -listened patiently to his son; and when Little Fire Cloud had finished -telling about the dream, his father said, “Yes, my son, it was a -beautiful dream, and in the dream you learned a great lesson concerning -the creatures of the wild which I hope you will always remember.” - - - - - THE CRY OF THE HORNED OWL - - -Little Beaver was full of excitement, for soon the winter would be over -and he and his friend Jumping Rabbit would once again be able to take -their little canoe and go to the lake and streams to catch the fine fish -that waited in the early spring for the bait to be cast. - -The Cayuga village had weathered the winter well, and now the first -signs of spring were beginning to show. With the bursting forth of the -spring flowers and the green shoots of plants and grass and the green -leaves the Cayuga village seemed to come alive. - -One of the first tasks was the uncovering of the canoes. (When winter -approached, the canoes were all hauled far above the lake water’s edge -and covered completely with mounds of sand. This kept them from drying -out and cracking during the cold winter.) Finally all the canoes had -been uncovered, and the Indians took to the lakes and the streams again, -fishing and hunting to replenish the food supply that had been used -during the winter. - -One morning Little Beaver searched for his friend Jumping Rabbit for a -long time and when he could not find him, he decided to go off by -himself. Walking to the edge of the lake he found that his father had -uncovered his canoe for him. - -Stepping into the canoe he paddled across the lake to the mouth of a -stream which was new to him. This stream led to the Lake of the Rushes -where the girls and women gathered the rushes each spring to make new -mats for the platforms of the wigwam. Here he had not been before. - -As Little Beaver paddled he saw many signs of spring, but he was -searching for big game. He wanted to be the first young boy to bring a -deer back to the village. - -Soon he beached his canoe on the side of the Rush Lake and moved inland -searching for signs of the deer. Suddenly he came upon the tracks of -what seemed to be a fine big buck. Following carefully along the track -of the deer he noticed that the deer was moving slowly. Then suddenly -the spaces between the tracks became bigger and he knew that the deer -had begun to move faster. - -Suddenly the noises of the woods ceased and it was very quiet. Up ahead -a shadow flitted across the trail. Little Beaver dropped upon his belly -and then he heard it—the cry of the great horned owl. But still he knew -that the owl would not cry at this time of day and from a short distance -off the trail he heard an answering cry. - -Through the fading light among the trees up ahead, he saw a small group -of warriors gather. One of these warriors placed his hand alongside his -mouth, and the cry of the horned owl once again was heard and from -another direction an answer. - -Then Little Beaver knew that these were unfriendly Indians from the -north and they had invaded the land of the Cayugas. They could be here -for one reason only, to raid his village. - -“I must return at once to the village and warn my people of this -danger.” - -Little Beaver turned and retreated down the path to where he had left -his canoe. Pushing it out into the lake he immediately began paddling as -fast as his arms could go for the mouth of the stream that would lead -into the next lake and to the shore of his village. He reached the mouth -of the stream just as the dark storm clouds started to gather over the -lake. - -And then it was raining and raining hard. This would slow up the -attackers, but it would not stop them and Little Beaver had to get to -his village quickly to warn his people of the danger. He dipped his -paddle deep into the waters of the lake and the canoe moved forward. But -now the wind was getting stronger and his arms began to ache from the -effort. He paddled harder and harder but soon his arms became weak and -he was still a great distance from the shore. Besides the danger of the -storm it was fast approaching nightfall, and ahead Little Beaver could -see the friendly fires of his village being lit one at a time. - -These would act as beacons of direction for the enemy. - -He chanced a glance behind and then he heard it again. The cry of the -horned owl. The cry was coming from almost directly behind and in the -dusk he could see the canoes of the enemy slipping from the stream into -the lake. - -The storm passed and the waters became calm, and now Little Beaver’s job -was easier, but so was that of the enemy. He paddled with all his might -though he felt his arms would fall off. - -Finally he reached the shore and he leaped out onto the sand. Without -waiting to pull his canoe ashore he rushed for the village. He turned to -glance at the lake once more and he could see the canoes of the enemy -drawing along the shore, closer to the village with each stroke. - -He rushed to his father and quickly told him what he had seen. His -father dashed from the wigwam and glanced toward the lake. Just then -they both heard it once again. The cry of the great horned owl. His -father stopped and listened and then placing his own hand to the side of -his mouth he answered the whistle. Then he turned to his son. - -“It is all right my son. These are friends come to join in a great -celebration. It is your uncle and his people from the north. Be not -afraid, for they are friends.” - -Little Beaver looked at his father. He smiled and taking his father’s -hand they walked toward the lakeside. Stepping from the canoes were a -number of Cayuga warriors and they came with many bundles. - -The two groups greeted each other and then the leader of the visitors -came forward. - -“Your father has explained that you thought we were unfriendly Indians -come to call. I, for one, am glad that you are not a grown warrior right -now, for your arrow shaft might have found its place in my heart in the -forest. We had hoped to surprise your people with our visit but when we -saw your canoe glide away from the Lake of the Rushes we knew we had -been seen. And so, my little brave, let me congratulate you on a fine -job of paddling. You came across the lake in a storm without slowing -your stroke. I have told my brother that if we had been the enemy you -would have reached the village far ahead of us and we would now be -walking the trail of the happy hunting ground.” - -That night Little Beaver slept very soundly. He had a great adventure on -his first trip to the Lake of the Rushes and it would be a long time to -come before he would go alone again. - - - - - THE DREAM THAT LED TO VICTORY - - -Singing Fire, the young Apache brave, rode swiftly through the hills -toward the village of his people. He had been hunting and now was -returning to his tepee to join his family in a hearty evening meal. His -hunger made him urge his pony to an even faster pace. Soon he could see -the smoke of the fires in the village. It was only a few moments later -that Singing Fire brought his pony to a quick stop on the very edge of -the village. To ride his horse through the village this evening would -have been unkind. The summer had been very dry, and his pony’s hoofs -would have raised much dust that would settle in the cooking pots. - -Walking through the village, the young brave waved and called to his -friends. He laughed when they joked with him about his empty hands. He -had been unable to find any game that he felt was worth bringing to the -village. Soon he reached his father’s tepee and was welcomed warmly by -the family. - -When supper was finished, Singing Fire went to talk with his friend, -Many Painted Ponies. The two braves had always been together since they -were very young and just learning to walk. Now whenever they had time, -they would sit and talk about their future together as great leaders of -the Apache tribe. He found his friend working at making new arrow tips. - -“Hello, my good friend, Many Painted Ponies, and how are you this fine -evening?” - -“My stomach is full and my heart is happy, Singing Fire. Could a brave -ask much more of life? I have been very fortunate in having such a fine -father and mother who have made my life such a pleasure. As I saw you -ride in from the hunt, I noticed you carried no game. Was there no game -where you rode? Usually you do not return empty-handed.” - -“Today was bad for the hunt. The largest game knew that I was hunting -and ran for cover, and I was not as quick as they to find the hiding -places.” - -The two young men laughed and then spent some time talking until -darkness came. Each young man went back to his tepee for a well-earned -sleep. - -The next day there was great excitement in the village. As young Singing -Fire stepped from his tepee, he saw that people were gathering in the -center of the village to hear a tall Apache warrior who was talking -loudly and rapidly to the chief of the village. As Singing Fire drew -near, he was able to catch some of the words spoken by the warrior. - -“It is true, my Chief, the Comanches have been seen in our land. If we -are not careful they will raid our pony herds and make off with many of -our best mounts. I have seen them to the east, and they skulk like the -lowly wolf in the night.” - -The great chief listened quietly until the young warrior had finished. -Then he motioned to the older men of the tribe to gather in his tepee. -When they were all inside, Singing Fire, Many Painted Ponies, and the -other young braves stood outside waiting impatiently for what the elders -of the tribe would decide. They could hear the young brave who had first -reported to the chief repeating his story for those who had come late. -He said that while trailing some ponies that had strayed from the herd -he had come upon the coals of a recent fire. Because the marks in the -sand were not Apache, he had followed the tracks made when the group -broke camp. Traveling at a rapid pace, he soon had come upon the band of -Comanches in a small gully. After watching them for a short while, the -brave had mounted his pony and ridden as fast as he could to the village -to tell the chief of this threat to their property and peace, within -such a short distance of their camp. - -Finally the Chief came out from his tepee and spoke to the young -warriors. - -“The Comanches have entered our hunting grounds. Not only have they -broken the law, but they dare to ride within a short distance of our -camp. We will gather a war party and go in search of these thieves of -the night. We will give them a sound lesson by whipping those wild dogs -so badly that they will return to their own land with their tails -between their legs—if there are any left to return when we have met them -upon the field of battle.” - -With low shouts of agreement, everyone ran to prepare for the warpath. - -Singing Fire and Many Painted Ponies returned to check their weapons and -when preparations were completed returned to where the chief sat astride -a great white horse. When everyone had assembled, the party left camp in -search of the invading Comanches. For several days the party searched -but no sign was found other than the old fire, that anyone had been in -the vicinity. At last the chief turned to his men and said, “They have -seen our strength and afraid have returned to their own land. They -respect the might and fighting ability of the Apaches. Come, we will -return to our village.” - -The party started for home, but as Singing Fire and Many Painted Ponies -rode along, Singing Fire was quiet. - -“What is it, my friend, Singing Fire? You are so quiet.” - -“I was just thinking, my friend, that the Comanches are not known as -cowards; they surely would not turn from a fight. I do not believe they -have left our land.” - -“But, Singing Fire, for three days we have searched the land and no sign -do we see of the Comanches. Certainly the earth did not open and swallow -them up.” - -“That is just the point, my friend. What has happened to the party? The -brave reported seeing them and took us to where they had their fire. The -tracks led away but suddenly stopped, and we have seen nothing to -indicate that they returned to their own lands across the great river. I -just am not satisfied that they have left.” - -Nothing more was said for the remainder of the trip back to the village, -and that evening after supper, Singing Fire went to sleep thinking about -the hunt for the Comanches. - -As he slept, he dreamed there were Comanche warriors mounted upon fast -horses and they all seemed to be riding toward a solid wall. Singing -Fire suddenly awoke recalling seeing that wall before. - -About a day’s ride from their village was a small valley which they -called the valley of the snake because it twisted and turned between the -mountains. As the thundering riders neared the wall, it seemed to open -up and they had disappeared within. Then the walls closed again and -there was silence. Singing Fire leaped from his bed and rushed to his -father’s side. - -“My father, I must speak to our chief. It is of great importance that I -see him now.” - -“But it is late, my son, and certainly what you have to say can wait -until tomorrow.” - -“No, father, I must speak to him now.” With that, Singing Fire left his -tepee and soon was standing before the tepee of the Great Chief. He made -his presence known and was invited into the tepee. - -The chief invited him to sit and then asked, “What brings you to my -tepee so late, young Singing Fire?” - -“Tonight, O Great Chief, in a dream I was drawn to the painted hill -which stands guard over our village. Here I stood troubled in heart and -mind because of what has been reported to our tribe.” Then Singing Fire -proceeded to tell in complete detail of the dream he had had. When he -finished, he waited for the chief to speak. - -“What importance do you attach to this dream you have had, young Singing -Fire?” - -“I do not know, Great Chief, but I would like your permission to take -Many Painted Ponies and ride to this place I have seen in the dream. I -would like to see what can be found there and then I will return to my -village.” - -The Indians placed a great deal of faith in dreams, and so the chief -gave his permission and early the next morning, Many Painted Ponies and -Singing Fire set out for the valley that Singing Fire had seen not only -in his dream, but many times on his hunting trips. - -They traveled all day, and when the sun was setting in the west, they -found themselves but a short distance from the entrance to the valley. -They camped for the night, not lighting a fire, in case there should be -any unfriendly Indians in the vicinity. - -As dawn drew near, the two young men crawled to the mountainous heights -overlooking the twisting valley. There they lay and watched the valley -below. For almost an hour they sat until finally about noontime a small -band of warriors could be seen riding into the valley. They rode -straight up the middle of the valley twisting and turning as the valley -turned but finally about midway up the valley they swung sharply to the -left and seemed to disappear into the very walls surrounding the valley. - -“Come,” said Singing Fire, “we must investigate this strange -occurrence.” - -It took them most of the afternoon to reach a vantage point overlooking -where the warriors had disappeared. Crawling carefully to the very edge, -the two young braves looked carefully over the edge. Below them lay a -fantastic sight. A tremendous Comanche encampment was being formed in a -small box canyon. The entrance to the box canyon was a mere crack in the -wall which was just about wide enough for one horse and rider to enter -at one time. Now Singing Fire could see why a rider going through the -valley would not see the opening for it was actually hidden from view by -a turn in the trail. If one were not looking for it, one would not find -it except by accident. - -“This is why we have not seen the Comanches except for that one small -party. Under cover of night or early dawn they have been entering our -land in small parties, gathering here until their force is large enough -to make war upon our people.” - -Singing Fire tapped his friend upon the shoulder, motioning him away -from the edge. - -“Many Painted Ponies, one of us must ride for all he is worth to reach -our village and tell of this plan to our people. You must tell the chief -to gather the Apaches together and we can trap the scheming Comanches in -their own camp.” - -Many Painted Ponies rose to leave. “Be careful, my friend, for if they -should suspect that you are here your scalp will soon hang from their -medicine lodge and they will break from their camp fearing the trap we -will set for them. Now I will ride for our village and may your prayers -go with me.” With that, Many Painted Ponies left and mounting his pony -he rode off toward home. - -Singing Fire kept careful watch for the next day and night and when dawn -approached he saw the dust of many horses approaching. Riding forth to -meet his people, a plan formed in his mind. In council with the chiefs a -short time later the plan was outlined. The best marksmen of the Apaches -were placed around the box canyon on the walls overlooking the -unsuspecting camp of the Comanches. Other warriors would ride into the -valley to stand guard at the only entrance or exit to the canyon to make -sure none escaped. - -Soon all was in readiness. The signal was given. Like an attacking horde -of eagles, the Apaches began firing down upon the Comanche encampment. -The battle was long and bloody. In confusion the Comanches mounted their -ponies and headed for the exit. Here they were met with a hail of arrows -which drove them back into the canyon. - -When the Comanche forces were thoroughly disorganized, the chief -signaled the Apaches to charge through the entrance and soon the two -tribes were locked in hand to hand combat. The victory was complete and -soon the last of the Comanches had fallen before the knives and war -clubs of the attacking Apaches. - -In triumph the tribe returned to the village where great celebrations -marked the next few days and nights. The hero of the affair was praised -before the council, and Singing Fire was honored for his part in the -great victory. - - - - - 2. HUNTING AND FISHING - - - - - GREY CALF LEARNS TO HUNT BUFFALO - - -Grey Calf opened his eyes to greet the warmth of the early spring day. -There was a great deal of excitement in his Crow village as he rolled -out from under his buffalo robe. At just that moment, his father entered -the tepee. - -“Come, my son,” he said. “We must dress and eat right away. The village -is broken down, for we are going to move again. Your mother is waiting -to take down our tepee. Come, you must prepare to help load the -travois.” - -Grey Calf learned as a very young Crow that whenever his tribe had to -move to follow the buffalo herds, the whole village was packed and -loaded upon travois drawn by the horse or horses of each family. -Everything the family owned was made to be carried easily in rawhide -containers that could be folded and put away when the family had settled -in a new place. Furniture was made so that it could be folded, too. - -Many times, Grey Calf had watched his mother make the travois. She would -take two of the tepee poles and fasten them together with a rawhide -thong, just a short way from one end. Then she would pull the poles -apart at the opposite end and set them, at the point where they were -crossed and tied, upon the shoulders of their horse. The longer ends of -the crossed poles would stretch outward and rest on the ground behind -their horse on each side. Then she would run a long strip of rawhide -through the knot that joined the poles over the horse’s shoulders, and -tie it around the horse’s chest like a light harness. Finally, she would -stretch and tie strips of rawhide across the poles behind the horse, to -make a frame on which their family goods were loaded. - -Grey Calf’s father had told him once that many years ago, before the -white man had brought horses to the Indians’ land, the travois had been -fastened to their strong dogs. But the dogs were not so strong as -horses, so the loads had to be much smaller and lighter. Even their -tepees were smaller in those days because larger ones would have weighed -too much for any one dog to pull on the travois. - -These thoughts passed rapidly through Grey Calf’s mind as he listened to -his father. Then he yawned and asked, “Must we move so soon again, -father? It seems such a short while ago that our tribe set up its -village here.” - -“My son, the buffalo are on the move,” his father answered patiently. -“You know that we would not have our tepees, our best food and clothing, -and little of anything else without the great buffalo. When they decide -to move, we must move with them. The scouts who have been watching the -herd tell us that it has started to leave for new feeding grounds.” - -Without another word, Grey Calf got up quickly and began helping his -mother gather their belongings. He helped her take down the tepee. Then -she built the travois rapidly, and he helped her pack and load their -belongings onto it. - -Soon, where once a proud village had stood, hardly anything was left -standing. The men set out ahead on their horses, followed by the women -and children on horses, the smaller children sometimes riding on the -travois, their mothers and the older children riding astride the horses’ -backs. Grey Calf, like many other of the older boys, was riding his own -pony near his mother. - -The scouts were far ahead of them, keeping close touch with the -wandering buffalo herd, and signaling the tribe to tell the braves which -way to lead their families. The scouts were also watching carefully for -roving bands of the Crows’ enemies, for they were near Cheyenne -territory, but they saw none. - -Just as Grey Calf was ready to ask his mother if the buffalo herd would -never stop roaming, a scout raced his horse back to tell the braves that -the herd was circling around, ready to settle down near fresh water and -food. The Chief gave the signal, and all the families went to work -busily setting up their tepees. Before too long, smoke was rising lazily -from the fires which circled their new village. The trek had taken most -of the day, and the women were beginning to cook the evening meal. - -The braves were watering their thirsty horses, and then would put them -out to graze. Grey Calf did all he could to help his mother get their -meal ready quickly because he was very hungry. When all the small chores -had been completed, the families gathered at their tepees, to eat the -food that smelled so good to all the children. - -It wasn’t long after Grey Calf had eaten that he began to feel drowsy. -Saying goodnight to his father and mother, he went into the tepee, -rolled himself in his warm buffalo robe (because the prairie night would -be cool), and was soon sound asleep. - -The next day dawned as one of great excitement, for word came to the -tepee of Grey Calf that today One Horn, the great buffalo hunter, was -going to take the young braves on their first buffalo hunt. - -Like other Crow boys, Grey Calf had spent many days preparing patiently -for this great event. His father had taught him how to ride his pony and -to shoot the bow and arrow. He had learned how to ride into a herd and -to shoot from beneath his pony’s neck. And now that great day was here. -One Horn, the greatest of buffalo hunters in the tribe, would give the -young braves their last lesson before taking them out onto the prairie -for the actual hunt. - -When the young braves had gathered, One Horn stepped to the center of -the circle and gave his final instructions, warning them not to be too -eager but to take their time and make sure of their shot. And above all, -he warned them, as soon as they had made their shot they must swerve -away from the herd. In this way they would be out of danger if the herd -should spread out to avoid trampling its fallen members. - -When One Horn finished, he asked if there were any questions. The young -braves had none. So One Horn told them that the time of the hunt would -be midafternoon. The boys were told to return to their tepees and get -everything ready. - -Grey Calf sped back to his tepee to tell his family breathlessly all -that had happened. For the rest of the morning he worked carefully over -each of his arrows and his strong bow. In fact, he was so busy that his -mother had to call him three times before he came to lunch. - -The sun seemed to move very slowly for all the Crow boys. But soon a -young brave on a frisky pony rode swiftly through the village to tell -them to gather for the hunt. - -Grey Calf leaped upon his pony’s back and sped to the edge of the -village where the other young braves were gathering. When all had -gathered and were seated on the ground, One Horn spoke. - -“A small group of buffalo has wandered away from the main herd,” he -said. “It is from this small group that we shall choose our targets. I -will inspect each young brave’s weapons in turn. When all are -satisfactory, we shall move out in the direction of the small herd. Do -not ride hard but move your pony slowly. Buffalo will not go far in this -heat. We shall have plenty of time to come near them, take our positions -quietly, and then attack together without warning.” - -When One Horn had finished examining each young brave’s weapons, the -small band moved out in single file. Soon they sighted the buffalo. One -Horn gave hand signals to the young braves to spread out and take their -positions silently, but above all to wait for the signal from One Horn -to attack. - -As slowly and quietly as possible, each young brave moved into position. -All eyes were on One Horn, and suddenly he gave the signal. The air was -torn apart as wild yelps leaped from the throats of the eager young -hunters. The buffalo were startled and began running about wildly. The -boys dug their heels into their ponies’ sides and headed into the group -of buffalo. Soon the dust clouds were so heavy that one could not tell -the hunters from the hunted, but the young braves rode swiftly, each -hunter picking out his buffalo carefully and with an eye to size. This -was to be the first of many buffalo kills, and each young brave hoped -that his would be the largest of the beasts brought down. - -Buffalo after buffalo began to stumble and fall before the accurate -shooting of the young hunters. The ponies were magnificent in their -performance, for each had been carefully trained for this day. - -As quickly as the hunt had started it was over. One by one the young -braves returned to One Horn who had seen their great success. Soon they -were once again at their starting point. They knew that the remaining -buffalo would tire and, knowing they were no longer being chased, would -begin to mill and settle down once again. - -One Horn gazed proudly upon the field of battle. Twelve plump shaggy -beasts lay dead upon the prairie. Every brave had made his kill. There -would be much rejoicing in the village that evening. One Horn told the -young braves how to prepare their kills for the return to the village, -and they went to work immediately. Their adventure this afternoon would -mean much food for the tribe and new clothing for the coming winter and -horns and tails to decorate their costumes and tepees. - -As One Horn rode from dead buffalo to dead buffalo, watching the young -braves at work, he was quick to praise each lad for his part in the hunt -that day. Soon all had completed their tasks and a triumphant band -returned to the village. - -That evening each young brave in turn told how he had made his kill and -there was a great deal of celebrating. The honor of the biggest kill -went to Grey Calf. As the last of the families were going into their -tepees for the evening, Grey Calf’s father came to sit by his side. - -“My son, your father is proud. Not only has my son killed his first -buffalo but it was by far the largest of the beasts killed today. Today -you had success and triumph, but life will not always be that simple. -The trail ahead is hard. There will be many difficult times, but if you -learn your lessons well you shall one day be a great and respected -warrior of the tribe.” - -When Grey Calf’s father had finished speaking, he looked down upon his -son and smiled. The tired young brave had fallen asleep. - - - - - LITTLE FOX AND THE GOLDEN EAGLE - - -Little Fox, a member of the Apache Tribe, was a shy Indian lad who was -rather small. When he was born he was a very tiny baby and his face was -thin and pointed like that of a fox. For this reason he was given the -name of Little Fox. - -As Little Fox grew older, he dreamed of the day he would be able to wear -the feathers of the Great Golden Eagle, the most respected bird of the -American Indian. It was believed that there was great power in the -thirteen tail feathers and in the pinion feathers on the wings of the -Great Golden Eagle. - -One day Little Fox was seated in his mother’s wickiup, when his father -entered. Without a word Little Fox’s father went to a case made of -deerskin and carefully removed the cover. Then with great care he -removed from the case a most beautiful feather bonnet, at which Little -Fox gazed with great longing. His father, Swift Deer, was an honored -brave in the tribe and had become privileged to wear the bonnet of eagle -feathers for his many brave deeds and the telling of these deeds before -the Council of Chiefs. Swift Deer had been granted the right to place -additional eagle feathers in his headdress. Suddenly, Swift Deer turned -to Little Fox, and said, “Why do you look so sad, my son?” - -Little Fox turned slowly to his father and said, “It is because I, -Little Fox, have not been able to do anything that the Council would -recognize as a deed worthy of the wearing of the feathers of the Great -Golden Eagle.” - -“Little Fox,” said his father, “you seek too hard for a deed to compete -for this honor. Tell me, do you have any eagle feathers that you could -wear, in case you should do a deed which would be considered worthy?” - -“No, my father,” said Little Fox, “but by the rising of the next new -moon, I shall have many eagle feathers, for tomorrow I start in search -of the Great Golden Eagle. It has been told by Great Moose that beyond -the three hills many Golden Eagles have been seen.” - -Swift Deer was proud. He knew that though his son was small he had in -his breast a brave heart, for to go in search of the Great Golden Eagle -took a great deal of courage. Once again Swift Deer took his son aside -and told him the many dangers of eagle hunting, but praised him for his -bravery in going to get the tail feathers of the Great Golden Eagle. - -The following morning, Little Fox took some food. Then taking a long -strong thong of deerskin, he looped it several times around his waist -and tied the food pouch to it. Strapping a knife also to the thong, he -started for the place where the Great Golden Eagles had been seen. - -On the way he stopped just long enough to snare a plump young rabbit -which he would use for bait. When he reached the place where the eagles -were to be found, he started digging a deep hole, large enough for him -to stand in. Then he placed branches over the hole to hide it, with a -small space for him to reach through and grasp the tail feathers of the -eagle. To the top of this cover he tied the plump young rabbit with a -piece of thong. After all was in readiness, Little Fox lifted the edge -of his cover and slid into the hole, resting his foot on a thick root -which stuck out of the earth into the hole. Placing his back against the -side of the hole, he waited patiently for the Golden Eagle. - -An hour passed and then two and three, and Little Fox began to feel his -muscles tighten up and his body start to grow stiff. He began to feel -impatient. Suddenly, he heard the rabbit begin to move about uneasily, -then tug in panic against the thong that held him. Surely the Golden -Eagle must be close by. Little Fox felt relaxed; the stiffness in his -body was gone. Now excitement rushed into his body as he waited for the -Golden Eagle to come to rest on the top of his hiding place. - -All at once, Little Fox felt the ground tremble and he heard what -sounded like the low rumble of a waterfall. Then he knew that what he -had heard was the low growl of a bear. He peered through a crack in the -cover over the hole and saw the bear’s towering form. Fear gripped the -heart of Little Fox. Many were the stories he had heard of Indians who -had lost their lives while hunting for the prized feathers of the Golden -Eagle. - -The bear, with the swiftness of a fleeting arrow, made one sweep with -his huge paw and the rabbit went sprawling. The bear paused as though he -were thinking about the problem before him. Here was one of his enemies -trapped beneath his feet. How would he reach his enemy? With an angry -growl he ripped at the boughs which covered the hiding place of Little -Fox until he had uncovered the top of the hole. - -Holding his breath and his heart beating wildly, Little Fox crouched far -down in the hole and waited for the final moment when he, instead of the -Golden Eagle, would fall victim in his own trap. The bear lunged but -missed his mark. Little Fox suddenly realized that the top of the hole -was too small for the bear to get his paw and his head in at the same -time. Again and again the bear lunged, but without success. The more he -lunged and failed, the angrier he became. He thrust first his paw and -then his head into the hole; but Little Fox, by pressing down against -the bottom of the hole, was able to keep just out of reach of the -flailing paws and gnashing teeth. All of a sudden, the bear pulled back -away from the hole as if to consider his next move. In this instant, -Little Fox thought of a way that might save his life. He quickly untied -the long leather thong around his waist, made a loop of it, and as -slowly and quietly as possible placed the loop just below the opening, -holding it in place all around by pressing the thong into the earth. -Little Fox tied the other end to the root on which he had been standing. - -Now the bear was returning. Little Fox waited, holding tight to the -leather thong. As the bear placed his head in the hole and so into the -loop, Little Fox pulled hard on the thong, which immediately came loose -from the earth and tightened around the throat of the bear. - -In angry surprise, the bear pulled back from the hole only to be stopped -short as the thong drew tight. Then he began a series of noises which -Little Fox remembered for many moons. The bear’s growls gradually grew -to roars, and then turned to cries of pain. The harder the bear pulled, -the tighter the thong gripped his throat, until the cries became coughs -and gasps. Then all was quiet. The bear’s thrashing around had ceased, -but still Little Fox waited. - -Little Fox slowly raised himself until he could see just over the edge. -There, not two feet from the hole, lay a huge bear, quite still and -dead. Little Fox quickly pulled himself from the hole and started at a -run for the village. - -He reached the village and, not stopping to answer any questions, ran -straight to his father’s wickiup. He began telling his story, still -panting and talking so fast that his father made him stop to get his -breath and then speak slowly. When Little Fox had finished, Swift Deer -gathered some of the other warriors and went to the place where this -adventure had taken place. With great pride, Swift Deer helped to skin -the bear and bring it back to the village. Not long after, Little Fox -stood in the Council meeting before the elders of the tribe and -recounted his tale of courage. And when all his words had been heard, -the Council voted that Little Fox should wear in his headband not one, -but two of the most treasured tail feathers of the Great Golden Eagle. - - - - - HOW LONG MOOSE BECAME A BRAVE - - -The Powhatan Indians were a great tribe whose hard work each year was -rewarded with large supplies of food and clothing. - -Long Moose was growing up among his people happily, doing his share of -the tribe’s work. He had become very tall and awkward. He had great -strength, too, which he hadn’t learned yet to use well. During games and -contests, Long Moose often forgot how strong he was and, not meaning to, -would hurt his friends, sometimes rather badly. - -Long Moose was still trying over and over to learn how to make hunting -tools when winter came. It was a bitter, cold, northern winter. Both his -mother and father became very sick and died after only a few days, -leaving his younger sister and himself alone without near relatives to -help them. - -Because Long Moose was not a skillful young brave, his sister had little -respect for him. He spent many days thinking sadly about his parents, -but doing nothing to get food and keep their shelter tight against the -wind and snow. Soon their small supply of food and fuel was nearly gone, -and Long Moose had brought no hides for making clothes or repairing -their home. He had also failed to give his share of food and hides for -all the tribe, as every warrior was expected to do. Not only his sister -but all the tribe began to feel that Little Moose was not a good -Powhatan. - -His sister’s harsh looks at him and his own growing hunger and cold made -Long Moose think about how and why he was not a good brother or a good -brave. He had to admit to himself that there was only one real reason -besides his poor hunting tools and bad marksmanship: he did not want to -hunt or make good hunting tools because he did not want to kill any -animals. - -He thought about how often he had gone out to hunt and even when, -without looking for them, he had run across deer near by, he would still -come back without having shot a single arrow. Long Moose knew that he -loved all wild animals as much as he had loved his parents, and loved -his sister and his friends now. - -Driven by his hunger, the cold, his shame, and his real love for his -sister, Long Moose set out several times to hunt. Each time he made a -kill, but he was nearly as sad when he had done so as he had been when -his parents died. To add to his sorrow, his sister would scold him for -his poor skill, and taunt him by saying that he would never grow to be a -real brave. - -All the tribe could see that Long Moose and his sister were hungry most -of the time. Their clothes were shabby and their home now was beyond -repair. - -One day in early spring, Long Moose went down to the edge of the lake to -be away from the unkind glances of his sister and his friends—and to -think. As he sat on a cold rock, staring out at the ice on the lake, an -old man of the tribe came up and stood quietly beside him, waiting for -Long Moose to speak. - -“Nantesi, my friend,” Long Moose said, wondering if he still were his -friend, “what brings you here to me?” - -“My friend, Long Moose, for nearly two moons now there has been hunger -in your home. Your clothes are worn out, and your sister is afraid to -leave your home, because she is ashamed of her clothes. She has told -some of the women that you are afraid to hunt the wild game because of -the bear that lurks in the woods. Some of the other families have given -her food and skins from time to time. But they can give her no more. The -next winter may be hard again and each family will need every bit of its -food and skins. You must not fear the bear. Your arms are strong, your -legs are swift, and surely you have the strength of three men. You -should be able to bring back more than is needed in your own home. Will -you continue to lose the respect of your tribe, or will you become a man -and take your place with the other braves of the tribe?” - -Long Moose thought carefully about each word the old brave had spoken. - -“Nantesi,” he said after a long silence, “let them think what they will. -I do not fear the wagging tongues of my neighbors, and I do not fear the -great bear of the forest. There is a good reason why I do not bring more -home for my sister and myself with some left over for the tribe. Never -have I feared the creatures of the forest. Instead, I have loved them -much as I love my own people. That is why, when on the hunt, my arrows -do not bring death. I cannot shoot these creatures who live so happily -among the trees and streams. Is it wrong to love these creatures so -much? Nantesi, do you not know the feeling I have when a deer licks my -hand, or a rabbit plays at my feet while I rest in the shade of a great -oak tree? These things have happened to me. The wild creatures trust me -and come right to my hand. I cannot bring death upon those who trust -me.” - -Nantesi said nothing. He understood now the feelings within this strange -young man. He rose to leave. - -“Wait, Nantesi, my friend. My heart is heavy. What can I do? I know that -what I believe is wrong in the eyes of many, for ours is a tribe of -great hunters. What am I do? I must live among my people, but I cannot -be happy unless I live my life the way I honestly believe I should.” - -“Long Moose, I am an old man. Some of our tribe think I am wise. But -this time they might not believe that what I say is wise. Go into the -hills with your troubled thoughts. Think calmly in the quiet woods, far -away from us. Only in this way can your heart give you the true answer -that all of nature has been given to man that he may give food and -shelter to those he loves and to himself.” Then Nantesi left as quickly -as he had come. - -The following morning, many in the tribe watched the lonely figure of -Long Moose leaving the village, as he headed toward the distant hills. -At last, after three weeks had passed, all eyes were turned toward the -far end of the village. Entering the camp, a fine buck upon his -shoulders, was Long Moose standing taller than ever before. His clothes -were tattered and torn, but there was a proud smile on his face. - -Going straight to his sister’s house, Long Moose set the fat buck at his -sister’s feet without a word. Smiling, he put one hand on her shoulder -as she stared at him in surprise. Many of the villagers crowded around -asking questions, but Long Moose said nothing and looked over their -heads for Nantesi. Then he saw the old man sitting contentedly before -his home, looking kindly in his direction. Walking over to where the old -brave sat, Long Moose asked if he could talk with him. Nantesi rose -slowly, and greeting Long Moose warmly, invited the young man into his -home. When both were seated, Nantesi, as before, waited for Long Moose -to speak. - -“Nantesi, my friend, for a long time I have been away from my tribe. As -you said would happen, my mind is no longer troubled. Up in the hills I -made a campsite for myself. I lived on nuts and berries and plants and -the cool water of the mountain streams. Each night I wrapped myself in -my blanket and slept a troubled sleep. - -“But three nights ago, when I had finished my evening prayer, I rolled -myself in my blanket and rested my head upon a soft bed of pine needles. -Sleep came suddenly, and for the first time in three weeks I slept -peacefully until the moon had risen high in the sky. I awoke with a -start knowing I had the answer that you had said I would find in the -forest. - -“Suddenly, I knew that I had watched the very creatures that I love -struggle with each other for life here in the forests and in the fields -and the streams. I had never thought that this was wrong. Right at this -very moment, the struggle for life is going on in many parts of the -forest. Before the sun brings the dawn of a new day, many of our forest -creatures will have died because others must live. The strongest or the -wisest live. Now I knew what I had hidden from myself that if some wild -creatures did not die to provide food for others, many of the same -animals that I love so much would die. I knew that I should not kill -just for the sake of killing. The animals themselves kill only when they -are hungry or their lives are in danger. I, too, could follow their -example and be a good brave. - -“The truth had come to me from life itself. I sat up and gazed into the -fire trying to decide whether I had been dreaming. Suddenly my heart was -happy once again. I went back to sleep and in the morning started my -trip back to the village. Halfway here I came upon a buck. My aim was -good. I have brought fresh meat for my sister to cook and store away, -and a hide for her to make into a new dress. I shall go out again -tomorrow and bring back my share for the tribe. - -“I have found the answer I had been searching for. Now I can return to -my tribe with pride. That is my story, Nantesi, and I wanted to tell you -first about it. It is good to be back. It is good to be a Powhatan.” - -Nantesi smiled across at his young friend. “It is good to have you back. -Welcome, brave!” - - - - - HOW A FISHING TRIP TAUGHT LOYALTY TO A BOY - - -It was a bright morning in the village of the Iroquois. Maseca, the -little Indian brave, awoke to the sound of the birds of the woodland. -Today Maseca and Chincho were going fishing and that was always a great -adventure, for they never knew exactly what would happen as they strode -through the forest or out along the wild streams. - -Maseca gathered up his fishing gear and he carefully went over it all to -see that it was in good shape. Then he sat down to eat some food his -mother had prepared for him. But he was impatient to get under way. So -he arose and, stuffing some dry deer meat into his pouch, started off in -search of Chincho. - -Because Chincho was a little older than the other children with whom he -and Maseca played, he would sometimes be the bully in the group. But -only on rare occasions did he bully Maseca. Such an occasion occurred -when he boasted to everyone that he could beat Maseca in a foot race. -Maseca had accepted the challenge and had beaten the older boy quite -badly. Since then, even though Chincho and Maseca had been close -friends, Chincho would let jealousy get the best of him and thought of -ways to teach Maseca a lesson for having beaten him in a foot race. - -Sometimes Chincho even found himself wishing that Maseca would break his -leg or suffer some other injury which would make him a cripple. But -whenever these thoughts entered his mind, Chincho would drive them out, -and dream about the many wonderful times he and Maseca had had together, -wandering through the forests and fishing in the streams. - -On this bright morning Chincho bolted the last of his breakfast as he -heard the hurrying footsteps of Maseca approaching his father’s wigwam. -Placing his deer meat in a leather pouch which his mother had made for -him and gathering up his fishing gear, Chincho quickly left the wigwam -to join Maseca and together they swiftly trotted off through the forest. -They wanted to be the first ones to the stream and get the best spots -for fishing. They did not speak as they trotted, for they knew that that -would only shorten their wind and their speed, and that the other boys -of the village might get there before them. Finally, they reached the -stream and settled down to catch the lazy fish that swam unaware of the -presence of the two boys. - -Early in the afternoon, having caught several good-sized fish, they -decided to hang their catch in a tree and do a little exploring -upstream. So they started out in a direction they had never gone before, -remembering the warnings of the elders to walk softly and not too far -from familiar ground, because one could get lost very easily in the -green forest. This was especially true in the summer when the leaves -often hid landmarks that would be easy to remember. - -As they traveled farther and farther upstream, gazing at all the -beauties of nature around them, Chincho suddenly stopped and threw -himself flat on the ground behind a big birch tree. Maseca, not knowing -the reason, but realizing that Chincho was not playing a game, did the -same thing. Maseca started to speak but Chincho motioned for him to -remain silent. Then Chincho pointed up ahead. About a hundred paces -ahead standing in a little clearing taking a drink from the stream was a -tremendous buck deer. Maseca had never seen so large a deer and he could -not help gasping in surprise. Chincho turned and frowned at him and -Maseca quickly stifled all other exclamations. Then Chincho crawled -close to Maseca. - -“Maseca,” he whispered, “do you think we could get near enough to that -deer to kill him? Wouldn’t it be wonderful to bring that buck back to -the village?” - -Maseca nodded that he thought it a wonderful idea and they agreed -quickly that they would try to take the big deer as a prize. After -making sure that the wind was blowing toward them, carrying their scent -away from the deer, they began to move quietly and slowly on their -stomachs toward the unsuspecting deer. Chincho rose to his knees and, -fitting a new arrow to his bow, stopped some thirty paces short of the -deer, drew back on the bowstring, and let the arrow fly. The boys heard -the arrow whistle as it flew and the thud as it struck its target. But -Chincho’s aim had not been accurate. The deer bounded away, the arrow -sticking in his side but not in a vital place. - -Chincho knew that he must obey the law of his tribe regarding any animal -a brave has wounded. He must track the wounded deer until he either came -upon him dead or could get close enough to make the kill. Long ago the -tribe had ruled wisely that it was cruel to let a wounded animal wander -the forest in pain, possibly suffering so much that it would injure -other animals, and possibly dying from loss of blood or from a sickness -from the wound. Chincho was tempted not to follow the deer into the -unknown woods, when he felt Maseca’s gaze upon him. - -“Chincho, you do not plan to leave without finding the wounded deer. It -is the law of our tribe.” - -Chincho looked guilty and said, “It is not a bad wound. The arrow barely -scratched him. He will be all right. Come, let us return to the village -before it is dark.” - -“No,” Maseca insisted, “we must follow the deer until we bring him down. -You must not leave a wounded animal to suffer. It is the law.” - -Chincho knew that Maseca was right, and yet in his heart he was afraid. -So he tried to excuse his cowardice by saying, “But it is also the law -of our tribe that we shall not wander too far from the familiar parts of -our land. We could become lost here in the green forest. We should turn -back.” As he started to turn, Chincho saw a challenging look in Maseca’s -eyes and he waited as Maseca spoke. - -“You may return to the village claiming that the law says one should not -wander too far, but I will follow the deer and make sure of his death. I -will mark my trail plainly so that by night or by day I can follow it -back to my starting place. Go, Chincho. Return to your father’s home and -see if you can sleep peacefully when you think of the deer you have -wounded.” - -Even while he was speaking, Maseca realized that his friend’s fear was -very great, and that it would be a mistake to force Chincho to follow -the buck. Maseca would have to worry as much about calming Chincho’s -fear as he would have to worry about finding the way back for both of -them. - -Chincho thought that Maseca would laugh at him and insisted now on going -with Maseca to trail the deer. So they started to follow the drops of -blood they found on the plants as they went through the forest. Maseca -broke branches and cut slices of bark from the sides of trees to mark -the path they were taking. - -For awhile the big buck had run straight ahead as fast as he could in -spite of the wound. Then the crushed grass showed where he had lain down -to rest for a moment. But the grass was rising up straight again, which -told the boys that the deer had not rested long, sensing the danger -close by. Soon they saw fewer blood spots, and they knew that the blood -was starting to clot. Now, Maseca knew the deer could live for some time -yet. - -“It grows late,” he warned Chincho. “We must hurry if we are to catch up -with the deer and claim our kill. We have only a short while left before -the sun will sink.” - -Just at that moment Chincho saw something off to the side of the trail, -lying half-hidden in the brush. It was brown. As Chincho looked more -closely, he saw it moving rhythmically as an animal does in breathing. -He touched Maseca lightly on the shoulder and pointed toward the brush. -They both realized that this must be the wounded buck. Just as they were -trying to decide what to do, the deer made up their minds for them. With -a bellow, he leaped from his hiding place and headed straight for -Chincho. Chincho stood rooted to the spot with fright. His eyes bulged -as he saw the huge beast, his antlers held low in attack, bearing down -upon him. Maseca raised his bow, and with all the courage and calmness -he could muster, drew back and let go the string. As his arrow whished -straight toward the onrushing buck, Maseca knew that his aim had been -straight. As the arrow struck, the deer leaped into the air toward -Chincho. The buck’s action was so quick that Chincho failed to move in -time. As it fell, one of its antlers cut deeply into Chincho’s leg. The -boy gasped in pain and slumped to the ground, next to the dead buck. - -Maseca ran quickly to his side and held his head in his arms. Then he -looked down at the nasty wound in Chincho’s leg and saw the blood -pouring out. Hurriedly, he gathered some large leaves, wet them in a -nearby stream, and placed them against the wound. Then he pulled a -leather thong from his leggings and used it to bind the leaves in place. -When he saw that the wound had nearly stopped bleeding, he spoke quietly -to Chincho. - -“I must go for help, Chincho. You must lie still and quiet until I -return.” With that Maseca pulled up all the strength that was left in -his tired body and started running at top speed along the trail he had -marked. - -As the sun sank behind the hills of the quiet valley, Chincho prayed -that Maseca would hurry. The pain was getting worse and, though the -blood had stopped flowing from the wound, Chincho was beginning to lose -strength. Suddenly, from down the trail, the boy heard the voices of -many braves. Then he heard his father shouting his name. - -“Over here! Over here!” Chincho called weakly. His father ran to him and -knelt at his son’s side. Soon Chincho was surrounded by many of the -older braves who looked first at him and then at the dead buck. He -searched among the faces for that of his friend. - -“Where is Maseca?” he asked his father. - -“Back in the village resting, my son,” his father said softly. “You see, -Maseca ran so fast through the forest to seek help for you that he -caught his foot in a root and twisted his leg badly. He wouldn’t stop -even though he was barely able to hobble into camp. He had just enough -strength left to tell us where you were before he fainted.” - -Chincho began to feel very guilty about the many times he had hoped that -Maseca would be injured some day just because Maseca had beaten him in -the foot race. - -“He will be well again soon, won’t he, father? He will be able to run as -fast as before?” His father smiled down at Chincho. - -“Is that what you want, my son?” he asked. - -“Oh, yes, father. He must be well again. Because he won the foot race -fairly, I have often wished that he would be hurt. Now that it has -really happened, I am sorry. I will never wish harm for any friend -again. Only then will I be a true son to my father and a true Iroquois -brave.” - -While Chincho and his father were talking, the other braves cut two -saplings and tied branches across them to make a stretcher to carry the -boy. Chincho’s father held his son’s hand as the other braves lifted the -boy onto the stretcher. - -“You have spoken wisely, my son. Do not worry. Maseca will soon be well -enough to race and hunt and fish again with you.” - -Chincho smiled up at his father and turned his head to look proudly at -the large buck that two braves were carrying, hung by its feet from a -sapling stretched across their shoulders. - -The next night there was a special council fire. Two young braves were -lying on stretchers, side by side, at the place of honor. At their -sides, stood their fathers. Then the Chief told the tribe about the -bravery and hunting skill and strength of these two boys. “They will be -great braves, worthy of the Iroquois nation,” he said solemnly. - -Chincho’s and Maseca’s fathers glanced proudly down at their sons. - - - - - LITTLE BEAR’S FIRST HUNT - - -Little Bear opened his eyes and looked around his wickiup home. As the -sleep left his eyes, he noticed that his father’s bed was empty and that -he was alone. Quickly he threw off his buffalo robe and ran to the door -of the wickiup. Pushing aside the deerskin he looked out into the small -Apache camp. - -There was quite a bit of activity. Everyone was hurrying about. Although -it was still very early, the cooking fires were burning brightly, and -the women of the tribe were busy preparing a hot meal. Then he -remembered that today was the day of the big hunt. - -Little Bear ran quickly through the village searching for his father, -Swift Eagle. Finally after asking several of his friends, he was told -that his father could probably be found at the corral. Soon he saw his -father looking over the horses. Swift Eagle was telling young braves -which horses to select for his use on the hunt. - -“Father,” called Little Bear, “why did you not waken me when the dawn -came? There has been much excitement since the sun first broke through -the night, but you did not wake me.” - -“My son, I wanted you to rest, for today is the day of the big hunt. -Soon the warriors will be gathering and we will be ready to leave for -the feeding grounds of the great buffalo. Now I must check the horses, -for we must take only the young and the strong. This will be a long and -hard Journey.” - -Little Bear suddenly realized that this was to be a real test for him. -When a young Apache is considered a young brave, he is taken on his -first big buffalo hunt along with the older warriors of the tribe. He -must prove himself worthy of being called a hunter. Little Bear had -waited a long time for this great day. He felt his heart beating a -little faster than usual and he was filled with excitement and a little -fear. Little Bear’s fear left when his father placed his hand upon his -son’s shoulder and said, “Be not afraid, my son, for you were born an -Apache and Apaches fear nothing. You will make a great hunter, and a -true Apache.” - -Together they walked back to their wickiup where Little Bear’s mother -had prepared a fine breakfast. When they had all eaten, they heard that -the hunting party was beginning to form. Soon all was in readiness, and -the great hunting party rode out from the village. The scouts had -reported that a rather large herd of buffalo had stopped to graze only -half a day’s ride from their camp. So it was for this herd that the -hunting party had made its plans. - -As they rode along, Little Bear began to think of how he would make his -first kill of buffalo, the largest of the wild game hunted by the -Apaches. Little Bear had hunted before but only for rabbits and other -small game. This was to be his day of triumph, and he was excited. Soon -the caravan of hunters halted to rest and replenish their water supply -from a spring near by. The scouts were sent ahead once again to see if -the herd had shifted position. - -As Swift Eagle and his son sat by the cool spring, Little Bear stared -toward the horizon hoping to be the first of the party to see the -returning scouts. His father had been watching him with a kindly eye, -and said, “Do not be too eager, my son. When excitement grows within the -body, the hand becomes unsteady. You must control our body and your -mind, or you will find that your aim will not be true. Your arrow, -instead of striking its mark, will do nothing but chew up the dust of -the prairie.” - -Little Bear listened quietly to his father; as so many times before, he -realized the wisdom in his father’s words. - -There was little conversation for a while, until the scouts returned to -report that the herd had not moved and that a short ride would bring the -party to within striking distance. The hunting party moved on until the -signal was passed that the herd was just over the next rise. -Instructions were given and the party quickly spread out into an -attacking formation, each brave hoping to have the best spot to ride -down the buffalo herd. As soon as everyone was in position, they waited -for the next signal of the leader. - -Little Bear could feel the excitement mounting in his body and, -remembering the words of his father, fought off the tenseness that was -filling his arms and legs. The rise in front of him, which separated the -hunting party from the herd, seemed to be very far away. Just as Little -Bear felt he could not control his pony or himself any longer, the -signal was given. The braves, with shouts rising from their throats, -raced over the rise. Soon there was a mixture of running, frightened -buffalo, and riding, yelling warrior hunters, and clouds of dust that -rose from the hundreds of hoofs churning the prairie. - -Little Bear drew an arrow from his quiver. Following the patient -teaching of his father, he calmly placed the arrow to the bow string. -Leaning forward on the neck of his pony, holding tight with his knees -pressed against his pony’s sides, he peered into the dust and quickly -spotted his quarry. A large bull buffalo was lumbering along a little -wide of the herd. Carefully taking aim, Little Bear let go his arrow. -The last thing he saw before the dust welled up again to block his sight -was his arrow protruding from the side of a stumbling buffalo. - -Little Bear swerved his pony rapidly away from the herd. When the pony -was able to check his forward speed, pony and rider withdrew to the side -of the battleground to watch the rest of the hunt in safety. As the herd -disappeared across the prairie, the members of the hunting party turned -their horses and began the ride back to where the herd had been grazing. -When the dust had cleared, Little Bear saw scattered across the prairie -the bodies of many buffalo which had fallen before the accurate shooting -of the hunters. Each brave would be able to tell his kill, for each -arrow bore the mark of its owner. - -Little Bear galloped toward the spot where he thought his buffalo had -fallen. While he rode, his heart beat very fast. He tried to show little -excitement as he drew near to a group of hunters who stood looking down -at an object upon the ground. As Little Bear drew close, he slowed his -pony. His father turned and smiled. Dismounting, Little Bear walked to -his father’s side. Lying on the ground at the feet of the older braves -was a bull buffalo of tremendous size. And there was the arrow of Little -Bear exactly where the arrow of a good hunter should be. He had hit the -buffalo in a vital spot. - -Swift Eagle placed his arm across the shoulders of his son. Amid the -many grunts and exclamations of approval coming from the warrior -hunters, Little Bear heard the deep calm, proud voice of his father. - -“You have done well, my son. This is a fine buffalo, one which we are -sure will prove to be the largest one killed this day. The many hours -spent in teaching you were not wasted. This you have proven today. You -will return to our village a hero and tell of your exploits at the -council tonight. No longer will you have to stay behind when the hunters -go in search of food. Today you have become a hunter and earned the -right to ride with the hunting party. Your father is proud.” - -And so the procession, after attending the buffalo and stripping the -hides and packing the fresh meat for the return trek, headed for home. -At the front of the party rode Swift Eagle and Little Bear, a proud -father and an even prouder son. Today the young brave had succeeded in -his first hunt. - - - - - CRYING EAGLE SEES A GREAT BATTLE - - -It was a dark winter evening in the small Iroquois village. The cries of -the wolf echoed in the forest as Great Eagle, war leader of the -Iroquois, was preparing for bed. He stopped to take a last look for the -night at his young son, Crying Eagle, and smiled at his boy who slept so -peacefully. As he pulled the warm robe up around his son’s neck to keep -the cold from seeping in and disturbing his sleep, he thought to -himself, - -“How lucky I am to have been blessed with such a son. Truly, he will be -a leader among his people. Not because he is the son of Great Eagle, war -chief of the Iroquois, but because he will be tall and strong and brave -and will learn well the ways of the tribe. Soon he will be ready to be a -leader and when that day comes, I will be proud to stand forth and say, -‘This is my son.’” - -Great Eagle slept warm and soundly that night and arose with the dawn of -the next day. Today his son was to go on a trek with him to learn the -ways of the wild game in winter time. - -Great Eagle moved to his son’s bed and called softly to him, “Come, my -son, for we have a long way to travel and much to do today.” - -Crying Eagle got up quickly, put on his warm winter clothes, and sat -with his father at breakfast. As soon as breakfast was over, they -gathered their weapons and left the protection of the Iroquois village -and headed toward the forest. As they walked along the trail, Great -Eagle pointed out different signs. Here the snow had been scraped by a -deer nosing for anything green under the snow. There was a squirrel nest -bulging with its store of winter food. And everywhere there were the -tracks of many wolves. This had been a hard winter, and the hungry -wolves were moving in packs to seek out easy prey. Many animals would -not find enough food to keep them at full strength. Unless one were very -careful, escape from an attack by these forest marauders would be -impossible. - -Crying Eagle began to get tired and his father motioned toward a small -glen in the forest off to the side of the trail. There were some fallen -logs upon which they could sit and have their lunch of jerked venison -and water. As they sat eating slowly, Great Eagle watched the forest -around them for any signs of game. But all was quiet except for the -singing of the few winter birds that lived there, even in the coldest -weather. Suddenly, they heard the crackling of some dry timber in the -distance and Great Eagle raised his head. - -“A buck leaping through the brush,” he said. - -“How can you tell, father?” - -“Listen, my son! You will discover that there is a moment of silence -between each crackling of brush. That tells you that whatever makes the -noise is leaping, and the heavy crashing of brush tells you that the -animal is large. Because it leaps, you know it is not a bear. So we can -be almost sure that it is a buck.” - -Just as Great Eagle stopped speaking, they saw a large buck moving in -long leaps among the brush and small trees. Suddenly, he stopped and -sniffed the air. Great Eagle and his son stood perfectly still. The buck -looked directly toward them. The breeze was blowing toward the buck and -he had caught their scent. Crying Eagle raised his bow but felt his -father’s hand upon his shoulder. - -“No, my son. The buck is truly beautiful. But our wigwam is full of -venison, and we have enough fine clothes to last for a long time. We do -not kill the forest animals unless we really need to. Truly, I know how -much you want to make a kill and tell your friends of the fine buck your -steady hand brought down, but that must wait for another day. We are -here to learn the way animals live during the winter, so that when you -must hunt for your family, you will find it easy.” - -The buck seemed to wait for Great Eagle to speak with his son. Then he -leaped away through the forest. Great Eagle and his son spent the rest -of the afternoon studying other signs of wild life. As the sun began to -sink low in the west, Great Eagle turned and started on the trail for -home. After they had gone a ways, Great Eagle halted and motioned for -his son to be still. Together the two Indians crouched low and Great -Eagle pointed through the trees. There, only three hundred paces away in -a clearing, stood a large buck. Off to the right of the buck stood a -beautiful brown doe and further on through the trees was another buck, -moving slowly forward through the trees. - -“Why do we stop, father?” asked Crying Eagle, still crouching low in the -snow. - -“Because, son, I believe that we are about to see something very rarely -seen by humans. The buck in the clearing is standing guard over his -bride, the doe on our right. The buck coming through the trees is young -and wants the doe, too. So he is challenging the old buck to a duel. The -winner will get the doe. In a moment they will face each other in the -clearing. They will meet head on and the battle will be on. The buck -that gives up first and turns from the battle will be the loser, and the -other will claim his bride.” - -Soon, as Great Eagle had said, the younger buck entered the clearing. -The two faced each other, the younger pawing at the ground while the -older stood surveying this young challenger of his right to the doe, who -lay watching them calmly from the brush to the side of the clearing. -Then the two bucks began to circle. They stopped and almost at once the -young one charged. The older buck met the attack head on and there was a -loud crash as their antlers met and locked. They pushed and pulled and -wrenched until suddenly their antlers were free. They were almost -equally matched, for even though the younger buck seemed faster, the -older was a veteran of many such battles and knew more tricks in -fighting. - -Again they locked horns but unlocked quickly this time. Then the older -buck’s antlers slashed into the side of the young buck. Back and forth -the battle waged and then, as suddenly as it had started, it was over. -The young buck had had enough. He tossed his head into the air and -leaped off into the forest, to lick his wounds and wait for another doe. -The old buck walked with what looked like pride to his doe. She rose to -her feet and, side by side, they began pushing their noses into the snow -to smell out food. - -“Come,” said Great Eagle, “let us leave them in peace. You have seen one -of the great events in the life of wild animals. Remember it well for -you may be called upon to defend the persons and things you love, even -when you think the enemy is stronger. Remember how strength alone is not -enough. You must know how to fight well in order to win.” - -Crying Eagle was thinking about each word his father had spoken as they -headed home. They moved rapidly because they wanted to reach the village -before dark. Soon through the trees they could see the flickering of -many campfires. In a few moments they were in the camp and at home. A -hot meal of stew was waiting for them, and father and son ate heartily. -When they had finished, Crying Eagle spoke to his father. - -“My father, you opened my eyes today to many new things. I hope that I -have learned my lesson well and will always obey your teaching.” - -Crying Eagle kept his promise well. Some years later there was trouble -between his village and the neighboring tribes. While the young bucks -shouted for blood and the scalps of their neighbors, Crying Eagle called -for peace and talk. Like his father in battle, he was a brave warrior, -but where talk around the council fire could save lives, Crying Eagle -was a great leader and peacemaker. - -Crying Eagle lived to a very old age, but he never forgot that walk -through the winter forest with his father Chief Great Eagle, war chief -of the mighty Iroquois. - - - Based on a story told to the author by John Fitch, Vermont farmer, - 1937. - - - - - SPOTTED TAIL AND THE GHOST WOLF - - -The Mohawk village of bark houses nestled along the river, and all was -peace and contentment in the village. Spotted Tail and his family lived -in peace and contentment in the village, for they were a happy people. -The hunting and fishing were good and there was little sickness among -the people of his tribe and all was made so that the people would be -happy. - -When young Spotted Tail had reached his fifteenth summer, something -happened to his tribe. Suddenly the game of the forest became scarce. -The deer began to disappear and even the smallest of game was becoming -hard to find. This concerned the council, for never before had this -happened to their hunting grounds. And then one day while the warriors -were busy preparing to go out on the hunt, a young Mohawk warrior -staggered into the camp. Blood dripped from his body and as he reached -the center of the village he collapsed. - -Eager hands lifted him and carried him to his house and when his wounds -had been bathed the great chief of the Mohawks came to talk with him. - -“What has happened to you, my brother? Surely this is the work of some -great savage beast that you have encountered in the green forest.” - -“O Great Chief, my companion and I had been following the tracks of a -deer and feeling we were quite lucky to have come upon such a find. -Suddenly as we trotted along the trail following the deer there was a -horrible snarling from off to the side of the trail. We stopped and -looked toward the side of the trail, and there before our very eyes was -a pack of ferocious-looking wolves. Before we could even draw our -bowstrings they were upon us. My companion and I fought them, but soon -they had dragged my companion to the ground. They began to fight among -themselves over one of their wounded comrades, and it was then that I -crawled off into the brush and when I saw my chance I ran as fast as I -could toward our village. I could hear the snarls of the pack behind me -but I ran as fast as my legs could carry me and soon I heard them no -more. But one thing I will always remember is the leader of the pack, a -white wolf of tremendous size. He had a beautiful white coat and was -much larger than the rest of the pack. I am tired, I must rest now.” - -And with that the warrior closed his eyes and slept. - -The chief immediately called a council of his warriors and among them -was Spotted Tail’s father. Now the reason for the lack of game was -known. The winter further north had been very severe and so the wolf -pack had come further south seeking food. But now that they had been -roaming so free for so long they decided to stay. - -The chief rose before the council and said: - -“We must set out on the hunt immediately, but we must hunt this pack of -wolves and destroy them before they cause all the deer to disappear. If -we fail, our smoke racks will become empty and our people will starve.” - -So party after party of warriors were sent out in search of the wolf -pack, but they always returned disappointed; for they had often come -upon the pack but never had been able to get close enough to do any real -damage. - -Finally Sleeping Water, one of the young warriors, Suggested that -instead of going in large parties they ought to go out in pairs or three -at a time and when sighting the pack send word to a larger hunting party -and they in turn could surround and destroy the pack. - -The council approved of this method and so the warriors began to go out -in pairs. It was now that Spotted Tail began his adventure which was to -be spoken of in the lodges for many moons to come. - -Spotted Tail was chosen by Sleeping Water to go as his companion, and -the two braves started on the hunt. They ranged far and wide and finally -picked up the trail of the pack. Sleeping Water knelt by the tracks of -the wolves and could tell that they were fairly fresh tracks. - -Quickly the two braves trotted along the trail in pursuit of the pack -and soon through the trees ahead Sleeping Water spotted the pack moving -stealthily through the trees as if stalking an animal. Turning to -Spotted Tail he said, “Spotted Tail, you will keep the pack in sight and -follow them as they move, marking your trail. I will return and fetch a -large hunting party and we shall destroy this pack of wolves. You are -not afraid to keep watch?” - -Spotted Tail felt it a great honor to be asked to do such an important -job and he told Sleeping Water that he would keep close watch on the -pack and if he moved he would mark his trail well. - -When Sleeping Water departed, Spotted Tail kept close watch on the pack -as it milled around. Evidently the hunt they were on was ended, for many -of the wolves were circling in the snow and finding resting places. - -It was fast growing dark and Spotted Tail hoped that they would not -decide to move in the dark or he would surely lose them before the dawn. -Then he saw him—the giant white leader of the pack—standing off to one -side of the pack as if on guard. He was truly a majestic animal, fully -half a foot taller at the shoulder than the other wolves and his coat -was a shimmering white as pure as the snow. - -As night settled, a bright moon came out and the night was shattered by -the baying of the wolves at the moon. - -On a rock pinnacle overlooking the wolves’ bedding ground, the great -white leader stood guard, his eyes never still, moving from side to side -as he watched for any approaching danger. Spotted Tail remained awake as -long as he could, but soon his eyes felt very tired. He was about to -drop off to sleep when he noticed the pack stirring. He gazed out into -the shadows of the night and the leader seemed to be staring right -through the brush and trees into Spotted Tail’s hiding place. - -Then Spotted Tail saw the reason for the movement: a deer had wandered -to within a short distance of the wolves, and now the pack was preparing -to kill this unsuspecting victim. - -The leader seemed to bark instructions and suddenly the pack was up and -circling the deer. There was a mad rush and suddenly the excitement was -over, the booty was shared, and the pack settled down once again. - -Spotted Tail breathed a sigh of relief, for the pack in chasing the deer -had come too close for comfort to his hiding place in the thick brush. -Dawn was fast approaching, and now the pack was on the move once again. -Spotted Tail followed as close as he dared, making sure that he kept -downwind from these lean hungry wolves that had caused death and -starvation to come to his People. Then he got an idea. - -If he could get a good shot in and wound or even kill the leader, it -might have the same effect as if a chief died, the pack would be without -a leader and might be so disorganized that the hunters from his tribe, -who he was sure were fast approaching, would be able to make easy work -of the rest of the pack. - -Then the opportunity came his way. There standing off to the side of the -pack was the large white leader. Spotted Tail settled himself upon one -knee in the snow and drawing careful aim with his bow, he let fly. The -arrow seemed to go right through the great beast and he leaped high in -the air. Spotted Tail was about to shout of his great shot to the -heavens when he saw that the wolf had come to rest on all fours and was -turned now in his direction, his teeth bared and a terrible snarl coming -from deep within his throat. - -Gathered behind the great white wolf like an army, was the rest of the -pack, snarling and waiting for the orders from their leader, but the -leader seemed to warn them away—this was his kill—and slowly began -moving toward Spotted Tail. - -Spotted Tail stood firm and placed another arrow to his bowstring. He -fired again, and the arrow again seemed to go straight to its mark but -still the beast kept moving forward. Now the wolf began to run in a -steady loping trot toward the Indian and suddenly he was leaping. - -Spotted Tail drew his knife, but in mid-air the wolf seemed to stop and -try to turn and return from whence he had come, and then the body was -crashing to the ground, an arrow quivering in his side. Then there were -howls and yells and cries from many points of the forest and arrows came -flying into the wolf pack. Beast after beast fell under the onslaught of -deadly shafts being fired by revenge-seeking Mohawk warriors until -suddenly the whole pack lay dead in the quiet of the winter forest. - -It all happened so quickly that before Spotted Tail realized what had -happened, Sleeping Water was lifting him from the snow smiling. - -“You have done well, my young brother, you have been brave this day. You -left very clear signs for our party to follow and because of that we -were able to wipe out this pack of beasts which have killed so much -game.” - -“But the leader of the pack—I fired an arrow into him and it went right -through him. Twice I saw this happen. He must have been a ghost and yet -I saw his body hit the ground with the arrows of my brothers. How do you -explain this, Sleeping Water?” - -“Come, Spotted Tail, I will show you.” Together they walked to where the -great beast lay. - -“You see, his coat was such a pure white that it blended with the snow -and when you fired it seemed as though you hit him but actually you -missed. It is no shame, for it was a long and a difficult shot and when -you fired a second time as he was moving toward you, the sun on the snow -caused reflection to make you misjudge your shot. - -“We observed all this from our hiding places, for we came upon you just -as you were preparing to make your first shot. But, please, Spotted -Tail, do not take a chance like that again. It is very foolish to try -something so dangerous when you are alone and especially when you knew -that help was on the way. But this adventure has ended well, and you -will have much to tell in the medicine lodge tonight, of the great ghost -wolf that hunted these lands.” - -And so the pack was destroyed and soon the game returned once again to -the hunting ground of the Mohawk and once again all was peaceful and -happy along the Osage River. - - - This story was told to the author by Jim Nutley of the Canadian Forest - Ranger Service. - - - - - 3. CUSTOMS - - - - - THE TRIBES GATHER - - -The Cree were plains Indians. Today their village was full of activity. -A hunting party had just returned after a very successful hunt. The -braves were already around the great council fire, telling of their -exploits. Among these warriors was Slow Tongue, whose bravery and -courage among the Cree was never questioned. - -When all the celebrating was over, Slow Tongue returned to his tepee and -his family. His young son, Swift Hawk, had waited up for him and, with -pride in his eyes, he looked up into his father’s face and said, “I am -very proud to have you for my father.” - -“My young son, it is long past your bedtime and you should have closed -your ears to the night noises of the prairie many hours ago. But I must -also say that I am proud to have you as a son and tomorrow we shall talk -and I shall tell you all about the hunt.” Slow Tongue turned to leave -his son’s side when he heard a noise at the entrance of his tepee. - -“Slow Tongue,” a voice called quietly, “it is I, Seeing Bear. Come, I -must speak with you.” - -Slow Tongue left the tepee. “Why do you call me from my tepee so late in -the night, Sleeping Bear,” he asked. “I am tired and my buffalo robe -beckons to me to come and wrap myself in its warm folds, for my body -aches.” - -“Look, Slow Tongue! Look to the north! At first I thought the heat of -the day had made me see things that do not exist. But now I am sure it -has not. Look and tell me what you see.” - -Slow Tongue turned his head to the north and gazed out into the darkness -of the night. Far in the distance he saw a red glow which disappeared, -appeared again, and disappeared many times. - -“What can it mean, Slow Tongue?” - -“It is a message, Seeing Bear. The fire signal tells that the tribes of -the plains are gathering for the Sun Dance. Truly this is great news. -Tomorrow we must break camp and leave for the northern meadow of the -Blue Star, for it is there that the great celebrations will be held. You -go to the southern part of the village and I will go to the northern -part, and we will spread the word. It is late and many are asleep, but -surely this is news for which they will be glad to be awakened.” - -The next morning there was great excitement in the Cree village. The -gathering for the Sun Dance not only meant gathering to celebrate the -greatest religious ceremony of the plains Indians, but it also meant -that it would be a time for great feasts, mock battles, ceremonial -hunts, and the recounting of the past year’s experience with many old -friends. And, of course, the men looked forward to smoking the -ceremonial pipes which was also a part of this great occasion. - -The tribe had soon broken down its village and packed and the great -procession headed north toward the meadow of the Blue Star. - -For two days and two nights the Cree village moved northward. Their -progress was slow but steady, and there was much gaiety. There was much -to look forward to, and many of the younger braves could hardly be kept -from rushing on ahead of the tribe. - -Soon other tribes began to join the Cree in their trek north. In all -directions smoke signals could be seen, sent up by eager messengers -reporting the movements of the tribes as they converged on the sacred -grounds. - -It was very clear to Swift Hawk now that friend and enemy were walking -side by side. This was one time during the year when the burning desire -to strike out at your enemy was replaced by a stronger desire to do -worship together in the hope of a good year to come. - -Soon the meadow of the Blue Star was reached, and the tribe of Swift -Hawk chose a place to set its village in the great circle with the -tribe’s sacred tepee as its center. Campfires began to burn merrily, and -the smell of cooking food filled the air. Old and young warriors walked -about to renew old acquaintances and talk about what had happened during -the past year. Dancers could be seen here and there practicing seriously -for the time of the great ceremony. - -Soon word spread through the encampment that there were to be riding -contests at the far west side of the meadow on the following day. These -contests would be open to young braves who had made their first buffalo -kill during the last year. This made Swift Hawk leap and shout for joy. -Just last month he had brought down his first buffalo. This meant he -could enter the riding contest. For many years now Swift Hawk had -watched the contests from afar. Each year he promised himself that next -year he would enter and win. Each year his father told him to be patient -and that his time would come. - -It was a very difficult contest to test the skills of the young -warriors. Each boy was to start his ride from the top of a hill that -sloped sharply down into the meadow. At every one-hundred-yard point -along a twisting path down the steep slope, for a distance of five -hundred yards, were four sets of poles, two poles to each set. Each set -was driven in the ground a buffalo’s length apart until they stood -between four and five feet above ground. Between these two poles a -buffalo hide was stretched to look like a buffalo running directly -toward the sloping path, his flank toward the young warriors as they -rode down. - -Each young brave was allowed a bow of his choice, four arrows, and a -quiver. The brave, when given the signal to go, would race down the -slope at full speed. Drawing an arrow from the quiver and bending his -body down under the neck of his pony and holding on with his feet, he -would aim his arrow under the neck of the pony and shoot the arrow into -the buffalo hide. He would do this with each of the four arrows. - -Such a contest would surely test the strength and courage of any young -brave. But young Indians were brought up to fear little and to welcome a -test like this. For this reason it was no surprise to the great -chieftains when a rather large group of young braves gathered at the -starting point the next morning. Each boy sat astride a fine looking -pony, usually the gift of his father or some other leading member of the -tribe. Each boy had his bow, his quiver, and four very special arrows -which had been worked over and cared for like a pet or one of the -family. - -Final instructions were given to the young braves, and the riding -contest was on! There was a great cheer from all who were watching as -each rider left the starting point. This was a friendly match among boys -from many tribes that often fought each other the rest of the year. Down -the steep slope a lone warrior could be seen stationed at each buffalo -hide. Here he could not only retrieve arrows but help to judge the young -braves as they rode by and fired at the target. - -Soon it was Swift Hawk’s turn. Remembering all that his father had -taught him, he dug his heels into his pony’s sides and started his fast -and dangerous ride. Carefully he drew an arrow from the quiver; then -bending under the pony’s neck, he placed the arrow to the bow, and as -the target came into view, Swift Hawk let his arrow fly! He heard the -plunk as the arrow struck the hide. With his head still under the pony’s -neck and riding so hard, he could hardly have seen where it had landed. -But a loud cheer told him that he had made a good shot. Down the steep, -winding course, Swift Hawk swiftly shot his arrows at the three other -targets, and went back toward the starting point. - -As he reached the hilltop he heard a great shout go up. Looking down the -course he saw a young Crow brave just turning his pony to return to the -starting point. The loud cheer meant that he had ridden well and made -many good hits. - -One by one each of the other young braves made his attempt but none -could equal the riding and skill of the young Crow Indian. And so it was -when the last contestant had made his ride and fired no better than the -rest that the Crow brave was announced as the winner. Swift Hawk was one -of the first to reach his side and congratulate him on his victory. Deep -in his heart, Swift Hawk was sad. But he was also very happy for this -young brave. Surely the young man had deserved to win; and, above all, -Swift Hawk realized how happy the young brave and his family must be -that he had won. - -The contest over, Swift Hawk returned to his home and his father, -disappointed but not unhappy now. There would be other contests, and -this was a time of celebration and joy. His father found him sitting -beside a tree stump. - -“You did very well, my son,” Slow Tongue said, placing his hands upon -Swift Hawk’s shoulders. “The Crow boy who won did just a little bit -better, but all the Cree are proud of you. There will be other contests -and many games. Soon your turn will come. But even if it should not, -remember what I have told you. As long as you play fair with your fellow -braves and obey the rules, there is nothing to be ashamed of when you -lose to someone who plays fair and has great skill.” - -“Thank you, father, I shall always remember that.” - -Games and new contests were beginning. Just as Swift Hawk’s father had -told him, his time would come and sooner than he expected. In the foot -race he ran much faster than any of his fellow braves, winning easily. -Swift Hawk was as good a winner as he had been a good loser, boasting to -no one about his victory. - - - - - SINGING EAGLE’S FIRST CLOTHES - - -The Huron tribe were a rather typical tribe of the Eastern woodlands. -They were a hunting and fishing tribe, and when their villages were -built they were built to last for a long time. - -In this particular village of the Hurons, there lived a young boy by the -name of Singing Eagle. Now as was the custom among most of the tribes of -that area, a young Indian child did not own any clothes at all until he -reached the age of ten. - -This particular day was to be a great one for Singing Eagle, but when he -woke that late summer morning, it was just another day for him. - -After eating his breakfast, he dashed away to play with the other -children. Meanwhile back at the wigwam, Singing Eagle’s mother, Early -Dawn, was very busy indeed. For many days and nights she had been -working quite hard making Singing Eagle his first real set of clothing. - -Singing Eagle’s father had hunted the big brown buck early last spring -and his long chase had finally been rewarded, when he was able to shoot -and kill a very fine large buck. Carefully skinning the buck, he had -returned both the skin and the meat to his wigwam, where his wife -immediately set to work tanning the skin in preparation for making it -into a winter outfit for young Singing Eagle. - -When the skin had been carefully tanned, Singing Eagle’s mother had -fashioned from it a pair of leggings. The leggings of the woodland -Indian were made in matched pairs. They covered the whole leg and fitted -rather snugly and were held up with a thong fastened to the waistbelt. -The buckskin was sewn together with threads of sinew. - -The shirt, which Singing Eagle’s mother was so proud of, had long -sleeves and would reach to Singing Eagle’s knees, but above all the -shirt was beautifully decorated with painted pictures. When Singing -Eagle grew up, the paintings would be upon his future shirts and -beadwork would also be added. The shirt was of buckskin. - -Finally Singing Eagle’s mother proudly held up, for her husband to see, -the beautiful moccasins. The moccasins of the woodland Indian were -fashioned from one piece of skin and were soft-soled and often these too -were decorated with beadwork. Here Singing Eagle’s mother had decided -not to wait until her son grew any more, but had put a beautiful beaded -design on the toe of each moccasin. This was to be a truly wonderful -day. - -After lunch, Singing Eagle lay down to rest, for he had been playing -very hard that morning with the other children. When he awoke, he looked -around and his eyes fairly jumped from his head. There at the foot of -his bed was his first suit of clothing. Quickly he grasped them to him -and hugged them, feeling how soft and pliable they were, following the -many days of work. - -Quickly he slipped into the clothes and when he was completely dressed, -ran from the wigwam to find his father and show him his beautiful -clothes. Soon he found his father at the edge of the village talking -with two other braves of the tribe. All excited, he pulled at his -father’s sleeve until his father turned and noticing the clothes, -quickly changed his expression from anger to one of surprise. - -“How handsome you look, my son. Your mother has done a fine job on your -clothes. I wish that my shirts were as beautiful as the one you now wear -upon your back. You look very much like a man now, my son.” - -Singing Eagle was very proud that his father had noticed his clothes and -given him such fine compliments. But time was wasting. As was customary -when a young Indian boy received his first full set of clothing to wear, -the rest of the day was spent in showing off his new clothes to his many -friends. And so that day, in a matter of a couple of hours, the whole -Huron village knew that Singing Eagle had his first real Indian suit, -made from a fine buck that his father had shot just for him. - - - - - THE NEW TEPEE - - -The Blackfoot village was all astir to greet the new day. It was late in -the springtime, and the great hunters of the tribe had been off to hunt -the buffalo. Word had just reached the village that the hunt was over -and the hunting party was on the way home. - -This made Little Bird very happy, for she knew that her husband, Big Red -Bear, would be returning to the tepee and that there would be much -celebrating in the tribe. Everything must be made ready to greet the -hunters. - -The women of the village began dashing around preparing for the arrival -of the hunting party. There was much to be done and much work lay ahead, -now that the buffalo had been killed. The meat must be stored and some -of it smoked, and the hides must be turned into new tepee covers and -robes. All this would take place after the celebration, but still the -women of the tribe knew they had a long job ahead. - -The news was good. The hunt had been successful, and many buffalo had -fallen before the weapons of the hunters. The buffalo had a good winter -and were not thin or ragged. The grass had been full-grown and rich. -Enough rain had fallen to provide the food and water necessary to make -the buffalo fat and a good target for expert bowmen. - -Soon all was in readiness and everyone waited impatiently for the first -signs of the returning hunters. And then the signal came! A young brave -on a shaggy brown pony came dashing through the village, announcing the -arrival of the hunters. - -Everyone was out to greet them and shout thanks and praise. Husbands and -wives, fathers and children greeted each other warmly. The tribe was -filled with joy. - -Night came swiftly. Before long the beating drums told the people that -the dancing and feasting was to begin. This celebration often lasted all -night and sometimes into the next day; then as dancers tired, they would -wander off to their tepees for the first really peaceful sleep since the -hunting party had left the village. - -Little Bird and her husband enjoyed the great feast and celebration. The -next day Little Bird set to work on the buffalo skins for her family -tepee. It had been a hard winter and the weather had damaged many -Blackfoot homes. There were more than enough skins brought back by the -hunters, so that those tepee coverings that had become worn and tattered -could be replaced. So Little Bird set to work with the women of the -tribe who were busy preparing and sewing together the buffalo hides to -make new covers for the tepees. - -One day Little Bird learned that a new tepee was to be built in the -village. The old tepee of the chief had been damaged so badly by the -winter snow and ice, and the poles had become so rotted, that the tribe -agreed to build him a new tepee. The building of a new tepee was -important because everybody in the tribe helped to make it. All the -friends and neighbors would be invited to attend a great feast and when -the feast was over, the women would begin sewing the skins together. - -Little Bird and her husband went to the feast. When it was over, Little -Bird sat down with the rest of the women and, taking up her bone needle, -began to sew two buffalo hides together. The cutting of the skins had -been entrusted to Slow Water, the wife of Black Fox, the tribe’s best -hunter, since she had great skill in judging the number of skins needed -by their size and shape. They used no patterns, so only a woman with -this kind of skill was asked to do the cutting. - -As the sewing continued and the tepee walls began to take shape, even -more whispering went on around Little Bird. When Little Bird asked one -of her friends what it was all about, her friend would only say, “Be -patient, Little Bird, for soon we shall all know what they have been -whispering about.” - -The next day the women who had been working on the skins came to the -tepee of Little Bird. Because her husband was away, Little Bird invited -the women to sit and talk. There was a great deal of laughter as the -women sat down. Slow Water, the skillful cutter, had been chosen to -speak to Little Bird for all of them. - -“Little Bird,” she began, “we are here to ask you to do something for -our tribe. You always have a smile for everyone wherever you go in the -village. As you know, we must choose someone who is always cheerful to -work on the smoke flaps for the new tepee. We are here to ask you, -Little Bird, to work on the smoke flaps of the new tepee, so that your -happy spirit will be woven into the flap and the smoke will depart from -the tepee evenly and smoothly.” - -Little Bird smiled. Her heart was happy. This was truly a great honor. -Now she understood why all the whispering had been going on the last -couple of days. - -“I will be happy to help sew the smoke flaps of the new tepee. It is a -great honor for which I thank you from the bottom of my heart.” - -And some say that as long as that tepee stood, the chief never had to -worry about the smoke rising out of the tepee easily, even on stormy, -windy nights. The Indians believed that the happy spirit of Little Bird -really lived in that flap. - - - - - LITTLE DOVE LEARNS TO WEAVE - - -When Little Dove, a Winnebago baby girl, was born she had everything a -new-born baby could ask for. First of all, her father was chief of the -Winnebagos, and her mother was considered one of the most beautiful -women in the tribe. - -There were many relatives who came to view the new child and left many -precious gifts for her. - -When she was born, Little Dove was strapped to a cradle board and -carried by her mother in this fashion. Each day her mother would unwrap -her and clean her body all over and massage her little limbs. Then she -was wrapped once again on the board, and life continued this way until -the baby was able to walk. - -She was always fed when she was hungry and was never but a few feet from -her mother’s side. But soon Little Dove began to walk and so she left -the cradle board and began to run and play with the other children in -the out of doors. - -Everyone was affectionate and indulgent toward the girl as Indians -always were toward their children. Soon, however, they realized that -Little Dove was beginning to grow up. Little Dove was already ten -summers old, when her mother called her to the side of their home to -talk with her. - -“Little Dove,” she commenced, “you must start to prepare for your life -later on as a wife and a mother. If you are to be a good wife, you must -learn the work that all Indian women must do.” - -Most Indian girls welcomed this advice from their mothers, but Little -Dove was different. Because she was the chief’s daughter some people had -given her the idea that she would be waited upon for the rest of her -life—if not by her mother or other women of the tribe, then eventually -by her husband. When she told this to her mother, her mother tried to -explain, but Little Dove did not want to listen and simply walked away. - -Soft Feather, her mother, was very much concerned and went to talk to -her husband. But just as many fathers do even today, the chief said, - -“Be patient, she is young and she will learn.” - -Soft Feather was quite disturbed and each day she would ask Little Dove -to come and begin to learn, but each day Little Dove would run off to -play with the younger children while the older children were busy -learning the work that goes with adult life. - -One day young Little Dove noticed an Indian boy that she had seen -several times sitting by himself shaping a bow. - -“What are you doing?” she asked. - -“I am shaping a bow so that when I marry I will have a fine weapon with -which to bring down the running deer.” - -For a long while Little Dove sat with the young boy, and nothing more -was said. Finally the young brave rose and, bidding good-bye to Little -Dove, started for his home. - -Little Dove was now twelve and each day she would see the young boy at -work or play. Finally she went to her mother. - -“Mother, the young boy who has the pretty belt and bone-handled knife, -who is he?” - -“That, my daughter, is your father’s best friend’s son, Straight Arrow. -Why, do you like him especially?” - -“I like him a lot.” - -Several weeks passed, and one day as Little Dove was idling her time -away dangling her feet in a stream, young Straight Arrow came to the -water’s edge to wash some dirt from his arms and legs. He had been -working in the garden with his father and now was going to clean up. -Little Dove looked directly at him and said, - -“Are you planning on taking a wife very soon, Straight Arrow?” - -“I suppose so, Little Dove, for I am almost sixteen and my father said -that I should be married now.” - -“I too am planning to be married soon,” said Little Dove. - -“Can you cook, or sew, or weave baskets?” - -“No, I cannot do those things. Will I have to?” - -“Well, I do not know about you but any girl that I marry must be able to -do that and lots more. Well, I must be going now. It is time for lunch -and I am very hungry and my sister is a very good cook.” - -With that, Straight Arrow left the side of the stream and he left behind -a very angry Little Dove. - -Little Dove rushed home and told her mother what had happened. When she -had finished blurting out her story, her mother said, - -“And now what do you want me to do about it, my Little Dove?” - -“Mother, will you teach me to weave baskets and sew and cook?” - -So the lessons began that very afternoon. The cooking was easy but when -it came to the weaving, that was a little more difficult and it was a -long time before Little Dove could weave a basket that looked like a -basket. - -First, she and her mother would gather some thin ash and linden trees. -These had to be straight and free of knots. They they would strip them -of the bark. These they pounded until they came apart in long splints. -Then these were dyed and woven into baskets. Also Little Dove learned -how to make shredded basswood fibers. These were made almost the same -way except that they were made into a strong thread by twisting them and -rolling them against the thigh of one’s leg. These threads were used to -weave belts and tump lines and square bags. - -Soon Little Dove had become quite expert at cooking and sewing and -weaving, and once again she looked for Straight Arrow. She found him one -day seated by a small stream that ran near the village. She sat down and -began throwing pebbles into the stream. - -“I have learned to cook and to weave and to sew, Straight Arrow,” she -said rather quickly. - -“That is good,” he answered, “for now you will make someone a good -wife.” With that he rose and walked slowly back to the village. Little -Dove sat and cried. When she could cry no longer she sat and looked into -the water until it was dark, and then she returned to the village. Her -mother was waiting for her. - -“Your father wishes to speak with you, Little Dove.” - -“Yes, my father, you sent for me?” - -“Little Dove, today a young brave came to see me. He wants you for his -wife and he has offered me many fine horses. I think he will make you a -good husband, so in four moons’ time you will be married, my daughter.” - -Little Dove felt her heart sink. - -“Who is it that has asked to marry me, father?” - -“Straight Arrow, son of Big Bow, my daughter, for today you told him you -could weave.” - -Father and daughter smiled at each other, and then Little Dove left to -talk with her mother and tell her how wrong a foolish young Indian girl -could be. - - - - - RED CLOUD’S DREAM - - -Red Cloud was a young Algonquin lad who played and romped in his village -along with the other young Indian braves and girls. He was a tall Indian -for his age and quite good looking. - -As was the custom among the Algonquins, however, no child, boy or girl, -would be considered mature until he or she had a dream in which the -powers of nature promised success and courage in his or her adult life. - -Red Cloud entered adolescence and he knew that the time was fast -approaching when he would be required to spend many lonely nights in the -forest, fasting and waiting, until the Thunderbird, the Sun, or other -powers of nature had spoken to him. - -Each day Red Cloud would awake and expect his father to call him to -inform him that today was the day. But many days passed, and still Great -Cloud did not call for his son. Soon with the excitement of the games -and the learning of lessons from his father concerning the use of -weapons and tracking, the problem of coming into maturity left the mind -of Red Cloud and going off alone into the forest was the farthest thing -from his mind. - -Each day in the beginning as he had padded along the trail with his -father he had expected to be told of the ordeal he must go through, but -as each day passed and nothing was said, Red Cloud began to look forward -to his lessons and to forget even the possibility of anything else on -these daily walks. - -Several months passed, and Red Cloud became quite a good hunter and -tracker and his ability with the bow was unchallenged. His father was -very proud of him and each day as they returned along the trail, Great -Cloud walked with his arm lovingly across the shoulders of his son. - -One afternoon when they had returned from tracking a deer, Great Cloud -summoned Red Cloud to his wigwam. Red Cloud thought that he might have -done something on the hunt which displeased his father, but he entered -the wigwam walking straight and proud as his father had taught him. -Great Cloud motioned for his son to be seated and when he had done so, -Great Cloud began to speak. - -“My son, in your dreams have any of the powers of nature appeared to you -promising success and courage in your adult life? Now think hard, for -this is very important.” - -Then and only then did Red Cloud realize that the time had come for him -to be put to the test. Now he realized that his father was asking him -whether he was a mature Indian brave or whether he was still a child. - -“No, father, I have had no dream in which the powers of nature -appeared.” - -“Then you know, my son, what you have to do,” answered Great Cloud. -“These many weeks you have probably wondered why I have not called you -to me before. It was because I felt that you were not ready to bear the -ordeal of spending many lonely nights in the forest alone. When one -retires to the deep green of the forest to await the voice of the -Thunderbird or the Sun or other powers of nature, one must go alone with -just his weapons. Your education has been such that you would not have -been able to survive in the forest very long before now, and that is why -I have so carefully trained you in the many ways of nature and the -forest these past few weeks. As you know, before you may be considered a -mature Indian in the Algonquin tribe you must first hear the voice of -one of the powers of nature promising you courage and success in your -adult life. Are you now prepared to go into the great forest and endure -this ordeal?” - -Red Cloud hesitated, for he knew that his answer must be a -straightforward one and honest, for truth was a sacred thing to the -Indians. - -“O my father, I must be truthful, for so you have taught me in my -younger days. I have listened and watched patiently each day as I -trotted at your heels along the trail and I have locked away in my heart -and in my mind all the careful little bits of information you have given -to me which would make me a boy worthy to be called the son of Great -Cloud. The forest has been a friendly place to me, for I have spent many -happy hours there with you. Now I am faced with a decision which I must -make here and now, and all I can say to you, father, is that I, Red -Cloud, your son, am ready to go into the great forest to await the word -from the powers of nature.” - -Great Cloud placed his hands upon the shoulders of his son and smiling -at him said, “You have spoken well, my son. Tomorrow you shall leave for -the forest and look for a place where you will not be disturbed. Take -with you your weapons and your blanket, but no other goods such as food, -for you must fast while you await the dream.” - -With that Red Cloud departed from the wigwam to prepare for his journey -the following morning. - -There was no sleep for the young Red Cloud that evening, as he thought -of his coming trip into the big forest. Finally the early light of dawn -peeked through the door of the wigwam and before most of the village was -even astir, Red Cloud was up from his bed and had gathered his precious -weapons and his blanket for the trip. - -He bade good-bye to his mother, Morning Star, and his father, Great -Cloud, and started for the forest. - -It was a beautiful morning. The bright sun shone down through the leaves -of the great green trees of the forest and the spring flowers were all -in gay bloom, dressed in their finest colors of reds, blues, yellows, -purples, and oranges. As he trotted along the trail Red Cloud could hear -overhead the many different calls and songs of the forest birds. -Occasionally there was a rustle along the side of the trail or a rabbit -would scamper across the path of Red Cloud. - -Once through the branch of a low-hanging birch tree, Red Cloud saw the -magnificent body of a full-grown buck with six points. Oh, how he -regretted that he was not upon a hunting trip, for wouldn’t that buck -have made a beautiful trophy to bring back to the village? - -The buck, too, seemed to be aware of the reason for Red Cloud’s journey, -for though the boy moved carefully he did stir the leaves as he walked -and though the buck turned his majestic head he did not move from his -spot in the glen of the forest. - -Red Cloud smiled to himself, recalling words of his father, “Sometimes -the wild animals seem to sense the reason for your journey and fear not -the approach of a warrior who is not on a hunt.” At the time Red Cloud -had not thought much about the statement but here beside the trail it -had been proved to him by the actions of the majestic buck. - -Soon Red Cloud felt that he had journeyed deep enough into the forest -along the well-known trails, so he turned from the path to go into the -forest where no trail was known to him. It was not easy going, for he -had to cut small brush from his path. Occasionally he would take a small -piece of bark from the side of a tree to mark the direction he had taken -in order to find his way back to the main trail. - -Soon he came to a stream and stooped to drink of the cool refreshing -water. As he stood up once again he gazed up through the opening in the -trees and noticed that evening was fast approaching and soon it would be -dark. So he moved on more rapidly and he noticed that his direction was -taking him up the side of a small ridge. Finally, tired and realizing -that darkness would soon be upon him, Red Cloud decided to stop and make -his camp. He found that where he had chosen to stop, there was a small -formation of rocks which provided a natural shelter from the cool -evening breezes. - -Within the shelter of these rocks he built himself a small fire and -then, wrapping his blanket around him, settled down to sleep through the -comforting night, hoping as all boys do that the dream would come to him -on this, his first night and that he could return to the warmth and -shelter of his friendly wigwam and his family on the following day. But -also Red Cloud was prepared to spend many days, if the need arose and -many nights, for he had been taught endurance by his father. - -The night passed quickly, and suddenly Red Cloud opened his eyes to the -rays of the sun and a new day. Climbing from under the folds of his -blanket he realized that he was quite thirsty and hungry. Water he could -seek and drink, but he realized that until he had the dream he was to -partake of no food regardless of how long he must wait. Unless, of -course, he desired to return to the village and report that the spirits -had not spoken to him in a dream and then as was the custom of his tribe -he would be considered a poor unfortunate person with little hope of -success in life. So Red Cloud put the thoughts of food from his mind and -started in search of water. - -In the great forest one did not have to look too far for water because -all through the great forest there ran many streams of clear cool water. -So it was not long before Red Cloud found such a stream and, after -splashing the icy cold water in his face to chase the sleep from his -eyes, he drank deeply until his thirst was satisfied. Then turning from -the stream he started back toward his camp. - -When he arrived back at his blanket, he spread it on the ground and then -lay down to gaze up into the sky through the openings in the trees. He -passed an hour or more making wonderful pictures in his mind from the -formation of clouds that floated overhead across the heavens. Billowy -white puffs of smoke they seemed to be, and Red Cloud marveled at how -soft and pure they looked. But soon his restless heart made him rise -from the blanket and he decided to explore. He started for the top of -the ridge many miles away and when he had reached there he knelt, -turning his head toward the heavens and raising his arms. And so as if -reaching for the sun he made his prayers to the great Wakanda. - -When he had knelt in this position for an hour or more he rose to start -down the ridge toward his campsite again, planning to go in another -direction from the campsite and eventually explore the whole surrounding -area. It was then that he noticed a slight stirring in the brush. -Quickly Red Cloud dropped behind a shelter of rock and watched the spot -in the brush. He did not know what to expect, for this part of the -forest was strange to him and he did not know what might be hidden in -the brush. Then as he watched the brush he realized that the slight -breeze that was blowing would be carrying his scent right toward -whatever was concealed in the patch of brush. - -Then he saw it was a tremendous brown bear which was six feet tall on -its hind feet. Evidently the bear had been eating blueberries from the -bushes which covered the side of the ridge and had suddenly become aware -of the presence of someone or something which was foreign to him. The -bear was now raised up on his hind paws in order to look over the tops -of the bushes and see if he could discover this thing which had invaded -his feeding grounds. - -Red Cloud crouched even lower behind the rock, for he knew that a brown -bear could be very mean, especially when he was hungry. Then Red Cloud -thought of his weapons. In seeking water he had left his weapons at the -campsite and had nothing with him but his hunting knife, which he felt -would do him little good against a mad full-grown brown bear. So the -best thing he could do was to attempt to circle the bear and get -downwind from him so that the bear could no longer smell him. But he -must do it by keeping out of sight. - -Slowly Red Cloud edged himself out from behind the rock, keeping his -body pressed close to the ground. Before he started to move he noticed -that the bear had settled down to feeding once again. The breeze had -died down but there was always the danger of a quick gust again and Red -Cloud realized he was still in a dangerous position. He hugged the -ground as hard as he could and continued to squirm away from and around -this dangerous bear. - -Then Red Cloud was aware of another danger. Having gone without food for -almost two whole days, he was not the strong lad that he would have been -when eating two hearty meals a day. He wondered, if the bear did see -him, whether he would be able to run fast enough to get away from the -bear. But getting downwind was the most important thing at this time, so -Red Cloud continued to crawl and the rough stones on the forest floor -cut through his shirt and into his skin, scraping it raw; but the more -it hurt the harder Red Cloud pressed his body against the friendly -earth. - -He slowly raised his head and realized that he was now almost completely -downwind from the bear and that the big fellow had gone back to munching -the berries. For what seemed like hours, Red Cloud lay quietly in hiding -behind a great oak tree, not daring to look out for fear the bear would -be looking around just at the time he peeked out from behind the tree. - -And then it happened. Red Cloud had been lying so still, afraid to move, -that suddenly he felt his leg go numb and he realized that his leg had -gone to sleep. He moved it slightly to bring circulation and life back -into it and in so doing he dislodged a fairly large stone which began -its noisy fall down the side of the ridge and as it rolled it would -click against other stones and they too would join the miniature -landslide. Red Cloud huddled behind the tree and then he heard a low -growl. He decided he had better take a chance and glance from behind the -tree, and as he did his heart leapt, for the bear was looking almost -right at him. The bear let out another terrible growl, and then from -above where Red Cloud lay in hiding, the young brave heard another -growl. - -Slowly turning his head so that he could look up the ridge, he saw the -reason for the bear’s sudden anger. His berry patch had been invaded by -another large brown bear who was now growling out a challenge. If either -bear had spotted Red Cloud, he was forgotten now, for they had eyes only -for each other and possession of the berry patch was the prize which -they both sought. - -With mighty growls they dropped to all fours and charged at each other. -Red Cloud, at first fascinated by this battle between two creatures of -the forest, stood rooted to his hiding place, but then thought more -wisely of it and taking the chance offered him by the two bears being -involved in a battle to the death, ran as swiftly as he could down the -ridge and away from the danger that threatened his very life. - -He did not stop running until he had reached his campsite miles away and -then, throwing himself flat on the ground, thanked the great Wakanda for -sparing him from this danger which had threatened and for bringing him -safely to his campsite. - -Once again he offered his prayers to the powers of nature and then, -wrapping himself in his blanket and building up the fire, he settled -down for the night. - -It was during the warm sleep of that evening brought on by the fatigue -of his day’s adventure that Red Cloud had his dream. In his dream the -great Thunderbird appeared to him telling him that he would have much -courage added to the courage already in his heart and that as an adult -in the tribe he would have a great deal of success in all he attempted. -Upon awakening at the first rays of the dawn, Red Cloud felt suddenly -refreshed. He had been visited in his dreams and now could return to the -village. - -Gathering his weapons he put out the embers of the fire he had made and -scattered the dead ashes. Then with a light heart and a quick step he -started back upon the path he had blazed until he reached the main -trail. There he quickened his step and just as dusk was beginning to -fall, entered the village, being welcomed warmly by his many friends. -His father and several of the lesser chiefs were at the door of his -father’s wigwam and that evening a council was held at the central -lodge. - -There Red Cloud rose before the male members of his tribe and recounted -his adventures in the great forest, closing by repeating his dream. As -he finished there were many grunts of approval and words of praise. - -But Great Cloud said nothing, and Red Cloud wondered about this until he -looked into the eyes of his great father; and there he saw the fire of -pride burning brightly and in his heart he was very happy. Together -father and son left the central lodge that evening, and true to the -dream, Red Cloud grew in the tribe to become one of its greatest -warriors. - - - This story is based upon an incident in the life of Red Cloud, an - Algonquin warrior, as told to the author by John Fitch, a farmer from - Vermont. - - - - - BROKEN TOOTH AND THE WAR BONNET - - -The Apache warriors had been waiting a long time for this revenge upon -the maurauding Kiowas and now the time had come. The leader of the -Apache band raised his hand and the attack was on. The Apache war party -swept down the hillside into the midst of the Kiowa camp. The camp had -been caught off guard and the raiding Apaches were making short work of -the few Kiowa braves who would stand and fight. - -Broken Tooth, one of the most honored warriors of the Apache tribe, rode -down to a Kiowa brave and touched him with his coup stick. Then he rode -on a short ways, turned abruptly and sent an arrow into the Kiowa’s -chest. - -The battle was short and furious. The Apache raiders withdrew from the -village and slowly returned home to count their coup and to sing of -their victory at the great council. As they rode, Broken Tooth was -thinking ahead to the great council that night. After this raid today a -great event would take place in his tepee on the morrow. - -The party entered the camp and there was much rejoicing. Finally, the -evening meal was eaten and the word was sent out that the council would -meet to hear the deeds of the day. - -When all the men of the tribe had gathered in the council lodge, they -rose one by one to recount their deeds of the day. Finally, Broken Tooth -rose and told of his riding down upon the Kiowa warrior and touching him -with his coup stick. He then related his other exploits of the day. The -great chief rose from his place and then he spoke, “Broken Tooth, you -have been a brave warrior and you have earned many honors. Today you -have added even more honors for your brave deeds.” - -The council then broke up, but the following day word was passed that -Broken Tooth was on that day going to make a new headdress. As was the -custom, the men of the tribe gathered that afternoon in the tepee of -Broken Tooth and all his feathers were spread upon the ground. They were -then sorted according to size, and the making of the headdress began. As -each feather was being prepared for the headdress, Broken Tooth -recounted for the men the story of the deed that had won him that -feather. The men would listen and smoke and grunt approval after each -story. Finally, the bonnet was finished and there was no more beautiful -piece of handiwork in the whole village. - -The following day there were reports from the scouts that the Arapaho -were banding together and would be attacking in force. The Apaches -gathered their warriors and rode forth to meet the enemy. A large plain -between the two villages was picked as the place of battle and the -tribes met in both hand-to-hand and long-range battle. It was a -hard-fought battle and soon both tribes withdrew, bearing their dead and -wounded. - -Among the dead was Broken Tooth. As his body was borne back to the -Apache village many praised the beauty of the war bonnet which had been -worn so proudly by its owner for a single day. - - - - - GREY SQUIRREL HEARS HIS NAME - - -The Oneidas were a tribe of the Iroquois Nation which had swept north to -invade the lands of the Algonquins, spreading death and destruction. -After having beaten all the surrounding Algonquin tribes badly, the -Iroquois tribes fell to fighting among themselves—the Onondagas, -Mohawks, Cayugas, and Senecas, as well as the Oneidas. This constant -bloodshed in the Mohawk valley in time weakened the tribes so that they -were always in danger of attack from the revenge-seeking Algonquins. - -It was during this unhappy time that a young brave, Grey Squirrel, lived -among the Oneida people. He was not an unusual Indian. He was of average -build with average good looks and average abilities. He took part in -only the things the average young man in his tribe enjoyed—hunting, -fishing, trapping, and doing all the things they did. However, there was -one difference that set Grey Squirrel aside from his brothers of the -tribe: Grey Squirrel had never heard his name spoken by the chiefs of -the tribe. All the other braves of his age had either heard the chiefs -call their names while on the hunt, at a tribal ceremony, or while -walking in the woods or swimming in the stream. - -So Grey Squirrel began to wonder whether he had ever done anything -which, in the eyes of the chiefs, made him unworthy. He had fought in -great battles, but he had never been cowardly. So cowardice could not be -the reason. He had never failed to hunt well, to keep his wigwam warm -and sturdy, and to see that there was enough food for all the family. He -could see no way in which he had been unworthy of the chiefs’ notice. -Often Grey Squirrel would walk by the quiet stream and ponder the reason -for his being a brave forgotten by the chiefs. - -As Grey Squirrel’s heart grew troubled, he sought the wise advice of his -father, Grey Owl. One evening, he approached his father’s wigwam and -asked if he might speak with him about something which tormented his -mind. Grey Owl invited him into his home and they both sat cross-legged -around the small fire in the center of the wigwam. There was a long -period of silence and then Grey Owl spoke. - -“What is it that troubles you so deeply, my son? I have often watched -you wander from the village to the near-by stream and sit and ponder. I -have watched you return with a downcast look from the hunt or battle -when you should have been joyful that your bow had proven straight and -true in whatever task you set for it.” His father paused. “Speak, my -son, unburden your heart to your father who has loved you and guided you -from babyhood to fine young manhood.” - -Grey Squirrel looked long at his father and as he watched his father’s -eyes, his face softened and he said, “O wise and kind father, many years -I walked the forest trails at your heels carefully watching every move, -imitating all that you taught me to the best of my ability. Many, many -hours we spent together beneath the sheltering branches of the towering -oak trees, listening with our ears to the voices of the forest. You -taught me how to listen and what to listen for, so that my ears have -grown very keen. Today the deer may not tread the forest floor that I do -not hear, nor the rabbit scurry for cover that I cannot uncover the -entrance to his home, nor the bluebird set his wings for flight that I -cannot immediately see his starting place. And yet, dear father, there -is one sound I have listened for and have not heard.” - -Grey Owl had been listening calmly to all that his young son had to say. -Surprise crossed his face with his son’s last words, and then a gentle -smile came upon his lips. “Tell me, Grey Squirrel, what is this sound -you listen so hard for but cannot hear?” - -“O father,” Grey Squirrel said, “I have listened for the voices of our -great chiefs calling my name, but to this day I have not heard them. Am -I not in favor with those who watch over our tribe and guide our feet -along the safe paths? Tell me, father, why do I not hear my name spoken -by them? I have listened along the forest trails or in the din of -battle. I have lain awake in the quiet of my wigwam listening for just a -whisper. All the other braves of our village are proud that they have -heard their names repeated by the chiefs. I alone have not. What is -wrong, father? I have come to you to seek your wise answer.” - -Grey Owl lowered his eyes to the ground as he searched his thoughts for -the right reply. Then he lifted his head slowly and studied his son’s -face. He began to speak slowly and kindly. “My son, you have made one -very great mistake. Without having meant to do so, you have done the one -thing which could have prevented you from hearing the chiefs call your -name.” - -“Tell me, father,” Grey Squirrel said impatiently, “tell me what it is!” - -Grey Owl rose and walked behind his son. Placing his hands upon the -young man’s shoulders, he said, “Because you have walked in search of -their praise you have spent many hours expecting to hear them praise -you. Do not listen so hard, my son. Live your life the best you know -how. One day you shall be rewarded by hearing the voices of the chiefs -who watch over our tribe. Do not be troubled any longer. Return to your -wigwam and your family and continue to be a good husband and father. If -you allow it to worry you greatly, it will soon hurt your whole life. -You are young, my son. You have not been forgotten.” - -Grey Squirrel rose then, and faced his father. “Father,” he said, “your -words are of little comfort. But I will follow your advice, for it has -been wise and good through the years of my youth.” With that, Grey -Squirrel turned and left his father’s wigwam. - -He returned to his own home and was greeted warmly by his good wife, -Morning Star, who had prepared a fine meal for him. All through his -dinner, Grey Squirrel thought carefully about his father’s words. But -when he went to bed that evening, he decided that he should drive these -troubled thoughts from his mind. The weeks that followed were very -pleasant for Grey Squirrel. The hunting and fishing were good. -Everything was going well. The people of the village saw the sudden -change in Grey Squirrel and the fact that he no longer appeared worried. -Grey Squirrel felt better, greeting each new day happily. - -One day Grey Squirrel shouldered his bow and chose his best arrows. -Bidding his family good-bye, he started toward the forest to hunt for -fresh meat for his family. He trotted easily along the forest trail, -stopping now and then to study the ground and look for signs of moving -game. - -He had been on the trail for a while when he came to a narrow stream. -Stooping to drink of the fresh, cool water, he stopped with his hand -halfway to his mouth. He blinked his eyes and looked again into the -stream, not moving a muscle. There, in a quiet pool next to his -reflection was that of the head and antlers of a beautiful deer. Slowly -the brave lifted his head until he was looking straight into the eyes of -a magnificent buck standing directly across the stream, almost within -reach. As Grey Squirrel straightened up slowly, the buck shied a little -and backed off. Many thoughts passed through Grey Squirrel’s head, but -the one which puzzled him most was why the buck shied only a little and -then stood and watched him without any sign of fear after that. - -Grey Squirrel lowered a hand slowly to reach for his bow which he had -placed upon the ground as he was kneeling to drink. Grasping the bow -firmly, he fitted an arrow onto the bow string and took careful aim. The -great buck’s eyes stayed his hand from releasing the arrow and made him -lower the bow. His mind told Grey Squirrel that this buck would provide -good food, but his heart told him to stop. Then he noticed that the deer -was favoring his right hoof and realized that the buck had an injury. -The leg just above the hoof was swollen to almost twice its normal size. -Grey Squirrel dropped his bow and arrow to the ground, and with careful -and even steps, waded across the stream toward the buck. - -The animal suddenly turned as if to spring into the forest, but his leg -collapsed under him and he fell to the ground. Grey Squirrel guessed -that the deer must have already used up his strength in escaping from -whatever had caused the injury, had come to the stream to bathe the -injured leg, and could go no further. Now the buck was struggling to -rise and Grey Squirrel jumped quickly to his side. Firmly but gently, -the Indian placed one knee against the buck’s side, one hand on the -animal’s chest, the other on the buck’s neck to hold him steady. The -animal was frightened and trembled. Grey Squirrel spoke softly to the -buck and began to stroke its side, each time managing to bring his hand -a little closer to the injured hoof. Finally the buck seemed to sigh and -relaxed as though he understood that this man wanted to help him. - -Grey Squirrel leaned over to look at the injured leg more closely. The -buck apparently had run into some heavy brambles and a large thorn had -lodged in the soft part of the leg just above the hoof, which had become -infected and had begun to fester. Grey Squirrel took his knife from his -belt and pressed the point of the blade into the flesh beside the thorn. -The buck’s leg quivered slightly. Then the thorn and a misty fluid -spurted from the wound. Grey Squirrel took wet leaves and mud from the -bed of the stream and laid them over the wound. All through this -operation the buck lay still, allowing Grey Squirrel to do as he -pleased. The animal continued to lie there quietly as though waiting for -any more help the Indian might gave him. - -Grey Squirrel went back to the stream and, cupping his hands, brought -some cool water for the animal. The buck drank it eagerly. A long time -passed while Grey Squirrel kept vigil over the resting buck. -Occasionally as he moved to another position, the buck would follow him -with his eyes; when Grey Squirrel settled down again, the buck would put -his head back on the earth and he too would rest again. Finally, dusk -drew near and it began to darken in the forest. As if by signal, the -buck arose, tested his injured leg, glanced at Grey Squirrel, and -started for the protection of the dense trees. Grey Squirrel called and -the buck stopped at the edge of the woods and turned to look back. He -cocked his head to one side as if to say “thank you,” and then moved -into the thick woods and out of sight. - -Grey Squirrel suddenly became angry with himself and shouted aloud, -“What a fool you are, Grey Squirrel! There, before you, was food for -your family for a whole week. But you let the buck make you feel sorry -for him. You cared for his injury, and now he has left you empty-handed -after a whole day of hunting, with only the story of a deer who let you -pet him—as if anyone would believe you! You are a fool, Grey Squirrel!” - -Then there was a loud rustling near by. All of a sudden, Grey Squirrel -heard a voice, calling his name. - -“Grey Squirrel!” the voice boomed, echoing in the forest. “Don’t be -angry with yourself. I witnessed what you did today. Your tribe will -honor you. It takes courage to travel in the forests alone in search of -food. But it takes greater courage to forget to be a hunter when his -prey is so easy a target because of an injury. You sacrificed time and -food for your family’s table to help the injured buck. If you had killed -the animal, you would have felt cowardly. Return to our village, hold -your head high, and tell of your deed today. Do not worry if they do not -believe you at first. Your heart is happy for your kindness. Go, Grey -Squirrel, it grows late. I will ask the chiefs to hear your story at the -council fire tonight.” - -In quiet wonder, Grey Squirrel stood gazing at Strong Heart, the great -war chief of the Oneidas, who stepped out of the woods only a few paces -from the spot where the buck had stopped briefly to gaze back at him. -Lifting his bow from the ground, Grey Squirrel started back to his -family and his wigwam. In his heart were a warmth and peace that he had -never felt before. - - - - - 4. HEROISM - - - - - LITTLE FAWN AND THE WOLVES - - -It had been a very poor hunting year for the Choctaw Tribe. Little Fawn, -daughter of Wolf’s Tooth, sat in her wigwam, thinking about her hunger. -Not just Little Fawn, but everyone in the village was beginning to feel -the pangs of hunger. One month still remained before the ice would thaw -in the lakes, and the fish would begin to swim again, and the young -green sprouts of grass would burst through the earth and draw the game -back to the hunting ground. A grave decision had to be made. When the -Council had gathered, Wolf’s Tooth rose up and spoke. - -“We need food. If we are not to starve, we must organize a strong -hunting party, and travel south to seek out the animals that have -wandered from our hunting grounds.” - -There were many grunts of approval. The decision was made that a great -hunting party would leave the following day for the south. There was -much dancing and preparation for the hunt. Tough hickory bows were -tested again and again for weak spots. Sinew cords that were old or -might have weak spots were cast aside, and new ones strung on the -hickory bows. Knives and tomahawks were made ready. The tension mounted -until dawn when the hunting party started from the village toward the -south. - -Little Fawn gazed slowly around the encampment and immediately noticed -that all the strong young braves were gone. All that remained were the -old men, the sick, the women and children. This bothered Little Fawn, -until she thought to herself, “What could happen? Nothing. We will be -safe as long as we stay in our village.” - -Before the men left on the trip, they had been so confident they would -bring back home an ample supply of meat that they gave their families -extra rations of meat and greens which they had been guarding well. Some -of the families were careful and, though given plenty, still used the -extra food sparingly; but many of the families could not resist the -temptation to feast, and built up fires to cook the extra meat and -greens. It was just this mistake that nearly cost many of the remaining -Choctaw people their lives. - -Just as the families were sitting down to eat, a howl echoed from out of -the forest and then another and another from different directions. The -women became frightened and some of the children began to cry. Some of -the men began to cry too, because they realized that they were old and -sick and could give little help to the women and children against the -danger that was now just outside their village. - -How well they knew the sounds which came from the forests on the edge of -the camp! The wolves were hungry, for their hunting season had been a -poor one too. These lean and starving savage beasts had been drawn to -the outskirts of the village by the smell of the large quantities of -meat cooking in the many vessels throughout the village. The howling -continued, and it grew louder as many more voices joined the circle of -wolves slowly closing in on the village. - -Food and hunger were forgotten by the older squaws as they hurried to -carry their children to the comparative safety of the wigwam. Suddenly, -all were stricken with panic except Little Fawn. Though her little heart -pounded in her breast, Little Fawn searched her mind for a solution to -this threat of death to her people. She ran quickly to her home and -there found her younger brother, Flying Squirrel, crouched in the corner -of the wigwam, shaking with fear. Slowly she explained to him that he -must stop shaking and listen carefully. Though only a young boy, she -told him, he must now become a man. He must leave immediately upon the -trail of the hunting party to bring help to the village while she, -Little Fawn, stayed behind to do whatever she could to help her people. - -Flying Squirrel knew the job he must do. So he immediately set out upon -the trail of the hunting party, helped by the bright moon and driven on -by thoughts of his brave young sister who was staying behind to face -this howling menace of a pack of wolves. Both fear and courage lent -wings to his feet as he sped through the circle of wolves and down the -trail in pursuit of the hunting party. - -Meanwhile, Little Fawn called two other young Indian girls to her and -explained that the only reason the wolves were staying as far from the -village was their fear of the many fires which still burned brightly in -the village. - -“So,” Little Fawn said, “it is our job to keep those fires burning all -night, and to make torches and light them on the edge of the village to -keep the wolves away.” Reluctantly the girls agreed, and fires were -built up. The three girls made torches of pine knots and placed them in -a wide circle at the edge of the village. - -All night they kept the fires burning, and all night the howling of the -wolves kept up. With the coming of dawn, however, the wolves scurried -back into the forest. Only then did the girls who had helped Little Fawn -decide to take a much needed rest. But Little Fawn could not rest -because she was so worried about her little brother, Flying Squirrel. At -just about this time, he reached the hunting party and, after explaining -what had happened, collapsed in the arms of his father. - -Wolf’s Tooth chose a half dozen warriors and immediately started home -for the village which was almost a full day’s journey away. - -Back at the village, Little Fawn was busy gathering wood for the fires -that coming evening. Soon many willing hands were helping in this task. -As the day wore on, Little Fawn anxiously watched the south trail for -signs of the returning warriors. As the sun began to set, Little Fawn -began to wonder if Flying Squirrel had been able to reach Wolf’s Tooth -and his band. Little Fawn knew that the wolves would be back after the -sun set. - -It grew dark fast. Little Fawn went to look at the many torches around -the village, lighting any that had gone out and preparing once again for -the long wait. As she reached to set another torch ablaze, she heard a -low, threatening growl almost beside her. Turning slowly around, Little -Fawn found she was gazing into the sharp eyes of a hungry wolf who must -have followed her right to this spot. Little Fawn drew back in fear -until her back pressed against a hickory tree as the wolf crouched to -spring. There was no escape and Little Fawn faced the wolf trembling. -The wolf leaped. There was the sudden twang of a bowstring. A howl of -agony came from the throat of the wolf as the arrow struck home. The -rescue party had arrived just in time. Wolf’s Tooth’s arrow had found -its mark. The rescue party killed most of the wolves and drove off the -rest of the pack. All the next day Little Fawn and her brother, Flying -Squirrel, were thanked and praised by her tribe. - -Wolf Tooth told them: “I am very proud of my children. My son moves even -more swiftly than a flying squirrel. My daughter may be as gentle as a -little fawn, but she is braver than a pack of wolves.” - - - - - THE ISLAND - - -White Eagle was a young Iroquois boy. His favorite friend was Shining -Star, a young Indian girl from his tribe. The small village in which -they lived stood on the shore of a large and beautiful lake that could -become very dangerous in a sudden storm. - -Scattered in the lake were many small islands. When parents were sure -that their children could handle the tribe’s canoes safely in the lake, -they allowed them to explore these islands. A favorite sport of White -Eagle and Shining Star was to paddle to one of these islands to search -for berries and other wild fruit. - -One sunny summer day, White Eagle and Shining Star decided to take a -canoe trip to one of the islands farthest from their village. As far as -White Eagle knew, the island they planned to visit was at the other end -of the long lake. Excitedly, the two children went down to the shore and -set out on their adventure across the calm, blue lake. They enjoyed -paddling in the sun because its beams seemed to warm them to their -hearts. - -They had been paddling gaily and laughing a great deal for some time -when Shining Star suddenly turned to White Eagle with an unhappy look on -her pretty face. - -“White Eagle,” she said sadly, “I am getting tired. I think we should -visit one of the islands nearer home. I don’t think I can help you -paddle all the way across this great lake and back again.” - -“Very well,” said White Eagle kindly, “there is an island over there -that we have never visited before. We will go ashore there and hunt for -berries.” - -Without saying any more, the children turned their canoe and headed for -the island about one hundred paces away. Soon their canoe was scraping -bottom on a sand bar that seemed to lead from the island into the water. -Stepping from the canoe, White Eagle steadied it while Shining Star -stepped ashore. Finally, he pulled the canoe up onto the shore so that -it would not be carried away from the island into the lake and leave -them stranded. Then, hand in hand, the children began to explore. - -Now these islands were not small and, if one were not careful, he could -really get lost for a little while. So the children were careful to mark -their trail with broken branches as they went. In their eagerness to -explore this island they forgot what they had actually come for. - -“We have never been on this island before,” said White Eagle. “At least, -I don’t remember having been on it before now.” - -“No,” answered Shining Star. “We have never been here before.” - -“Well, the only thing to do is look around.” Maybe White Eagle was -thinking of himself as an Indian warrior when he added, “Let’s see if we -can find any enemies.” - -“Oh, don’t be silly, White Eagle! We won’t find any enemies on this -island,” Shining Star said, laughing and forgetting how tired she had -been. - -“Don’t fool yourself, Shining Star. My father tells me that sometimes -the enemy will set up camp on an island near a village to keep watch on -the tribe. Then when they feel that the village is off guard, they -attack.” - -White Eagle said this with such a serious face that Shining Star became -frightened. “Let’s go home, White Eagle, I’m afraid.” - -“Don’t be silly, little one, I was only fooling.” (Now he played the -part of a warrior again.) “There is probably no living thing upon this -island but ourselves. Come on! We’re wasting time. Let’s start -exploring.” - -The two children continued to investigate the island, always making sure -that they were leaving a plain trail so that they could return to their -canoe in safety. After several hours, they decided that there were no -berries on this island so they might as well return home. They turned -around and started back for the shore, trying to follow their trail -carefully. - -Sooner than he had expected, White Eagle could see the lake waters, but -when they reached the shore he realized that this was not where they had -landed. And there was no canoe. Looking out across the water, White -Eagle knew that they were on another side of the island. Perhaps they -had followed a fresh trail someone else had left. - -Shining Star seated herself on a log about ten paces from the shore to -rest and wait for White Eagle to make a decision. - -“Come, Shining Star,” he said confidently, “we will walk along the shore -until we reach our canoe.” - -So taking hands once again, the children started along the shore of the -island. Suddenly, the sky became black, a strong wind came up, and dark -storm clouds started moving in over the lake. - -“Hurry, Shining Star!” he said with just a touch of fear in his voice. -“A storm is coming over the lake. We must hurry if we are to reach home -before the waves get so high that we can’t paddle our canoe.” - -Shining Star started to run, but stumbled and fell, twisting her ankle. -She cried out in pain and White Eagle knelt by her side. - -“Oh, I’ve hurt my ankle,” Shining Star told him, holding back her tears. - -White Eagle lifted the young girl in his arms and started carrying her. -Soon they reached the place where the canoe was beached. Placing her -gently into the canoe, White Eagle shoved the canoe into the water and -climbed inside. - -The sky had become very dark. They could hear thunder and see flashes of -lightning across the lake. Rain was beginning to fall fast. Now even -White Eagle was afraid, but he tried his best to hide his fear from -Shining Star. Using all the strength he could muster, he paddled -furiously toward home, but the winds now were pounding the light canoe -and seemed to drive him further and further from their village. Shining -Star lay quietly in the bow of the canoe. She was too brave an Indian -girl to cry but her eyes, peering through the driving rain toward White -Eagle’s face, pleaded with him to get them safely home. - -And then, without warning, a great gust of wind caught the bow of the -canoe and swung it hard. White Eagle leaned in the opposite direction to -balance the canoe. Suddenly, the wind shifted. Before White Eagle had a -chance to turn the bow into the wind, it caught the canoe again and, -with a loud swish, turned it over into the lake. - -Amidst his surprise and confusion White Eagle’s first thought was for -Shining Star. He heard the girl sputtering and coughing. He looked to -see her head just appearing above the water beside the canoe. Reaching -his hand out, he grasped her arm and pulled her to him. Then grasping -the underside of the overturned canoe, he pulled Shining Star so that -her arms rested on the canoe and she was able to grasp the keel. - -Thus the two children hung on for what seemed like hours but actually -was only a few minutes. The water was cold. White Eagle began to shiver, -not so much because the water was cold, but because the rain was colder -and the biting wind made it even worse. - -And then as quickly as the storm had come, it was gone. White Eagle -tried, but did not have the strength to hold on to Shining Star and turn -the canoe. Just when he was giving up any chance of getting to shore, -strong hands gripped his arms. It was then that White Eagle realized -that he was losing consciousness. Everything went black. - -When he finally woke, he found that he was in his bed in his own wigwam. -His mother was kneeling by him with a cup of hot broth. Slowly he -sipped. And then he could hold back no longer. - -“My mother, what of Shining Star?” - -“She is all right, my son. You have done well this day. It was feared -that you children would be caught in the storm, so your father and -Shining Star’s father set forth in their canoes and reached you both -just as you were slipping from the canoe. You are a brave lad, White -Eagle, and your father is proud as is the father of Shining Star. You -saved her life and she was brave, as you were.” - - - - - A NEW BOW FOR TANI - - -Tani was a small Cherokee lad who lived during the great Hundred Years’ -War between the Northern and Southern tribes. When he was twelve years -old, Tani’s only wish was to own a bow like his father’s—a strong -hickory bow with a stout hide thong and a quiver of straight strong -arrows. - -Each time he would approach his father about owning such a bow, his -father would laugh, and placing his hand on his son’s head, tell him in -a kindly voice that he was still a little too young to handle a -man-sized hickory bow. This always made Tani feel a little sad because, -being a boy of twelve, he thought he was man enough to own one. - -One day Tani’s father called Tani to him and told him they would be -going on a hunting trip and asked if he would like to go along. Tani was -overjoyed and all he could think about for the next three days was the -forthcoming trip with his father. When the time finally arrived, Tani -prepared for the trip just as his father did and noticed his father -place war paint on his face and chest and arms. Tani said good-bye to -all, and when he said good-bye to his mother he noticed she was crying. -He did not understand, for his father had not told him that the hunting -trip they were going on was to seek out Talitanigska, one of the great -Cherokee Chieftains, and report to him the movements of a large band of -Seneca Indians. This was a very dangerous journey, for the Seneca -Indians were deadly enemies of the Cherokee Tribe. - -As Tani and his father traveled swiftly along the back paths of the vast -forests toward the encampment of Talitanigska, one thought kept rushing -through the little brave’s mind: What great adventure was his father -leading him into? Tani soon learned the answer to this question. That -evening, as Tani and his father were seated at a small guarded fire off -to the side of the trail, Tani’s father told him the nature of their -task. - -The little brave’s heart pounded as he learned the reason for their -journey. That night as they rolled in their blankets and slept, Tani -dreamed of many Seneca Indians attacking his father and himself and of -his standing back to back with his father, beating off the attackers. - -When the dawn broke, Tani and his father were on their way. They were -careful to avoid any soft earth that might leave signs for roving -Senecas to find and follow. - -About midafternoon Tani’s father turned into a shallow stream and -started north against the current. Suddenly, his father slipped and fell -heavily head first into the stream. Tani reached his father’s side and -found his father could not stand. He helped him ashore and seated him -against the trunk of a tree on the bank. A gash was red with blood -across the forehead of Tani’s father. Tani saw that his father’s ankle -was badly twisted. Not a word was spoken, but Tani built a small fire -and made his father as comfortable as possible. - -For several hours as the sun slowly sank behind the hills, Tani’s father -worried about the situation he and his son were in. He was tired and he -must have dozed, for he woke with a start as he felt his bow being -lifted from his fingers. He watched in silence as Tani fitted an arrow -to the bow, pulled back the string and let fly. The arrow buried itself -in a near-by bush. There was a thud, followed by a terrifying scream. A -Seneca sprang up and fell dead across the path. Tani rushed forward and, -having made sure their enemy was dead, returned to his father’s side. -Without a word he continued his sleepless watch. - -The night passed without incident but as dawn approached, Tani heard a -rustle in the near-by bush. He raised his bow ready to fire, but -recognized the head feathers of his Cherokee brothers and let the bow -drop to the ground. He leaped forward with a happy cry. The two braves -were from Talitanigska’s camp. They quickly made a sling hammock to -carry Tani’s father and soon the four of them set forth for the great -Chieftain’s camp. - -Once safely within the camp, Tani’s father was well cared for and soon -was able to stand once again on his injured foot. Two weeks after their -arrival at Talitanigska’s camp a great council fire was held to -celebrate the victory of the Cherokees over their enemies, the Senecas. -As the festivities came to a close, Talitanigska stepped to the center -of the ring and asked that Tani step forward. Then, in front of the -great Cherokee Chieftains, Talitanigska took his stout hickory bow from -his shoulder and placed it in Tani’s hands. - -“This is for you, Tani,” he said, “for you are a great brave and now a -man among men. You stood full of courage in the face of great danger. -Because of your quick thinking, you saved your father’s life and made it -possible for your father to bring me the valuable information. This -information helped our fellow tribesmen to meet and defeat the Senecas, -our enemies.” - -Tani did not know what to say; but the following morning, as he and his -father prepared to leave, he stepped in front of Chief Talitanigska and -thanked him for the gift. He said he would always cherish the great -hickory bow and remember the great kindness shown him by one of the -great Chiefs of the Cherokee nation. Tani had his bow, just like his -father’s. There was no happier brave alive as he tramped closely behind -his father on the path home. - - - - - SINGING WATERS AND THE MEDICINE WELL - - -Singing Waters’ work as an Indian maiden in the Teton-Dakota tribe was -typical of the work of Indian maidens across the continent. Each year -she would make new clothing for her family and each day of the year she -would cook and do the many little things that were the duty of a good -Indian squaw. The work was hard but Singing Waters did not mind, for she -loved her husband and her children and was very happy and proud to be -able to help them. - -When she found that she had some free time, Singing Waters would join -the other women of the tribe to boast about her husband’s great deeds on -the hunt and in battle. This was a favorite pastime of all the squaws. -They would spend many hours throughout the years to talk, over and over -again about the adventures of their braves. Each time they would repeat -the stories with even more enthusiasm. - -One day, all the tribe’s braves had left to hunt down a great buffalo -herd for food and clothing for the tribe. Singing Waters was seated in -front of her tepee, teaching her two daughters how to cook, when the -morning sky grew suddenly very black. A great quiet fell upon the -village. Even the dogs that seemed to spend their day barking for no -good reason were silent. Singing Waters heard only the wind as it -whispered through the village. - -Then from the distance, there came a rumble that seemed to come slowly -nearer and nearer to the village. Singing Waters realized quickly that a -dust storm was heading for her village. The other squaws had heard it, -too, and were rushing to gather their children into their tepees and -bind the skins across the entrances as tightly as they could. The dogs -whimpered and scattered for whatever shelter they could find. The -village did not have to wait long, for the winds were soon lashing -against the tepees, straining their fastenings, and the dust was -whipping through the village like a flood tide rushing over the rocks on -the seashore. - -The dust reached into every opening in Singing Waters’ tepee. It wasn’t -long before a fine coating of it covered everything and everyone inside. -Her two daughters huddled close to her, crying slightly because of their -fear of the storm. But soon the wind blew out of the village, and the -last dust clouds settled to the ground. One by one the flaps of the -tepees swung back. Mothers, children and old men began to come out. They -found that many things, left outside in the haste of escaping from the -storm, were covered with coats of light brown dust. Everyone began -cleaning up the village and sweeping away the dust which had piled up -against the sides of the tepees. - -While this was happening a young boy, named Fat Buffalo because he was -short and very fat, came running through the village, crying that his -mother was lost. Singing Waters halted him and shook him a little to -make him stop his screaming. When he had quieted, she was able to learn -that Brown Fawn, the boy’s mother, had left the tepee early that morning -to seek fresh water. She had been gone only a little while when the -storm struck. Now she was not back in the tepee and Fat Buffalo was -frightened. - -Singing Waters was worried, but did not tell Fat Buffalo. She knew that -an Indian woman out in such a storm might easily fall under the stinging -pelting of the sand, only to be smothered by it. She might never be -found unless, years later, new storms should blow away the dust and -reveal the dry bones of a skeleton and a few bits of her clothing. -Though Singing Waters felt panic in her heart, she quieted herself and -spoke calmly to Fat Buffalo. - -“Go back to your tepee, Fat Buffalo, and wait. Your mother probably -found shelter from the storm. Now that it has stopped she will be home -soon. If it will make you feel better, I will go and look for her. -Return now to your tepee. I wouldn’t be surprised if your mother were -there already.” - -How Singing Waters hoped that Brown Fawn was back in the village by now! -It would be almost an impossible task to find her here on the plains if -she were dead or even hurt. First, Singing Waters would not know in -which direction to start. The water hole that she and most of the tribe -used was to the south, but there were many water holes in many -directions from the village. Singing Waters decided that she should go -to Brown Fawn’s tepee and find out if anyone else in the family knew in -which direction she had gone. - -After warning her two daughters to stay close to home, saying that she -would be back shortly, Singing Waters ran swiftly through the village. -Reaching Brown Fawn’s tepee, she opened the tent flap and stepped -inside. As her eyes grew used to the darkness, she saw Fat Buffalo -kneeling in the far corner of the tepee, crying. Approaching slowly, -Singing Waters saw that there was someone else in the tepee and that Fat -Buffalo was kneeling next to that person. As she drew near, her heart -was happy, for she thought that Brown Fawn had returned and was -comforting Fat Buffalo. She was about to turn and leave when she -suddenly realized that this woman was not Brown Fawn, but Fat Buffalo’s -grandmother, Little Otter, who held the boy’s head on her lap. - -Singing Waters approached quietly and spoke softly to Little Otter. “Has -Brown Fawn returned yet with the water?” she asked with slight hope in -her voice. - -“No,” said Little Otter, “and it was because of me that she went in -search of water. We have some water here in the tepee. But I have not -been feeling well, and Brown Fawn thought that herbs brewed in fresh -spring water from the rocks on the near-by hills might make a tea which -would help my sickness to leave.” - -“But,” said Singing Waters, “the hills where the streams flow are many -miles from here. If Brown Fawn left when the sun rose, then she might -just have reached the spring when the storm came. She is probably on her -way back to the village right now.” - -The sad news about Brown Fawn soon reached everyone in the village. Many -anxious eyes watched the trail that led from the hills. Each person -hoped to be first to catch sight of Brown Fawn and bring happiness to -Little Otter and Fat Buffalo. - -Later that afternoon, Singing Waters came once again to Brown Fawn’s -tepee. She talked quietly with Little Otter and then hurried back to her -tepee and placed a warm buffalo jacket across her shoulders. Then taking -her two little daughters, she went to her sister’s tepee and asked if -she might leave the children there for supper while she went in search -of Brown Fawn. Her sister looked at her and asked, “Why do you not wait -until the warriors return? They should be coming any time now, and they -could go in search of Brown Fawn! You have two little children to think -about.” - -“Yes,” said Singing Waters, “I have two little children to think about, -but we do not know when the warriors will be back. If the hunting is -good they may not return for another week. Brown Fawn may not be too far -from the village.” Nothing Singing Waters’ sister could say to her would -change her mind. So she set out from the village toward the mountain -spring known to the members of her tribe as the medicine well. It was -getting late in the day, and Singing Waters knew that she must hurry if -she were to reach the medicine well before sunset. She knew the trail -well. As a girl she had followed it many times, for there always seemed -to be some sickness in her village. - -Singing Waters finally came in sight of the ridge beyond which lay the -medicine well, still having found no trace of Brown Fawn. Tirelessly, -she trotted on until she had climbed the ridge and had worked her way to -the place from which the water flowed into the medicine well. As Singing -Waters approached the medicine well, she called Brown Fawn’s name -softly, but heard no answer. Then she began to call more loudly. -Suddenly, from far ahead she heard a voice answer. Now Singing Waters -began to run, for she feared that Brown Fawn was in serious trouble. She -ran until she reached the side of the medicine well, but still did not -see Brown Fawn. Then she called again and the voice answered. “Help me, -I am over here.” - -The voice was coming from beyond the medicine well. Singing Waters ran -on further; then she stopped and called again. The voice replied again, -and Singing Waters knew that she was closer. Brown Fawn’s voice seemed -to be coming from just behind a rise ahead of her. She ran swiftly to -the top of the rise, and there she found a water bag. As she looked down -the side of the rise through the gathering gloom she could make out -Brown Fawn’s figure down the side of the hill. She sat leaning against a -boulder, and she called out to Singing Waters to help her. Singing -Waters slipped and slid in her haste down the side of the hill until she -was at the side of Brown Fawn. Brown Fawn was so glad to see her that -she cried, great tears rolling down her now pale cheeks. - -Singing Waters could see that Brown Fawn had twisted her ankle. As she -began to lift the injured woman, Singing Waters asked her how she had -hurt herself and how she had escaped the storm. Brown Fawn told how she -had reached the medicine well just as the dust storm had broken. After -filling her water bag, she had turned quickly to go and had fallen, -twisting her ankle. When she was once again able to rise, putting her -weight on her other ankle, she found that she had lost all sense of -direction and had started hobbling in the wrong direction. - -“Why didn’t you lie down among the rocks until the storm passed?” -Singing Waters asked. - -“I wanted to rest,” Brown Fawn replied, “but then I would think of my -mother and son and I felt I must return to her and Fat Buffalo -immediately with the medicine water.” - -“But,” said Singing Waters, “you are safe now. Now we must return to the -village while there is still a little light or we may become lost out -here on the prairie far away from the warmth of our tepees. Come, Brown -Fawn, lean upon me and I will help you to walk.” - -So Brown Fawn placed her arm across Singing Waters’ shoulders. Together -they slowly started back to the village. It was dark by the time they -had reached the fringe of the village, but bright fires had been lighted -to show them the way home. There was much rejoicing as Singing Waters -entered the village half carrying Brown Fawn. Gentle hands grasped Brown -Fawn and placed her gently upon the buffalo robe in her tepee. Soon her -eyelids flickered and she opened them wide, looking around for a face -which meant much to her. But Singing Waters had returned to her own home -and her children and was recounting for them the adventure she had just -had. They smiled, knowing that their mother was a woman of great -courage. They were very proud. - - - - - THE WAR THAT SHOULD NOT HAVE HAPPENED - - -Little Turtle was a young Comanche who lived happily with his mother, -father, and two older brothers on the great prairies. His father was -well respected by the tribe, above all for having three sons who would -grow to manhood and bring honor to the Comanche name. - -Each day was a new adventure for Little Turtle and he welcomed each dawn -with great excitement. He never knew just what was planned for him or -what the other children of the village would decide to do, but he was -always ready to take part in whatever would happen. - -For some time now, Little Turtle, who had just turned ten, had been in -the complete charge of his father. On certain days his father would take -him far from the village to hunt and learn how to stalk wild game and -find their signs. He learned his lessons well. At night in the tepee, he -would sit next to his father because he was the youngest, and he would -listen carefully while his father explained many things a young brave -must know to become a strong and great Comanche warrior. - -Because the Comanche village had been at peace for the last three years, -Little Turtle had only love in his heart for everyone he knew or met. -Sometimes his brothers and his father would speak to him of the hated -Apache and Kiowa and the many reasons the Comanches had for hating them. -But this meant very little to the lad. He never let such thoughts of war -spoil his fun. - -One evening after the three boys were asleep, Little Turtle’s father -spoke with his mother. - -“Blue Star,” he said, “for many days now I have talked to our youngest -son of the Apaches and the Kiowas, but he does not seem to understand. I -have told him of their many cruel ways and about our warriors who have -fallen under the arrow and the tomahawk of the Apaches and the Kiowas. -Still he refuses to speak harshly of such neighbors. Maybe Little Turtle -is right. Maybe I am wrong in hating these neighbors to the north. You -are wise, Blue Star. Your advice is often sought. Tell me now what I -should teach our son. Shall I teach him to hate the horse stealers from -the north? Or shall I not speak even their names in our daily talks?” - -Blue Star thought for a moment and then said, “My husband and great -warrior of the Comanches, hatred is a word which Little Turtle will -learn soon enough. Now he is young and innocent. He enjoys the coming of -each new day for the adventures that it will bring in his world of -dreams. He is a happy child and to us a very wonderful boy. Do we want -to change this wonderful boy to a grown warrior filled with hate? He -knows nothing but love. Possibly peace will be a long time upon our -village. We, his parents, would not want to spoil that happy world in -which he lives.” - -Great Hawk thought long about his wife’s words. Then he left the tepee -to walk alone and solve this problem which lay so heavily upon his -heart. Since his early days, Great Hawk had been taught to hate the -Apaches and the Kiowas. His own father had lost his life in a battle -with the Apaches. His brother’s hair now hung from the tepee of Grey -Wolf, the Kiowa chieftain who sat at the head of the council lodge. And -Grey Wolf was a cruel leader of a tribe that always looked for enemies -to kill. - -Great Hawk knew that he had strong personal reasons for hating the -tribes to the north. But was it right for him to think of punishing his -son for not hating them, too, in the way he did? Until he had talked -with Blue Star, he had planned to question his son tomorrow about the -Apaches and Kiowas, and if his son did not show a growing hatred toward -them, then he would punish him. But now he was not sure. No, he would -wait and be patient. After all, as Blue Star had said, there had been -peace for three years now. Thoughts of war were kept alive only by the -young bucks of the tribe who were eager for battle and glory. War was -far from the minds of the older and wiser men of the tribe. They knew -that peace had brought them prosperity and happiness, but war made them -poor and brought them hunger and pain and the death of friends. - -Great Hawk began thinking about Crooked Leg, one of the chieftains. He -was the only member of the council of Comanche chieftains who was not -happy that war had not come again. - -Early in his youth Crooked Leg had fallen into the hands of the Kiowas -and had been tortured badly. When his body was found being dragged by a -Kiowa pony that had been turned loose, he had been beaten and twisted so -badly that he lay close to death for many months. He had lived, but his -leg had never healed straight. He always rose in pain and could never -run again. Crooked Leg had stayed behind in the village during all later -battles. His hate for the Kiowa had grown until he now thought about it -all the time. At council meetings, he would always argue that the -Comanches should once again take to the warpath against the Apaches and -Kiowas. Each time he spoke, only a few council members would agree with -him. So Crooked Leg was asked to be quiet while the council talked about -tribal business. But the young bucks who thirsted for the taste of -battle would carry his words through the village after each council -meeting. For many days, the village would talk for war and against war. -Soon the wise council members would win out, the bucks would quiet down, -and Crooked Leg would be left to grumble in his tepee alone and -forgotten for awhile. - -Crooked Leg’s life had a lesson for Great Hawk. As he was returning to -his tepee, he promised himself that he would not speak of hatred again -to his son. He must not allow hatred to run his life as it had run -Crooked Leg’s. If he did, even his friends might forget him and he would -be of little use to anyone. - -The following day promised little peace. Dawn brought a roaring storm -that smashed at the Comanche village. The pounding rain had soon churned -the ground into deep mud. Families remained indoors and fathers sat -around their fires teaching sons how to make stout bows and straight -arrows, knives, tomahawks, and other handmade tools a young brave needs -to survive. Great Hawk used the time to talk to Little Turtle of the -great powers of nature and peace and the Comanche people. - -“As you grow,” he told Little Turtle, “remember to stay straight and -true and do all things that are right, and you shall live a rich and -happy life in our tribe. The Comanches have been favored greatly. We -have lived in peace for the past three years and though it has been very -dry, we have never been without water. Now the sky has opened and -allowed the rains to fall so that we have water for our families and our -horses. We have not suffered from great thirst since the great drought -visited our land when we were last at war. After two years the supply of -water was so small that our people were dying more from the great thirst -than from the arrows of the enemy. Before long our chiefs sat down in -council with our enemies to smoke the peace pipe. Now peace reigns over -our people and they have plenty of food and water.” - -Little Turtle had listened carefully while his father was speaking, then -turned to his mother and said, “Mother, I am a very lucky boy to be a -Comanche and to have such a wonderful family. I have a strong, wise, and -kind father. You have cared for me as a baby and given me good food so -that my bones would grow strong and straight. And I have two brothers of -whom I am very proud.” - -Blue Star smiled happily and began to make lunch. While the family was -eating, the rain stopped. Soon the sun broke through the dark clouds and -began to dry the earth. In the middle of the afternoon, Great Hawk rose -and touched his son upon the shoulder. - -“Come, Little Turtle,” he said. “It is time you learned to ride a horse. -We will go to my string of ponies and pick one that you may ride and -call your own. If you are to go on the hunt and take part in the many -other riding events in the village, you must learn to ride well.” - -Little Turtle’s heart leaped excitedly. He had been looking forward to -the day his father would teach him to ride. Slowly Great Hawk and his -son walked to where the tribe’s ponies were kept tied. Great Hawk began -to look amongst the herd for a special pinto pony he had planned to give -Little Turtle. It was small but strong and could run for a long time -without getting winded. Great Hawk saw quickly that something was wrong. -He began counting and discovered that three of his string, including the -pinto, were gone. At first he thought that the storm had frightened them -and they had broken loose from the main line which held the whole -string. But as he reached the main line where the three ponies should -have been tied, he saw the dangling ends of ropes that had been cut by a -knife. - -The pony guard must have left the herd to seek shelter during the storm. -So it was easy for someone to steal his three ponies. Without thinking -of Little Turtle, Great Hawk knelt in the mud to look closely at the -clear tracks that the thieves had left. He rose to his feet quickly. - -“The Apaches have stolen my ponies!” he cried out defiantly. “I shall -ride after them and bring the ponies back even if blood must be shed!” - -Then he remembered Little Turtle. “Go, Little Turtle,” he ordered. -“Return to the tepee and explain to your mother what I must do. The -Apaches have stolen three of my best ponies. I must ride fast to catch -up with them before they get too far into the hills. I shall not rest -until the ponies are back in our village or the scalps of the Apache -thieves hang in our tepee.” - -Then Great Hawk jumped onto a pony and sped off toward the hills. - -Little Turtle ran home and told his mother and brothers what had -happened. - -Little Turtle’s brothers had been two of the young bucks who had agreed -with Crooked Leg’s war talk. So they rushed out of the tepee, happy for -this chance to fight. They stopped outside their tepee just long enough -to pick up their weapons and shout the news to other young bucks of the -tribe. Many of the young braves rallied quickly, grabbed their weapons, -and dashed toward their ponies. This was just what Great Hawk had wanted -to prevent. He thought that if he could overtake the thieves he would be -able to bring them back as prisoners. Then the council of chieftains -would decide how their stealing should be punished. - -Only three Indians—not a large Apache band—were fleeing with the ponies. -Great Hawk saw this clearly from the tracks he was following. He thought -it might be three young Apache bucks who wanted to start trouble and had -turned to stealing horses as a way of making the Comanches angry enough -to fight. He must hurry, for if he did not reach the thieves before they -got to the safety of the hills, he would have to report their escape to -the council. Even the older Comanche chieftains probably would decide -that war was the only answer. - -When he reached the base of the hills, Great Hawk lost the trail of the -thieves in the rocks. Slowly, he turned his mount and started for the -village. This would now mean war. Great Hawk turned back toward the -hills. Shaking his fist at the Apaches’ stronghold, he swore vengeance -upon them. As he headed for home again, he met the war party of young -Comanche bucks, led by his two sons. - -“Wait!” he said, raising his hand. “Why do you ride so hard?” - -“We ride to avenge the theft of your horses,” Great Hawk’s oldest son -replied. “We will catch the Apache party and soak the foothills with -their blood. No matter how many they are, we shall defeat them!” - -“Wait!” Great Hawk pleaded. “There were only three men. They are already -in the hills. We will lose many men if we try to attack them here. We do -not know this ground, but the Apaches know it well. We must take this -problem to our council.” - -Just as Great Hawk spoke of the council, Crooked Leg rode out from -amidst the young warriors. Great Hawk had not seen the old warrior who -rode up close to Great Hawk. - -“Out of the way, old and weak one,” Crooked Leg screamed. “You are -afraid of these thieving vultures who steal from us under cover of a -great storm. We are not afraid and we will go on until we find them. We -have sat back too long getting fat and lazy on the buffalo meat. We have -closed our eyes to the Apaches’ great war plans against our village!” - -There were many shouts of approval from the young bucks, who were -starting to move about impatiently. - -“Wait!” shouted Great Hawk above the yelling of the young Comanche -braves. “This long-planned war plan against our village was carried out -by just three braves, as the trail will show you. They did not attack. -They killed no one. They only stole three horses. This was no attack by -the Apache tribe. It was probably the work of three young bucks, like -many of you here, who could not be held back. They went off on their own -to try to stir up trouble between our two tribes. They baited the trap -and you are riding right into it. What has happened here must be settled -by our council. Do not let Crooked Leg drive you into something you will -regret the rest of your lives—if you live to regret it!” - -The young men grew quiet as Great Hawk was speaking. - -“And now I speak directly to my two sons,” he continued. “I, your -father, order you to return with me to our tepee.” - -But the fire that Crooked Leg had been building for so long burst into -flame again as he urged the young bucks to go on. They surged forward -toward the hills. Great Hawk was forced to rein his pony aside to avoid -being run into. He knew that if Crooked Leg succeeded in clashing with -the Apaches, he, Great Hawk, would lose importance in the tribe. But if -Crooked Leg were defeated at the hands of the Apaches, the council would -deliver fair judgment and punishment. - -The young Comanche men had never fought before and might be defeated -easily. So for the sake of his sons, Great Hawk turned his pony and fell -in with the young bucks. When they saw that he had joined them, they -urged their ponies ahead at a faster pace. - -Soon they were deep in the hills of the Apaches. The party halted, and -Great Hawk moved to the front. Grasping the bridle on Crooked Leg’s pony -he swung the animal around sharply. - -“You will ride no farther,” he told the old warrior. “I command you to -go back to our village now. We have no idea where the horse thieves are. -You are willing to gamble the lives of these brave young Comanches to -satisfy a hate that burns deeply in your heart and mind.” - -While Crooked Leg watched him angrily, Great Hawk spoke to the young -men. - -“Your wish to see justice done is good,” he began. “But the Apache has -great strength, even greater here in his own home. We are few and most -of us have never fought. If we fight here, our scalps will hang in the -tepee of the Apaches before nightfall. Do not follow Crooked Leg any -longer. What he suggests can bring only death to yourselves and much -sadness to your families. We must return to the council and seek the -wise advice of our chieftains.” - -Great Hawk could see that his words were beginning to have an effect. He -continued talking to the young bucks until their ranks began to break as -a few turned their mounts toward home. Others followed, and Crooked Leg -started screaming at them to come back and follow him to glory in the -defeat of the Apaches. Then, just as the last few braves were heading -back down the trail, the hills suddenly bristled with Apache warriors, -each aiming an arrow at a young Comanche brave. As Great Hawk looked -slowly around, he saw that there were twenty times more Apache than -Comanche warriors. - -The Comanche party was stunned. No one moved. Then one brave made a grab -for his tomahawk. Great Hawk slapped his arm, saying, “Do not be a fool. -You would be dead before your hand touched the tomahawk handle. Right -now at least a dozen arrows are aimed at your body. Your tepee will be -unhappy tonight if you are so foolish.” - -Then Great Hawk rode out a little apart from the rest of the band. -Raising his empty hands, he called to the Apaches. - -“Who among you is the leader, for it is with him that I wish to talk?” - -A tall, strong brave stepped from behind a boulder and made his way to -the circle of warriors. - -“I, Maskan, am leader here,” he said. “Why do you ride into our lands in -such haste and with such anger on your faces?” - -Then Great Hawk explained the events that had led up to this moment. -When he finished, the Apache leader signaled, and three young Kiowa -bucks were dragged from behind the boulders into plain sight of the -Comanche party. - -“These,” said Maskan, “are the three who stole your horses and ours. -Their blood has run hot with the desire for adventure. So all alone, -they set out last evening to invade your land and ours to steal horses. -We have waited for them here among the rocks. We have watched you from -the time they were taken by our warriors. You who seem to lead here have -spoken wisely. The Kiowas will be punished as all Kiowa are in the -Apache nation. We have your horses. They will be yours again. We ask you -to go in peace from these hills. You have come in anger. Now you can -leave in friendship. The older men of your tribe and ours know the -trouble we are having with our young braves who want the glory of -battle. One day war will come when the chieftains who want it are strong -enough to convince the council. That day is not far away. But now return -in peace to your village.” - -Maskan turned and started for the boulder before Great Hawk could thank -him. Maskan told his braves to bring out the stolen horses. At that -moment Crooked Leg slipped his tomahawk from his belt and sent it -sailing toward the Apache leader. It landed with a thud in the middle of -Maskan’s back. Maskan cried out and fell to the ground, rolling in the -dust. Immediately, Crooked Leg’s body was filled with arrows as shaft -after shaft whined through the air. War whoops split the air as the -Comanches rose to attack the Apaches who dodged behind the rocks that -had sheltered them before. - -Great Hawk realized that it would be useless to attempt any talk of -peace now. With a sinking feeling in his heart he, too, joined the -battle, struggling to reach his two sons. The great numbers of Apaches, -well protected by large boulders, made the victory easy for them. The -young Comanches fell under the hail of Apache arrows, and their war -cries became screams of pain. - -Then Great Hawk yelled to the warriors to retreat. The riddled band -rushed toward their village. Sixteen young Comanche braves lay dead on -the ground and seven strong Indian ponies were dead or dying. It was a -ragged, tired, and bloody war party that entered the Comanche village -that night. Badly beaten, their spirit defeated, they understood now -that war was not as glorious as they had thought. As Great Hawk entered -his tepee alone, Blue Star greeted him warmly but with fright in her -eyes. - -“Where are our two sons, Great Hawk?” she asked. Great Hawk looked at -his wife and then at Little Turtle. - -“Little Turtle, you have never learned to hate and you know nothing of -war. Now both hatred and war must shatter your world of dreams. Your two -brothers lie out there in the foothills, killed by sharp, well-aimed -Apache arrows. They and fourteen others will no longer walk this earth -with us. Among them lies Crooked Leg, who is to blame for these deaths -today. Many Apaches and Comanches will yet die in a battle that never -should have begun.” - -From that day forward, Little Turtle left his dream world and walked in -the real world of warring tribes, learning to hate his tribe’s enemies, -to fight and revenge the death of his brothers. - -The war continued for some time. Many Apache and Comanche braves were -killed and injured. The council of Comanche chieftains met to discuss -better ways of fighting the Apaches. Great Hawk, who had led so many -attacks against the Apaches, stood in the council to speak. As he spoke, -Little Turtle listened from just outside the lodge where he lay hidden. - -“I, Great Hawk, have fought many battles with the Apaches. I am tired -but I will fight as long as we must. Before this war started, I had -great hate in my heart for the Apaches and Kiowas, as many of you know. -I tried to teach this to my son. I know now how wrong I was. My son -could not bring himself to hate someone or something he had not seen and -who had done him no harm. On that unhappy day which could have ended -peacefully, Crooked Leg sent a tomahawk into the back of Maskan, a brave -and fair-minded warrior who tried to keep the peace. Then the war -started. Two of my sons fell dead at my side, but still I fought on. -When we who were left managed to escape with our lives and return to our -village, I had to break the sad news to my family. Yet from that moment -I held no hate for the Apaches. - -“My oldest boys had gone from our village to follow Crooked Leg, a man -whose whole life has been one of hate. They died because of that hate, -though they died bravely, fighting as Comanches should. But now my -youngest son has learned to hate as his brothers did and I am worried -deeply. War comes with hate and is worse than disease or drought. The -Comanches have always fought honorably, but Crooked Leg’s act will -always dishonor our tribe. We cannot seek peace until we have cleansed -our hearts of hate. We must do this for the happiness and well-being of -our children and their children.” - -The council was silent for several moments after Great Hawk had spoken. -Then one of the head chiefs rose slowly and looked directly at Great -Hawk. “You have spoken wisely, Great Hawk,” he began. “We must think -this over carefully. If we want peace, it must be genuine and honorable. -Let us go back to our tepees. Let us call the council to meet in two -suns and make our decision then.” - -When Great Hawk returned to his tepee, his son was waiting for him, -having run ahead. - -“Do not be troubled, father,” Little Turtle said, “for I have driven the -hate from my heart. I hope this war will end soon and that there will be -no room in anyone’s heart for hate. For hate eats men’s hearts and makes -them like Crooked Leg, unhappy and selfish and cruel, bringing death and -sorrow to those around them. These things are not for the Comanches.” - - - - - LITTLE HORSE AND THE PAINTED ARROW - - -Little Horse was a member of the proud and courageous Delaware tribe. He -grew up in his tribe among a people who were peaceful. They hunted and -fished and sang and danced and celebrated much as most tribes did in the -very early days, but there was to come a time when all was not peace and -contentment. - -Little Horse had been well trained by his father, Running Bear, and he -had taken his lessons as a young boy very seriously. Though he had -practiced very hard, he had never become very good with the bow and -arrow or the tomahawk. But he had become very good at using and throwing -the traditional hunting knife which was his proudest possession. - -It was spring in the valley of the Delawares and day followed day with -the peaceful and warm sun shining down upon the village in which Little -Horse lived. Occasionally the soft rains would descend on the forest and -hillside making everything wet and a rich green color. All was happiness -in the village until that fateful day when Little Horse decided to take -his long trip. - -Shouldering his stout bow and a quiver of arrows he started out along -the forest trail. He desired to go to the upper end of the valley and -search out some wild turkey which he had heard many of the returning -hunters speak about. The fact that the place where these turkeys lived -was almost a day’s journey from his village did not seem to bother him, -for he had placed in his food pouch enough dried venison and he would -have berries and nuts along the way. - -As he walked along, he looked from side to side watching for signs of -wild game, not wanting to kill any so close to home but wanting to test -his senses of hearing and sight which had been trained by his father so -patiently. - -Once in a while, Little Horse would stop in his journey to partake of -some fresh water or just to rest on a moss patch under some large tree -and think about the wonders of nature and the wonderful peace in his -tribe. - -Then he would rise and continue his journey which took him further and -further from home with each step. And not realizing it, he had soon -crossed into the land of the Iroquois, for his particular tribe had -their village close to the line which separated the lands of the -Delawares from the hunting grounds of the Iroquois. - -This talk of tribal lands and borders did not mean much to Little Horse, -although he had heard his father speak quite often of the Iroquois; and -though he had been told never to wander too far from the village, he -felt he was grown up enough by this time to take care of himself. One -other thing which meant very little to Little Horse was the fact that in -this period, neighboring tribes were often at war with each other, for -war between tribes was rather common among the American Indians. -Stealing and quarreling among individuals and trespassing upon hunting -grounds were but a few reasons for this constant state of war and -feuding. But to a young lad like Little Horse, who was so wrapped up in -his desire to hunt the elusive turkey, war and fighting were the -furthest things from his mind. - -Meanwhile Running Bear, back at the village, was asking about for his -son, for today he was to have taken him fishing in the great lake. No -one seemed to know where the boy was until Running Bear asked a group of -children playing on the edge of the village, and one of them replied -that he had seen Little Horse with his food pouch at his belt and his -bow over his shoulder trotting up the trail that led to the north and -into the land of the Iroquois. - -Fear gripped Running Bear’s heart. Just that morning one of the hunters -had returned from the forest to tell of having found three Iroquois -painted arrows stuck in the ground in a row, which was a sign of open -warfare and he had the three arrows gripped in his hand which had been -found close by to the village. This could mean but one thing. For some -reason the Iroquois had been aroused, and now no Delaware would be safe -alone any great distance from the home encampment. As long as this open -warfare lasted, now they would have to travel in groups. - -Running Bear feared for his son. So Running Bear gathered a few of his -friends, and in a group they started up the trail toward the land of the -Iroquois, hoping that Little Horse had not gone too far after all. - -But they were to be sadly disappointed, for Little Horse at this moment -was deep in Iroquois territory on the trail of wild turkey. - -As Little Horse walked silently along the forest trails, he suddenly -realized that it had become very quiet. He stopped to listen for the -song of the birds but he heard none. He even found it so quiet that the -breeze sounded like a windstorm. Someone or something else was near by, -for only for that reason would all the forest creatures grow silent. - -Then he heard the call of one solitary bird ahead and off to the left. -And then behind him to the right he heard a similar call and then Little -Horse knew. - -It came upon him suddenly like a thundering in his ears. He realized -that he was no longer in Delaware country, for this was the call of the -Iroquois which his father had taught to him. But what had he to fear? -The Delawares and the Iroquois were not at war, and so he boldly -shouldered his bow and turned to start for home down the trail. But -before he had taken two steps there was a loud whooping from many -directions and before Little Horse could do anything, he was surrounded -and his arms pinned by four husky Iroquois braves. One of them -brandishing a shining knife was about to take the boy’s life when -another brave stepped from the brush and spoke, “Put down your knife. -This Delaware is tall, but he is only a boy.” - -“But he is still a Delaware,” cried the brave, holding the knife close -to the heart of Little Horse. - -“No matter, he is young and strong. We will take him back to the village -with us. We have not had much sport these days of late. This young one -will make a fair game for us. We will have him run the gauntlet to see -whether he will be permitted to live. I, Crooked Hand, have spoken.” - -Little Horse then realized that Crooked Hand must be some sort of leader -in the tribe, for there was no more argument. The arms of Little Horse -were then tightly bound behind him and he was roughly shoved along the -trail toward the village from whence these warriors had come. His -weapons had been gathered, and one of the braves carried these as the -party trotted easily along the trail, pressing Little Horse before them. - -It was not too long after this that Running Bear and his rescue party -arrived at the place where the struggle had taken place. It was soon -evident to all the braves in the party that Little Horse had been taken -prisoner, for once past the marks of the struggle, it was easy to pick -out the markings of his moccasins in the soft earth of the trail and -Little Horse had made sure to come down heavily on his feet in order to -leave a trail plain enough for any who might follow to see. - -Running Bear and his party pressed forward, going more stealthily now, -for they were deep in the territory of the Iroquois and from all signs -quite close to the village. Suddenly Running Bear stopped and signaled -the party to flatten themselves upon the ground. Through the trees he -had seen the feather of an Iroquois and, hardly daring to breathe, they -waited. Detection now would mean almost certain death, for they were -tired from their long race through the forest and the Iroquois, being -close to home and fresh, would have made easy victims of the Delawares. - -The lone Iroquois brave had stopped and looked around and then -satisfying himself that nothing out of the ordinary was around had -continued along the trail in pursuit of the rest of his party which had -Little Horse captive. - -Running Bear, when he felt it was safe, gathered his friends about him -and then spoke in a whisper. - -“We will wait until it is dark and then I will approach the village and -see if it would be possible for us to rescue Little Horse and return to -our village. It is very late and surely he will not be in danger -tonight, for the thieving Iroquois will go into council to decide what -to do with him. He is definitely a prisoner and most likely since he is -young and strong but yet a boy they will make him run the gauntlet -tomorrow as a test as to whether he will be permitted to live or must -die.” - -When darkness fell, Running Bear slipped through the forest to the edge -of the Iroquois village and there, hidden in the brush, he was able to -view the happenings in the village. He noticed one particular wigwam -being well guarded and this he presumed was where Little Horse was being -held prisoner. Then as his eyes wandered about the village he noticed a -number of older men entering the large council lodge. - -This was a fairly large village of the Iroquois, and Running Bear felt -that it would be useless for his small band to attempt a rescue of -Little Horse. - -Suddenly he heard a slight rustling to the side of the trail and peering -into the darkness he saw the figure of a brave approaching the trail. He -waited and when the brave was almost upon him he reached out and -throwing his arms around the throat of the Iroquois he drove his knife -into the brave’s heart. - -Without a sound the Iroquois slipped to the ground. Running Bear turned -and fled back through the forest. They must leave the land quickly, for -as soon as the dead brave was discovered a large party would be sent to -look for the killers. So as soon as Running Bear had returned to his -friends they made a hasty retreat from the vicinity of the village and, -running at a steady pace, returned to their village to report the -findings. Running Bear planned to gather a large force and the following -evening they would attack the Iroquois village and seek to rescue Little -Horse. - -Meanwhile Little Horse sat in the wigwam of the Iroquois village -awaiting the decision of the council and it was not long in coming. Soon -a rather tall Iroquois brave entered and standing in the doorway he -informed Little Horse that the council had agreed to spare his life if -tomorrow he could prove himself worthy of the gift of life by running -the gauntlet. - -When the sun was directly overhead he would be placed at the head of two -rows of Iroquois and at a given signal would run the gauntlet of war -clubs prepared for him. - -It would be ridiculous to say that Little Horse was not frightened, for -at this particular time Little Horse was a very scared little brave. He -had known nothing but comfort and warmth and friendliness since the day -he was born, and the loving care and kindness of his family and friends -had been his only contact with Indian life. Here in the village of a -tribe which he had not thought to be hostile, he suddenly found himself -a prisoner and about to be forced to run the gauntlet of war clubs. - -He had heard a great deal about the gauntlet from his father who had -witnessed the gauntlet and had told of his experience as one of the line -of braves making up the gauntlet when they dealt with some of their -prisoners. - -Little Horse was afraid, and his fear kept him from resting his body for -the coming ordeal. Then in the midst of this fear which gripped his -heart, Little Horse remembered the words of his father. - -“My son,” Running Bear had said to him one day, “if ever you should find -yourself in trouble or in danger, remember that you are a Delaware and -the Delawares are a strong and proud people. Rest as much as you can, -force your body to relax so that you may be prepared for whatever ordeal -you must face. You have been taught every skill possible except the -skill of courage. This you must have in your heart and if courage abides -in your heart as the beaver in the stream, then fear can be overcome and -one can consider himself prepared for any hardship which may lie ahead.” - -Remembering those words was great comfort to Little Horse and again and -again he kept repeating them to himself. Soon the chill that seemed to -be in his body left him and the cold fear that gripped his heart -released its hold and he was calm once again. When his body relaxed and -his mind was at ease, Little Horse slept. - -No sense to worry over what tomorrow will bring, but remember the words -of Running Bear. Twice more he repeated the words of his father to -himself and with that he was asleep. - -He had not been asleep long when the door of the wigwam was darkened by -two of the braves who had aided in his capture that afternoon. As they -viewed the boy asleep on the floor, the taller of the two spoke. - -“He sleeps. Look how calm his face is. Notice the slight smile upon his -lips. This is the sign of a growing warrior. Courage burns deep in his -heart. For even now, knowing that tomorrow he may have to die, he sleeps -the peaceful sleep of a baby. This lad can be no more than fifteen and -yet he is tall and strong and he had a good face. For many moons we have -been at peace with our brothers the Delawares and now war and -bloodshed.” The other brave shook his head and, looking at the lad, he -spoke. - -“If you had not been present when he was captured, his hair would now be -hanging from the wigwam of the vicious one. He has the blood of several -Delawares upon his hands now and one more would only have added to his -greatness even if it were only the scalp of a boy. - -“Masi is a ruthless brave. Ever since he was beaten in battle by the -brave Delaware, Running Bear, he has carried hatred in his heart for the -Delawares. Their having sent hunting parties into the land of the -Iroquois and taken game from our hunting grounds was all the excuse that -was needed. And so our tribes are at war, and it will not cease until -many are dead and there is much sadness in the wigwams of both tribes.” -With these words, the warriors withdrew from the door. - -Little Horse had heard all and pondered the words of the Iroquois. He -had not known that any of their tribe had invaded the hunting grounds of -the Iroquois unless it had been himself. This troubled him, but he -pushed the thoughts from his mind and slept once again. Because of his -training he slept soundly and as dawn broke through the greyness he -awoke feeling quite hungry and thirsty. - -The guards at his door looked in, and soon food and drink were brought -to him. He ate hungrily and drank long of the cool water and when he had -finished, his guards stepped forward and once again bound his wrists. -However, they took him outside the wigwam and allowed him to walk up and -down for a short while to give his muscles exercise. The morning passed -quickly and soon it was time. - -Little Horse felt the old fear once again returning to his breast and -now there was nothing he could do to force it back. As the guards -approached they noticed Little Horse looking upward as if to speak with -someone and it was true, for Little Horse was calling upon the powers of -nature to give him strength at this hour of trial. - -His guards approached him and, grasping his arms, dragged him from the -wigwam, for now fear had gripped the heart of Little Horse and he fought -the hands of the Iroquois which held his arms in firm grip and he fought -the tough thongs which bound his wrists. But twist and turn as he would, -it did no good and soon he was standing before the elders of the tribe. - -Across the center of the village he saw the gauntlet of tall powerful -braves begin to form and his legs trembled slightly. The elders talked -among themselves, and then one old man stepped forward and spoke to -Little Horse. - -“Your tribe has invaded the lands of the Iroquois in seeking wild game -and in doing so they have broken the law of the tribes. If they had -stayed on their own ground there would have been no need for war. But -for the Iroquois to do nothing when their neighbor invades the sacred -hunting ground would be as if we shouted through the forest that we were -weak and afraid of the Delawares. You have been captured on our land and -as an example to all Delawares you will be made to run the gauntlet. If -you do so successfully your life will be spared, but if not the war -clubs my braves now hold shall beat your body till it blends with the -dirt of the forest floor and you are no more. Are you ready for the -ordeal?” - -Little Horse held his head high and looking straight into the eyes of -the elder warrior, he said, “I know not of any of our braves that -invaded your hunting grounds unless it was myself. In pursuit of the -wild turkey, I ran quickly along the trail and was in the land of the -Iroquois before I realized. I did not think that the great Iroquois -would miss one little wild turkey.” - -The old warrior looked stern and then he said, “It is not you but other -braves of your tribe who have entered our grounds, but you and I are not -here to argue, for I will not even discuss it, the law has been broken -and war has been declared. Already the blood of one of our warriors had -been spilled on the very edge of our camp.” - -With this statement the heart of Little Horse beat just a little faster, -for if one of the Iroquois had died close to the village then the -Delawares must have followed and there was still hope that he would be -rescued. - -“I am ready for the gauntlet,” Little Horse said. - -With that he was dragged to the head of the two lines. He looked down -the two long rows of warriors standing like statues with war clubs -raised, each one hoping that his blow would be the one that would deal -death to this Delaware. Then the signal was given, and Little Horse took -a deep breath and started running with top speed. As he ran he ducked -from side to side and hesitated, forcing one blow to come down too soon -or miss entirely. Halfway down the line he had not fared too badly, but -as he came to the second half he was thrown a little off stride and -could not duck so many of the blows. Several landed rather solidly upon -his back and shoulders and arms and he began to feel weak, but with a -last spurt of speed he reached the end of the line just as the club of -Masi glanced off the side of his head. Instead of slumping to the ground -between the two rows, Little Horse fell forward clear of the line and as -Masi raised his club to strike again the elder stepped forward and -raising his arms he said, - -“Cease, Masi, for the boy is clear of the gauntlet. He has received -quite a beating, but breath still stirs in his body. He is a brave lad -and has earned the right to live.” - -Little Horse was then carried to a wigwam where his bruises were cared -for. Food and water were brought and he was made comfortable. The tall -warrior that had prevented his death upon the trail entered the wigwam -and spoke with Little Horse. - -“O my brave young man, you have proved to be quite courageous this day, -and the Iroquois admire the courage of even their enemies. You will rest -now and when you are well we will talk.” - -With that he left the wigwam, and sudden darkness came once again to -Little Horse as he fell unconscious. - -Meanwhile Running Bear had gathered quite a force of Delawares and was -approaching the village from the south. Advance scouts who had been near -the village of the Iroquois throughout the day reported the gauntlet and -the exact location where they had placed the boy. - -Running Bear swiftly gave his orders and the band advanced at a quicker -pace, spreading out so that by the late afternoon a strong semicircle of -Delaware braves surrounded the Iroquois stronghold. - -At a given signal from Running Bear, the attack was on. The attack was -such that the Iroquois were caught completely by surprise. Though the -band of attacking Delawares was much smaller than the number of Iroquois -in the village, they swooped into the village to surprise the guards -surrounding the wigwam of Little Horse. - -They rushed in and gathering the body of the still unconscious boy they -rushed out again and into the forest, and were away before the Iroquois -had gathered themselves together. By the time the Iroquois were ready to -do battle, the Delawares had left, leaving the bodies of four Iroquois -and two of their own attacking party dead upon the ground surrounding -the wigwam where Little Horse had been held captive. - -Once the rescue had been accomplished the attacking Delawares did not -wait to join in battle with the now furious Iroquois but sped swiftly -toward the south and the safety and security of their own village. They -traveled at a very fast pace and though it was growing dark it was not -long before they had placed many miles between themselves and the -village of the Iroquois. - -Onward through the night and into the next day they pressed until soon -they could see the smoke of the Delaware village. They arrived in the -middle of the village among the welcoming shouts of their friends and -families who had awaited their return with growing anxiety. - -Without a moment’s hesitation, Little Horse was placed in the warmth and -seclusion of his father’s wigwam and when his hurts had been attended -to, his father knelt by his side to add what comfort he could, and to -add his praise to the courage of the boy. He promised that he, Running -Bear, would not rest until he had paid back the Iroquois for the -injuries they had inflicted upon his son. - -“Now rest, my son,” Running Bear said, “and when you have rested and -eaten we shall talk some more.” Running Bear turned to leave but Little -Horse placed his hand upon his arm and bade him stay. - -“Wait, my father, for there is something I must tell you. While at the -village of our neighbors the Iroquois I learned why it was that they had -declared war upon the Delawares. It was reported to them that the -Delawares had invaded their hunting ground and made off with many kills. -This being a breach of the peace between the tribes, they had no choice -but to declare that war existed between their own tribe and that of the -Delawares.” - -“This is a serious matter, my son,” said Running Bear, “for we have had -plenty of food on our own land and I see no reason for any of our braves -going into the land of the Iroquois to hunt. But this matter is of grave -importance and we must hold a council immediately, for the Iroquois are -probably at this very moment preparing a great dance, since tomorrow -they will no doubt move to attack our village.” - -With that, Running Bear left his wigwam and calling the elder braves -together, they immediately went into council. After telling the council -all that his son had reported to him, Running Bear asked that the tribe -be assembled and told of the situation that existed. The council agreed -and very shortly the whole tribe was gathered in the center of the ring -and one of the elders rose to speak. - -“The Iroquois have declared war, and Little Horse tells us that the -reason for this is that some of our braves have invaded their hunting -grounds to kill the swift deer. If this is true we have done the -Iroquois a grave injustice. The forest and fields of our land have -yielded us much food this past year and I see no reason for having left -our lands to hunt elsewhere. Who among you has caused the wrath of the -Iroquois to be brought down upon our heads?” - -One at a time the leaders of the families stepped forward to deny that -they had left the sacred hunting grounds of the Delawares until all had -spoken. When no one had accepted the guilt, Running Bear rose and spoke. - -“If no one of our village has violated the sacred lands of the Iroquois, -we have committed no crime. Of this I must speak further. For at this -moment the Iroquois are probably on their way to our village to seek -revenge for our attack last night. I will take with me two warriors and -without weapons we shall go to speak of peace with our neighbors, the -Iroquois. - -“Already seven brave young men are dead, and my own son lies hurt and -bleeding in my wigwam. In order to prevent the shed of further blood, I -must go to meet the oncoming Iroquois with only talk of peace. -Somewhere, somehow, an injustice has been done, and we must right this -wrong before peace can once more prevail over our land.” - -With that, Running Bear selected two stout warriors and leaving their -weapons behind they proceeded at a steady pace back up the path toward -the Iroquois country. They traveled swiftly and many hours later Running -Bear suggested they stop and rest. - -As the three warriors rested at the side of the trail, they were -suddenly surrounded by many Iroquois braves. Their arms were tightly -bound and menacing motions with tomahawk and knife were made. But the -same warrior that had prevented the death of Little Horse stepped -forward and, raising his arm for silence, he spoke to Running Bear. - -“You appear to be the leader of this small party and I ask you why you -come to the land of the Iroquois without arms when open war exists?” - -Running Bear spoke loud and clear for the whole Iroquois war party to -hear. “I, Running Bear, with my two fellow warriors come in peace to -speak with the council of the great Iroquois. As you can see, we carry -no arms and we rested in the open along the trail, hoping that we would -find our Iroquois neighbors before they and the Delawares shed each -other’s blood once again.” - -The Iroquois brave said nothing, but having the wrists of the three -Delawares bound they were herded along the trail back to the camp of the -Iroquois. - -As the party entered the camp they could hear much moaning and crying -from the families of the Iroquois that had been slain and also they -observed the menacing looks as the people of the village crowded around -the party, pressing ever closer hoping for a reason to swing a club or a -tomahawk or drive a knife deep into the head or hearts of these -Delawares who so boldly approached the village without arms. - -But the tall leader of the war party guided them safely to a wigwam -where they were placed under heavy guard until the council lodge had -been prepared for the great council. - -When the elders and wise men of the tribe had gathered, the prisoners -were led before them. Running Bear spoke briefly of their mission and -then in a loud clear voice he said, - -“The Delawares have sworn to their chiefs that none among our village -have invaded the hunting grounds of the Iroquois and therefore there is -no need for war between us.” - -There was some hushed conversation and then one of the elders spoke to a -guard at the door. “Summon the warrior known as Masi.” Masi was brought -to the council and the elder who had summoned him spoke. - -“Masi, it was you who reported to the council of the thievery of the -Delaware and it was you who brought to our council the entrails of a -deer to prove before the council your story of having seen the hunting -party of Delawares invade our lands and kill much wild game. Now tell -these warriors who come to us from the Delawares that you have seen this -with your own eyes.” - -Masi spoke and told of having seen a hunting party of some fifteen -braves of the Delawares stalk, kill, and strip the carcasses of several -deer and take several wild turkey and other wild game. When he had -finished, the council looked first at Masi and then at Running Bear. The -elder was about to speak once more when the tall warrior who had saved -the life of Little Horse stepped forward and spoke to the council. - -“I do not know why,” he said, “but my heart tells me the Delaware speaks -truth. For many weeks now Masi has brooded over the death of his sister, -and his mind has not been quite right since she died of the great -sickness. We know that Masi has been a great warrior, but ask him once -again to repeat what he saw. For when he first told his story the -hunting party of Delawares were six in number. Suddenly they have -increased to number fifteen.” - -“Yes, yes,” cried Masi, “and there have been many, many more since that -day. If we are not careful they will be in our village in one more sun -and we shall all be murdered in our sleep.” - -With that, Masi began to scream and he threw himself upon the ground, -tearing at the ground and bemoaning the death of his young sister whom -he had loved dearly. He was truly a grief-stricken brave gone mad. - -The elder who seemed to be a leader in the council stepped forward then -and placing his hands upon the shoulders of Running Bear, he said, -“There has been a great wrong done here, and we must sit and smoke the -peacepipe together. We ask forgiveness, for we have wronged each other -greatly. Once again peace shall exist between the Iroquois and the -Delawares and let us not allow anything to break that peace. Brothers we -have been in the past, and brothers we will be again. Come sit with us -and we shall smoke the pipe.” - -With that, the peacepipe was passed from hand to hand and when all had -smoked, food and drink were brought. Then there was much rejoicing as -the village was told of the results of the council meeting. Loaded down -with gifts, Running Bear and his two warriors returned to their village -with the word of peace. - -After telling of the good news, Running Bear went to his wigwam where he -found Little Horse now able to sit up and partake of solid food. He -seated himself next to his son and once again praised him for the -courage he had showed and explained to him how important the information -he had brought had been—how he, Running Bear, was able through talk with -the council of Iroquois to bring about peace between the Delawares and -the Iroquois. - - - - - FALLING WATER EARNS A FEATHER - - -Falling Water came galloping into the Dakota-Sioux camp on his brand-new -pony. The pony had been a present from his uncle, Walking Bear, one of -the leaders of the tribe. Proudly Falling Water rode it up and down -through the camp so all the other young braves could see what a -beautiful pony he had. When he felt that everyone had seen the pony he -rode swiftly back to the tepee of his father and dismounting ran to show -his father the fine gift. - -One Horn, so named because he had lost an ear in a battle with a band of -Shoshone braves a few years ago, stepped from the tepee and admired this -fine gift. - -“It is a strong pony and a young one, my son. Treat it well, for a horse -can be your best friend.” - -“Yes, father, I will take good care of the pony and I will ride him on -the hunt. I am now a man and with my own weapons and my own horse, I can -now go on the hunt.” - -“Yes, my son. In fact tomorrow your uncle is leading a hunting party in -search of the buffalo, for it is almost time for the big buffalo hunt. -So see to your weapons and be sure you are ready for the great hunt.” - -Falling Water rushed into the tepee and the rest of the day he spent -working on his weapons in preparation for the hunt. He was sixteen now -and considered a man but until now he had not been on any of the big -hunts, for he had been sick the season of the hunt last year and now he -was well and strong and prepared to ride with the best of them. - -The following morning, Walking Bear gathered the warriors about him and -made sure that all were prepared for the trip ahead. - -“We will divide into three groups and go in different directions. When -the sun has crossed the great sky twice we will meet where the -Whispering River flows. There we will compare what each group has found, -and the largest herd shall become our target. Let me warn you each and -every one that though we are hunting buffalo, we must be ever aware that -our enemies the Shoshones are all about us and we must be on guard that -these jackals do not add our scalps to their belts. Calling Hawk, you -will lead one party, Speaks Like Thunder, you will lead the second -party, and I will lead the third. Good hunting, and may we all meet with -our hair still upon our heads, come the end of the second day.” - -So it was that Falling Water, in Calling Hawk’s party, was off on an -adventure that was to earn him his first feathers for bravery. - -Calling Hawk led his party to the west, for scouts had reported a fine -herd of buffalo moving in that direction. The party moved steadily along -keeping their eyes alert for signs of dust clouds that would signify a -moving herd or horsemen. One or two braves were sent ahead to sweep wide -of the main party to see what they could possibly find. From time to -time these scouts would ride back to the main party and two more would -take their place. - -The first day ended with no sight of buffalo or of marauding Shoshones, -and the group made camp in a small clump of trees. - -The following morning after a breakfast of pemmican they were on their -way once again. - -It was late in the morning when a scout riding hard brought his pony to -a halt in front of Calling Hawk. He reported that he had spotted a herd -of buffalo about a quarter of a mile ahead of the group. And so the -party quickened its pace and soon came to the top of a rise. There below -it on the prairie was a fine large herd of buffalo. They were not moving -and therefore no dust cloud had been seen. - -Calling Hawk asked two of the braves to remain and keep watch on the -herd while the others continued to the Whispering River which was but a -short distance ahead, there to join with Walking Bear and make their -report. - -Unknown to Calling Hawk and his party, the herd had also been seen by a -hunting party of Shoshones, slightly larger than the Dakota-Sioux party, -and also at the same time they had seen the party of Calling Hawk. As -the Sioux moved toward the river, the Shoshones moved parallel awaiting -the best place to attack. - -And now it was Falling Water’s turn to ride scout and he moved out from -the party. He rode hard to get a long lead on the party and then began -to move steadily to the side of the group and ever toward the river. -Soon he felt it was time to return to the group. - -It was getting late in the afternoon, and as he turned to return he saw -to the north a small cloud of dust. Urging his horse to the top of a -near-by rise he slid from his back and, crawling to the very edge, -peered over into the valley below. There he saw a sight which made his -blood run hot. - -A band of perhaps twenty Shoshones were riding hard toward the -unsuspecting Sioux party which was about twelve in number. Quickly -mounting his horse, Falling Water rode like the wind back toward his -brothers. Finally coming over a slight hill he saw the party moving -slowly forward. Then he began to shout his warning of Shoshones and -Calling Hawk called his party to a halt. - -Falling Water galloped up and reported what he had seen. Quickly the -Sioux formed a line and drawing their weapons they moved forward to meet -the Shoshones. - -Soon the Sioux saw the oncoming enemy and urged their horses to even -greater speed. - -The two groups clashed, and there was a mixture of rearing horses and -screaming men. Knives flashed and arrows swished through the air, some -flying harmlessly or some thudding into flesh. - -Falling Water, right in the middle, rode toward a large Shoshone buck. -As he did, a knife thrust slashed his arm and he dropped his weapons, -but now he was too close to the Shoshone to stop the forward move of his -horse. Ducking under the slashing knife of the Shoshone warrior, he -placed his hand upon the brave’s shoulder and pushed. The brave was -thrown off balance and almost lost his seat and, while he was trying to -regain his seat, Falling Water dashed to the outer circle. - -Soon the fight was over and twelve Shoshones and three Sioux lay dead -upon the ground while a badly beaten group of Shoshones beat a hasty -retreat into the distance. The felled warriors were placed across their -horses’ backs, and the group continued to their meeting place. - -When Calling Hawk reported to Walking Bear their fight with the -Shoshone, Walking Bear ordered a return to the village. - -When the party entered the village the people were immediately aware of -what had happened because of the bodies and the Shoshone scalps hanging -from the belts of several warriors. - -That evening a council was held, and Falling Water rose to report to the -council of his great deed of courage. He had rushed in and touched an -enemy while still alive. When he had finished, Walking Bear said, - -“Are there any here that were witnesses to this event?” - -Calling Hawk stepped forward and in very descriptive words retold the -event. The others told their stories of bravery and then Falling Water -was called before the chief, his uncle. - -“I am very proud of you, my brother’s son. You have proven yourself a -great warrior this day and for that you shall be privileged to wear two -eagle feathers.” - -There were many shouts of praise and approval, and Falling Water felt a -warm glow as his father placed his hands across his shoulders and said, -“I am proud of you, my son.” - -Today Falling Water had earned his first feathers. - - - - - THE RACE WITH DEATH - - -In the high range of mountains lived the great and powerful Apaches. For -many, many years the war between the Long Knives and the Apaches had -been waging back and forth. - -The Long Knives, as the white men’s cavalry were known in those days, -had at last worked out a treaty with the Apaches and all was peaceful -for the time being. With the coming of peace to the Apaches, the return -of normal family life was slowly but surely noticed by the younger of -the warriors. - -There was more time now to teach the young braves their lessons, and the -women were happier than they had been. For the past few years all the -talk had been of war and killing, but now conversation turned to other -topics. Of course there were a few young bucks who still chanted for -war, but the wiser chiefs desired to stay at peace for as long as was -possible. - -One evening some of the older chiefs were seated around the fire smoking -and talking to pass the evening hours away when their attention was -called to Chief Running Dog, one of the older chiefs of the tribe, who -had been sitting quietly in the circle not saying much but gazing off -into the night as if he were looking for something. - -Twisted Wolf spoke. “What do you look for, friend Running Dog? Do you -see something in the distance with those old eyes that the rest of us -should be looking for?” - -“No, Twisted Wolf, I do not look for anything in the present, but rather -I am looking far into the past, to a time when I was just a small boy -and there had been peace and happiness in our tribe for many years.” - -“Why should you think about the past now, old one? Is there something -particular that you are trying to recall?” - -Running Dog laughed, “Oh, I do not have to think too hard to recall what -I want to think about. Something happened when I was a young boy that I -shall long remember. Some of you should remember this one adventure too, -for some of you were just about my age at the time.” - -“Tell us,” they cried, “tell us what adventure you recall as a boy.” - -“Well,” said Chief Running Dog, “the story I remember is one which my -father liked to call the Race of Death. But I do not want to bore you -with tales of my childhood. They are only memories of an old man who -lives in a world of dreams.” - -“Now, Running Dog, do you want us to coax you? I have never known you to -need prompting to tell a story. Why do you need coaxing at this time?” - -“Well, it is not a funny story and to me at the time it was not a very -nice experience to go through. Just recalling it brings back some of the -fears which filled my heart at the time. But, if it is your desire, then -I shall tell you the story. Fill your pipes and settle back, because it -is quite a long story and we will be here at the fire for some time -until I have finished. But remember that I warned you. If you get bored, -it is your own fault, for you have asked for this story.” - -“Do not ramble, Running Dog. Get on with the story.” - -So it was that Running Dog, old Apache warrior, told his story that -evening on the plateau of Apache country around a blazing council fire -with his friends there to relive the experience of his childhood once -again. - -“It was many years ago,” Running Dog began. “The Apache village in which -I lived had a very long and difficult time of sickness. Many of our -number had died of the great coughing sickness which the Long Knives -call pneumonia, but it seemed that at last the sickness was leaving us -and our people were returning to a time of good health and prosperity. -There was much mourning for loved ones, but our family had been very -lucky. My father and mother had both survived the epidemic and I, their -only son, had been well all through the siege of sickness. - -“The sick continued to get well and little by little the tribe returned -to its normal activity. Once again the contests and games took place and -there was much joy at the ceremonial dances and feasts. - -“It was just after one of these feasts that my friend White Cloud and I -decided to take a hunting trip into the far hills. We sought the -permission of our fathers, and packing some food and blankets we placed -these upon a pack horse and started off for the distant high mountains. - -“What exactly we were going to hunt we did not know, but we were so -excited about the prospect of living by ourselves for a few days that -the problem of what to hunt did not seem to bother us too much at the -time. - -“One thing my father had cautioned me about. ‘My son, Running Dog,’ he -said, ‘on your trip be aware of any strangers. Not too far to the north -is the land of the Kiowas and they have been seen recently in this area. -Just a few scattered here and there, but you and your friend White Cloud -are riding two very fine ponies; and the Kiowas, I am sure, would like -nothing better than to return to their village in the possession of -three more very fine Apache horses, for their very life is one of horse -stealing. The pack horse you take is just as strong and fast as the -other two, so be careful and do not get careless on your trip. You are -old enough now to realize the dangers an Apache faces in this country. - -“‘Besides the wandering Kiowas you had best be alert to the cats that -roam the rock ledges. Keep your bow and arrow handy and make sure your -hand is steady, for you will get but one chance to stop the wild leap of -a mountain lion if he chooses to spring. Now I must bid you good-bye. I -have asked the gods to protect you and your friend White Cloud. May they -guide you safely to a successful hunt and a safe return to your homes -and your families. I will ride part way and see you on your way. Come, I -will get my horse.’” - -So the two boys, along with Running Dog’s father, rode to the edge of -the camp and a little way farther on, where Running Dog’s father bade -them a fond good-bye once again and turned to return to the village. - -The two boys waved until they were out of sight and then concentrated on -the long trip they felt they must make before they would enter good -hunting territory. As they rode they kept careful watch along the trail -for signs of anyone having recently been there. - -Occasionally they saw signs where Indian ponies had been but these were -all many days old. They found evidence too of wild game, but at no time -did they catch sight of anything more than a rabbit or two. - -After traveling most of the day and stopping only for lunch the two boys -decided to halt and make camp for the night. They found a beautiful spot -near a water hole and after staking their horses out they unrolled their -blankets and prepared the evening meal. In the darkness they could hear -the coyote baying at the moon and Running Dog remarked how sad and -plaintive was the call of the coyote. White Cloud agreed, “Yes, Running -Dog, it is quite a sad sound, but after all the coyote is a very lonely -animal. You too would not feel much like laughing if you had to spend -all of your life alone without friends.” - -The two boys laughed and then wrapping themselves in their blankets were -soon fast asleep. - -The following morning the boys rose and after eating breakfast, packed -their equipment once again and were soon on the trail, traveling ever -northward. Soon they had entered land that was not at all familiar to -them, but they began to notice plentiful signs of game and so they kept -eagerly onward. - -“Look,” cried Running Dog, “pony tracks, and they are fresh. Not too -long ago Indian ponies passed this way. In fact I would say they are not -more than a day old. See, it has been damp here and the impression of -the ponies’ hoofs has not had time to harden through. I wonder though, -White Cloud, why our brothers would be this far north?” - -White Cloud thought for a moment and then he said, “But, Running Dog, -you do not think that we are the only ones off on a hunting party. These -are probably the tracks of some of our men who are also seeking game and -have come this far north in search of it.” - -“That may be true, White Cloud; on the other hand, these may be the hoof -prints of Kiowa ponies and if so then we are much further north than I -figured and are now in Kiowa territory. That is not a healthy place to -be.” - -“What should we do, Running Dog?” - -“I do not know. For if we are in the land of the Kiowas we should turn -and return to our own land; but if we are not and these are the tracks -of friendly Apaches we would be silly to turn back, for only now have -the signs of game become plentiful. The problem is whether we should -stay and take our chances or return empty-handed with our tails between -our legs.” - -“You are older, Running Dog, you make the decision.” - -“All right then, we shall stay and take our chances. I have seen many -signs of deer and we shall find ourselves a large buck to kill before we -return to our village. But come, it is getting late. Let us find a good -place to camp.” - -The two young braves traveled a little farther on, and then when they -both agreed that an ideal place was not to be located, they settled for -a small clump of trees nestled in a gully. There was water not too far -distant, and about two hundred yards from where they camped, there was a -large mass of rock ledges that rose up from the ground, eventually -growing into a cliff. In among these boulders and rock ledges they were -able to find a source of water, and so they decided to make this their -base of operations. - -To the west of where they camped they had seen a small woodland and -swamp area which they figured would make a good hunting place for wild -game. The boys went about setting up their camping ground and when they -had completed the task at hand they settled down to going over their -hunting equipment. - -The two boys having checked their bows and arrows went off to attempt to -find some fresh meat for supper. White Cloud headed for the woodlands to -the west and Running Dog started for the rock formation to the north. -After about two hours of hunting and searching, Running Dog returned to -the campsite empty-handed, but soon he saw his friend White Cloud riding -like the wind toward the camp. - -Slung over his horse’s neck was an object that flopped loosely back and -forth as he rose. Soon he was in the camp and swinging down from his -pony’s back he placed a plump young rabbit on the ground in front of -Running Dog and smiled, saying, “Here, little friend, is our dinner for -tonight.” - -Soon the fire was blazing, and the two boys settled down to a delicious -meal of roast rabbit. When they had finished their dinner they rolled up -in their blankets and were soon asleep. Tomorrow was going to be a long -day, for they were determined to track down some large game and make -their kill, for their supplies were running low and they must start the -return trip to the village the following afternoon. - -The night passed without incident and when the dawn broke it was raining -slightly. The two boys looked at the heavens frowning, but in about a -half hour the sky had cleared and the sun shone through again. - -The boys started off for the woodland and their big game hunt. They had -not gone very far when Running Dog glanced up toward the high rock -formations. He did not know what caused him to look in that direction, -but suddenly he stopped and called to White Cloud who had been riding a -little ahead, anxious to reach the woods. - -“Wait, White Cloud. Look, look to the north, beyond that formation of -rocks.” - -White Cloud turned and gazed in the direction Running Dog pointed. There -rising above the rock formation were puffs of smoke. “Maybe it is the -campfire of another hunting party, Running Dog?” - -“No,” said Running Dog, “that is not campfire, those are Kiowa smoke -signals. I will try to make them out.” - -“Are you sure they are Kiowa smoke signals, Running Do?” - -“Oh yes, White Cloud, many moons ago my father taught me of the Kiowa -smoke signals. Though all tribes use this method the Kiowas have a -definite series of signals before their message. Look, White Cloud. See -that series of short puffs of smoke? That is peculiar only to the -Kiowas. Let me see if I can make out what they are sending.” - -The two boys sat astride their ponies watching the signals of smoke rise -in the distance. Running Dog studied the signals as diligently as he -could and seeking back into his memory for everything his father had -taught him about smoke signals. - -Then he turned to White Cloud, “Come, my friend, we must hurry. Those -signals are to a band of Kiowas to the south that we are here in their -hunting grounds and therefore have broken the law of the Kiowa and must -die. They are calling to this band to bring our scalps on their war -lances triumphantly to the village. We must hurry, White Cloud. There is -no telling how long that message has been playing in the sky. We did not -notice it until now but that does not mean that it has not been sent -before just now. We must ride to camp and take our other horse and start -for home.” - -The two boys wheeled their ponies about and sped back for the camp. They -entered the camp and quickly gathering their possessions together they -put them aboard the pack horse and climbing upon their own ponies they -started swiftly southward. They rode steadily for about an hour, and -then Running Dog pulled up his pony. - -“Wait, White Cloud, we are doing just what they wish us to do. We are -running and we have a long hard trip to make. Besides, that signal was -evidently for a band to the south of our camp. If we are not careful we -shall find that we have ridden right into a trap. Let us plan our trip -more carefully. First we must stay away from the main trails. We must -take to the foothills and work our way south that way. It will take us -longer, but there will be less chance of being ambushed, I believe, if -we stay away from the well-used main trails. The Kiowas are a very -tricky people and we would be in a trap before we knew it. They will be -sure to be covering the water holes for they know we must have water. As -far as I know there are but three between here and our village. How much -water do you have in your pouch?” - -“My pouch is about empty, Running Dog, but surely we will find water -elsewhere than at the three water holes.” - -“There is a good chance that we will, but I do not want to count on it. -After all, our hunters are the ones that are familiar with this land. We -are strangers here and not acquainted with the good and bad points. -Come, our horses have rested. We will leave the main trail now and -continue cross country. It is going to be a hard journey, White Cloud, -but we are racing death.” - -With that the two boys steered their ponies from the main trail and -began to travel in a southeasterly direction. Here there was no clear -trail, and they had only the uncanny sense of a homing pigeon to guide -them. They pushed their ponies easily for the first couple of hours, but -finally the steady pace began to tell and they had to come to a stop. - -They had entered a green valley and as they rode they noticed an -abundance of game. “Too bad that we are in a race,” remarked White -Cloud, “for here is a paradise of game.” Running Dog said nothing, and -the two boys brought their ponies to a stop. They stepped from their -ponies and rested, allowing the horses to crop grass. - -As they lay there, White Cloud glanced back in the direction from which -they had come. Again he could see the ominous puffs of smoke rising from -behind the small hills that separated them from the main band of Kiowas. - -After resting a short while and allowing their ponies to blow, they -mounted again and continued their gallop toward their village and -security. Night was approaching now and the boys were glad for they knew -that they could travel much more swiftly at night because it would be -cooler. Besides, they knew that the Kiowas would not attack unless they -were sure they could kill both the boys. - -They rode more swiftly now, and suddenly Running Dog’s pony whinnied -aloud and swerved to one side. Running Dog tried to pull him back but -the pony galloped off in a slightly different direction from the one in -which they had been traveling. Then Running Dog understood why, for -suddenly he heard the hoofs of his horse splashing. The horse had found -water. What a break! The boys threw themselves from their horses and lay -flat in the water. Suddenly Running Dog lifted himself from the water -and grasping White Cloud’s arm he said: - -“We are foolish. Suppose they are watching this water hole. We sit here -like two fat frogs waiting for the hook. Come quickly, we must leave -this place.” The two boys mounted once again and rode on. Suddenly the -pack horse stumbled and fell. The boys stopped their ponies and returned -to the side of the pack horse. “He will be all right,” said White Cloud, -“he is just winded.” - -“We must leave him,” said Running Dog. “We cannot wait for him to regain -his breath and his strength. We must ride.” - -Now the two boys could travel a little faster without the pack horse to -slow them down, although they hated the thought of leaving a pony for -the blood-thirsty Kiowas. Finally they brought their ponies to a halt -and dismounted. - -“We must rest several hours or our ponies will die underneath us. Try to -sleep, White Cloud. I will stand guard. I will wake you in a short time -and then I will sleep. Do not worry, I am tired, but my eyes and ears -are sharp.” - -White Cloud was exhausted and in a matter of seconds he was asleep. -Running Dog kept careful watch and a short time later he wakened White -Cloud. Then Running Dog slept and shortly just as dawn was breaking -White Cloud shook his friend and the two thrust some dried venison into -their mouths to chew and each one taking a long drink of water they -mounted and were soon on their way once again. - -They had been riding for about an hour when Running Dog glanced back in -the direction they had just come and there on a hillside a few miles -back he saw a small band of Kiowas. They were evidently looking for -something or someone. - -It was not a puzzle to Running Dog long, for he saw the band of Kiowas -break from the hillside in their direction. “They have seen us, White -Cloud! Ride as you have never ridden before. We are near to our land, -but it is still a hard ride and the worst is yet to come. I cannot be -sure if that is a band that is pursuing us or whether it is the band -from the south. In any case, we must keep going. Ride, White Cloud, ride -for your life.” - -The two ponies thundered on. Soon they had entered a series of hills. -The second day was fast drawing to a close. Then it happened. - -White Cloud’s pony caught his foot in a gopher hole, and down went pony -and rider. - -Running Dog pulled his pony to a halt and rode back to where his friend -had fallen. Both boy and pony were down. The pony had evidently a broken -leg and White Cloud had hit his head upon a stone and was unconscious. -Running Dog took his knife and put the horse out of his misery and then -he dragged his friend to the shelter of a rock and poured some water on -his face. Soon White Cloud shook his head. - -“What happened?” - -“Your horse stumbled. I have had to use my knife on him, his leg was -broken. But how do you feel?” - -“Oh, I am a little dizzy and very tired. But go, Running Dog, you must -ride to the village for help.” - -“Yes, White Cloud, I must do that, but I am lost. I do not know where we -are and the sky is black tonight. We must stay here until dawn. My pony -is all done in anyway. He would not get very far tonight. We will rest. -I will stand guard first.” - -With that, Running Dog moved off to a small crevice of rock and settled -down to keep watch. But the grind had been too much even for him, and -before too long his head hung low upon his chest and both boys slept. - -Suddenly Running Dog woke with a start, hands of steel were holding his -arms and legs, pinning him where he sat. He struggled and then he heard -a familiar voice, “Why do you struggle so hard, my son?” - -“Father, it is you. Oh father, I am so glad to see you. But tell me, how -did you find us?” - -“Well,” said Running Dog’s father, “we too have eyes and saw the Kiowa -signals while off gathering some horses that had strayed. We rode to -meet the invader, for we knew that they would have come far into Apache -territory to catch those that they pursued. So we rode to attack the -band. We were able to defeat them and send them running for their homes, -but before that we were able to learn from one of their dying braves -that you, their quarry, had ridden in this direction. - -“I am sorry we were holding you when you awoke but you are mighty fast -with the knife and I did not want to take the chance of being killed by -my own son.” - -They laughed and then the party returned without further incident to the -safety of their village. - - * * * * * * * * - -“Here my story ends,” said Running Dog, “but I shall long remember the -events of that Race with Death.” - - - - - THE STORM - - -In the Algonquin tribe, Masequah had grown to manhood through the many -winters and summers that his tribe lived in peace. He was a very tall, -strong and good-looking Indian brave. He was bravest of all in battle, a -good hunter, and a good husband to his wife, Senan, and their son, Pyan. -Masequah was very proud of his son. As the baby grew, his mother no -longer had to carry him upon her back. Soon Masequah was able to walk -hand in hand with Pyan through the forest. - -As his son grew older, Masequah began to train him for manhood. One day -Masequah and Pyan stepped into a canoe and paddled across the wide lake -to look for berries and nuts. Pyan was now seven years of age, and his -training had begun in earnest. While they were on the other shore, a -great storm arose, and the wind brought huge angry waves to the lake. -Masequah feared that their light canoe would be broken by the waves. He -told Pyan that it would be much safer to stay where they were until -morning. - -They found a small cove that would give them some shelter. Then they -started hunting for food, while the rain beat down on them. Pyan spotted -two rabbits, and his father shot both of them. Then they went back to -the cove, found dry wood, and built a fire to cook the rabbits. Masequah -and Pyan settled themselves as comfortably as they could for the long -night. - -The winds began to blow even harder and the rain began to fall more -heavily. Pyan snuggled closer to his father’s side to keep warm. As the -warrior looked at his son, he saw fear in his son’s eyes. Masequah had -taught his son that Indians were never afraid, but suddenly he realized -that lessons were not enough. Even an Indian needed to understand the -thing he feared in order to drive fear away. - -“Don’t be afraid, Pyan,” he said kindly. “The rain that falls around us -brings strength to food we have planted and to the trees in the forest. -At the worst, it can only wet us. We are too wise to battle the wind on -the lake. The bright bolts of lightning could not strike us here easily -in this cove, and the thunder is only a loud noise like a war drum. -There is nothing to fear.” - -As Masequah watched his son’s face in the flickering light of the fire, -he knew that his words had been of little comfort. “I want to go home,” -said Pyan, “I want my mother and the warmth of my bed. I am afraid.” - -“Don’t be afraid, Pyan,” Masequah said, “your father is with you.” - -“Can you stop the lightning?” asked Pyan. “Can you stop the rain? That -will stop my fear. The wind that is blowing so strong frightens me.” - -Masequah picked up his son and carried him to the shelter of a cave and -after placing his son in the cave he said, “Wait, I shall return. I must -get an answer to your questions.” Masequah walked to the edge of the -lake and, facing straight into the wind, shouted, “O great storm, tell -me what answers I should give my son! He is afraid and I have told him -not to be afraid. The wind, the lightning, and the rain frighten him and -he wants to return to his home. To try to paddle our light canoe across -the rough waters of the lake could mean death for my son and me. I am -not afraid to die, but my son is young and his whole life lies before -him. Tell me what I can do to stop his fear. He has asked me to stop the -rain and the wind. This I cannot do, but you, great storm, hear a -father’s plea and blow away from our land!” - -Masequah shivered, for the storm seemed to be getting worse. He turned -from the lake and walked back to the cave. Taking his son’s hand, he -said, “Pyan, come, follow your father. We are going home.” - -“But, father,” said Pyan, “the winds and the rain and the lightning have -not stopped. The water is rough and our canoe is light. We will be -drowned.” - -Pyan held back as his father took his hand. His father spoke kindly and -firmly: “Come, Pyan, do not be afraid. Your father will protect you.” - -As they reached the shore Pyan began to tremble and felt heartsick -because he was cowardly while his father was so brave. Pyan stepped into -the canoe and his father followed. Masequah pointed to the sky. - -“Look, Pyan, the sky is beginning to brighten. Now the storm will halt -long enough for us to reach the safety of our village.” - -There was a blinding flash of lightning and a loud clap of thunder. The -rain stopped suddenly, the winds died down, and the waves on the lake -became calm. Masequah pushed the canoe from the shore and paddled -swiftly across the lake. - -When they reached home, Pyan told his mother excitedly how the storm had -stopped when his father ordered it to halt. Pyan’s mother turned slowly -to Masequah. - -“My husband,” she said with wonder in her voice, “until just now as you -and Pyan arrived, the storm hasn’t paused once tonight.” - -For many years until Masequah’s death, the members of his tribe looked -upon Masequah as a brave gifted with mysterious powers. They would tell -of a hunting party that had reached the lake at the same time that -Masequah and Pyan had started for home; the hunters had been whipped by -the raging storm while they stood on a hill top overlooking the lake; -suddenly they had seen the storm stop and the lake below them grow calm; -and then they had watched a small canoe, with a man and a boy in it, -glide swiftly across the peaceful waters. To them it was a miracle, but -Masequah knew better. - -Masequah would always deny that he had any mysterious powers. Over and -over again, he would remind his friends that no storm covers all the -earth, and that every storm has its edges just as the lake does, or like -the shadow of a fleecy cloud on a sunny day. - -No matter how often he told them that the edge of the storm had moved -away from the lake, most of his friends still insisted that it was a -miracle. Even Pyan, who believed that his father was wise and truthful, -sometimes wondered. - - - This story was told to the author by Barney Mason, a Canadian Scout, - who had learned it from living descendants of the Algonquin Tribe. - - - - - 5. CHARACTER - - - - - SLEEPING BEAR MAKES A MISTAKE - - -The Montagnais village of the great Northern forest was large with many -fine wigwams. The village had been built in a meadow near a great lake, -and the smell of woodfires was always in the air, as the smoke curled -skyward from each wigwam. It was a busy time of year for the Montagnais -because winter would soon be upon them. Families were repairing their -homes and making new clothing for the winter months. - -It was on one of these busy days that Bald Eagle informed his family -that he believed they should build a new wigwam. So the work was -organized. First Bald Eagle selected a good place to build it. Then he -scratched lines on the ground to show where the frame would be set. -Having cut saplings and put them in place, bending the ends to make -arches for the roof, he bound them together with withes made from a -peeled basswood sapling about three fingers thick that bent very easily. -The making of these withes had fallen to Sleeping Bear, Bald Eagle’s -son. It is about this job that our story is concerned. - -When Sleeping Bear was asked to make the withes, he was proud. This was -the first time his father had ever asked him to do such an important -job. Dashing off into the forest, he came upon a young basswood sapling -about three fingers thick. Taking his knife from its beaded sheath, he -proceeded to cut the sapling. The flint blade of his knife did a very -neat job and he soon had the young sapling down and trimmed. - -Then Sleeping Bear set to work to strip the bark from the sapling. When -he had all the bark peeled away, he dashed home to show his father what -good work he had done. - -Bald Eagle smiled. “That is fine, my son, but now we must have the -withes to tie the ends of the frame together.” - -Sleeping Bear squatted upon the ground and began to cut thin strips from -the basswood. He worked very carefully until he had cut a very, very -thin strip from the sapling. Then he cut another and another, until he -had a good supply. Picking them all up, he walked to where his father -was working and proudly he said: - -“Here, father, are the strips you can use for withes.” - -Without looking up, Bald Eagle said, “That is fine, my son. How many -have you cut for me?” - -“I have cut about thirty,” said Sleeping Bear. - -Bald Eagle looked up. Reaching toward his son’s outstretched hands, he -grasped the basswood strips. - -“These will make very fine fishing lines, my son, but they are much too -thin for withes. You must make them thicker, so that they will hold the -frame in the position we want.” Handing the strips back to Sleeping -Bear, Bald Eagle smiled and continued to work upon the frame of the -wigwam. - -Sadly, Sleeping Bear turned and headed back into the forest to find more -basswood saplings. As he walked along, he was not thinking about the -basswood, but about how foolish he had felt when his father told him -that the strips he had cut were too thin. He kicked at the pebbles and -was very angry with himself. He did not realize that he had walked quite -a distance from the village, until suddenly it got very dark. - -Looking up, Sleeping Bear realized that he was close to the swamp area -and that he must have come quite a distance. Slowly, he turned and -started back along the trail looking to either side for basswood -saplings. Finally, he saw two or three set back in the forest a short -way. Leaving the trail, he reached the saplings and started to cut them -down and trim them. He had out two when there was a low growl behind -him. Turning, he saw a bear standing on his hind feet and testing the -air for scent with his snout. - -Sleeping Bear was suddenly very frightened. Crouching low to the ground, -he began to edge his way toward the path again. Soon he reached the -path. Then he began to run until he was safe in the camp once again. -Dashing up to his father he stood a minute catching his breath, and then -he blurted out the story of the bear. - -Bald Eagle put his arm around his son’s shoulders and said: - -“You see how much trouble can be brought on by one foolish mistake? If -you had watched your father carefully, you would have known how to make -a withe the right thickness. Because you were angry, you did not look -for basswood saplings close to home, but wandered deep into the forest -and almost became the dinner of brother bear. Rushing to escape the -bear, you left your basswood saplings behind. So the task of making -withes begins all over again. Be careful, my son, that when you do -something, you do it right, or if you make a mistake, you do not waste -time brooding over it. Better to accept it and go forth to do the job -better.” - -And so Sleeping Bear learned a great lesson that day. - - - - - THE LESSON OF THE ELM TREE - - -A small Cherokee lad by the name of White Eagle lived with his father -and mother on the shores of a large lake in the Appalachian Mountains. -He was a lad of about eleven years. His father, Great Eagle, was known -in the tribe as one of the bravest of warriors. In this Cherokee tribe -there was much talk of war with other tribes, and the tribe’s highest -honors and respect always went to the bravest and most daring warrior. - -Not many suns away lived another woodlands tribe, the Eries. This story -concerns a young captive from this Erie tribe and White Eagle, the -Cherokee boy. - -Very rarely did any tribe go so far afield in its hunting, but this one -winter food was very scarce for the Cherokees and they traveled quite a -distance north in search of additional game. They moved into the hunting -grounds of the Iroquois, quickly made their kills, and started for home. -On their way, they came upon an Erie boy whom Great Eagle decided to -bring home to his tepee as a brother to his son. - -The Cherokee tribe lived in a sentry-patrolled, fortified village. When -Little Frog, as the Erie lad was called, first saw the village, he was -frightened. He realized that he was near the entire tribe of fearful -Cherokees whose wars his father had often recounted to him. Great Eagle -sensed the boy’s fear and laid his hand gently on his shoulder. Great -Eagle took him to his home and introduced him to White Eagle. White -Eagle was pleased to have a boy of his own age to play with in his own -wigwam. That night there was much dancing and merry-making to celebrate -the successful hunting raid into the Iroquois lands. - -The following morning Great Eagle roused the boys to tell them that -today they would go in search of small game to improve their shooting -ability. Each boy was given a small amount of food, and they started off -for the forest with Great Eagle. Little Frog began to look upon Great -Eagle as his father and felt happy. His own father had been killed in an -early tribal raid. - -As they padded through the forest, they could hear the cry of wild birds -and every now and then the snapping of a twig. Great Eagle signaled with -his hand for the two youngsters to wait. Then he moved off to the side -to investigate the noise; but once again he returned to the trail, -indicating that the game they were after was not to be seen. - -When the sun had risen high in the heavens, Great Eagle decided they -would sit and rest and eat some food. As they were eating, Little Frog -asked White Eagle, “Do you often travel with your father?” White Eagle -replied, “Right now I am being trained by my father to become a great -warrior.” - -The Erie boy was very much impressed with this and thought of himself -how wonderful it would be if he had a father. White Eagle then asked -Little Frog, “Do you miss your village and your people?” “No,” Little -Frog replied, “because in my village I was not wanted by anyone. My -father had been killed in battle. My mother died of a great sickness and -I was cast out of my father’s wigwam by a new brave. I was made to work -for myself to get food and to live as best I could.” White Eagle -realized then how lucky he was to have such a fine warrior father as -Great Eagle. - -After drinking some water to wash down the dried deer meat, Great Eagle -arose and the boys stood up quickly, and they started forward. The brave -signaled the boys to follow him more softly now. Little Eagle noticed -that they were approaching a stream where beaver had built their dams -and homes. As they approached the stream, Great Eagle pointed to the -brush where the boys should wait while he looked about for the beaver. -Not having seen any, Great Eagle returned to where the boys were hidden -and told them they would start back to the village and search for wild -turkeys and rabbits. White Eagle felt a slight disappointment at not -having been able to try out his new arrows on the beaver, but he trusted -the wisdom of his father. So he and Little Frog returned along the trail -with Great Eagle. - -When they had almost reached the edge of the forest, Great Eagle stopped -and pointed into the brush at the side of the trail. There, crouching in -hiding, was a small cotton-tail rabbit. Quickly, White Eagle raised his -bow and let fly an arrow. The rabbit took one leap and fell dead. White -Eagle was so excited that he danced up and down, shouting at the top of -his lungs that he had made his kill. Great Eagle quieted his son and -then looked slowly in Little Frog’s direction. Approaching the rabbit, -Great Eagle noticed that two arrows had struck it. He knew that Little -Frog must have shot his arrow at the same time as White Eagle. White -Eagle and Little Frog began to argue about whose arrow had really killed -the rabbit. Naturally, each claimed that his arrow had made the kill. - -Great Eagle was at a loss as to just what to do. He was always fair in -his decisions and did not want to favor one boy over the other, -especially because it involved his son. So Great Eagle said, “Let us -agree; say that each of your arrows shared in killing the rabbit, for I -can see that you are both like stubborn elm trees—and you are both -better with your bows than I had thought.” - -With that, Great Eagle picked up the rabbit and put it in his pouch and -the three of them started for home. Both boys seemed quite happy now -that Great Eagle had made the decision. However, that night Little Frog -leaned over in his bed and tapped White Eagle’s shoulder. “White Eagle,” -he said, “what does your father mean when he says we are like the -stubborn elm?” “Tomorrow morning,” said White Eagle, “I will show you -what my father meant.” With that the boys went to sleep. - -The following morning when they arose, Little Frog was impatient to -learn why Great Eagle had called them stubborn like the elm, and he -quickly reminded White Eagle of his promise of the night before. Hand in -hand, they started for the great forest. As they went along, White Eagle -kept breaking branches of the different trees along the way. Little Frog -was imitating White Eagle as they walked until they came upon a small -young elm tree. White Eagle did his best to break the elm tree, but all -it did was bend. Then Little Frog tried to help him break the tree; but -despite their weight and strength, it still only bent. - -Just then they heard a voice behind them and Great Eagle stepped up and -placed his hands on the shoulders of both boys. - -“Now,” he said, “you have found the reason why I called you stubborn as -the elm. Many, many of the trees of the forest can be broken and forced -to the earth. But the elm tree will bend and not break unless the -strength of several braves is put upon it. So it is with two proud young -Indian boys who both believe they are right, putting their equal -strength against each other in an argument. Neither gives way, just as -the elm will not give away. If I attempted to add my strength on either -side of the argument, the other might have bent to the earth like the -elm if we all put our weight upon it. So remember this tree. As long as -you believe honestly that you are right, you can be strong and straight -like the elm tree; but once you leave the path of truth and wisdom you -become weak and brittle, and your enemy can bow you to the ground in -shame and defeat.” - - - This story was told to the author by James Ariga, a boy of part - Cherokee blood, at the Ten Mile River Scout Reservation in the year - 1947. - - - - - THE RACE - - -Winter had come to the many Indian villages in the northeastern -woodlands, and with it, the snow, the wind, and the cold. The winter was -so severe that even the strongest braves hesitated to wander far from -their villages, knowing that death could overtake an adventurous brave -if a sudden blizzard should catch him far from familiar ground. - -This story is about two such adventurous young Oneida Indians that -winter. Naltan and Ceysoda were outstanding young boys of their tribe. -Time and time again before winter set in, they had taken part in the -games and contests of the tribe, and one or the other had won each time. -This had continued until the other young boys in the village decided -that Naltan and Ceysoda were just too good for them, and that something -must be done to prevent their running away with all the prizes. - -So one fall day, when they were sure that Ceysoda and Naltan were not -around, all the youngsters gathered to discuss a plan. On the following -day, there were to be foot races in the village. The group plotted that -at the start of the foot race, two of the faster young braves would trip -Naltan and Ceysoda so that they would fall and thus be put out of the -race. The boys who had tripped them would be scored out of the race, -too, but at least they would have the satisfaction of knowing that -someone besides Naltan and Ceysoda would win the foot race for a change. - -Just at that moment they saw Naltan coming around one of the wigwams, -and they all started walking away in different directions. Naltan walked -up to one of the leaders of the group and asked: - -“What have I missed, friend Beartooth? Ceysoda and I have been busy -repairing and sharpening our hunting weapons. We did not know that there -was to be a meeting of all the boys of the village.” - -Beartooth was quick to recover from his surprise and then in a very calm -voice said: - -“Oh, Naltan, that was no meeting of all the boys. It was merely a few of -us talking about the foot races tomorrow and the weather. It has been -very cold, and soon winter will be here with her snow and winds and -bitter cold. Tomorrow we are going to have the foot races. So we were -talking about who we thought would be victorious.” - -“Do you think there are any among you who can defeat Ceysoda and me in -the foot race, Beartooth? If you do, you had better forget about it,” -Naltan boasted. “Ceysoda and I will win the race tomorrow, as we always -do.” - -“We shall see,” said Beartooth with a note of warning in his voice. “We -shall see.” Then he turned and walked away from Naltan toward his -father’s wigwam. - -Naltan shrugged his shoulders and, thinking no more about it, dashed off -to find Ceysoda. He looked all around the camp and finally found him -practicing with his bow and arrow a short distance from the village. -Naltan told him what Beartooth had said. Ceysoda was silent for a few -moments, thinking. - -“Naltan, my friend,” he said, “I have a strange feeling that our -brothers plot against us. I have no good reason for feeling this way, -but I can’t help it. For some reason our friends have planned a way to -make us lose the race. What it is and how I know I cannot tell you, but -the feeling is upon me.” - -“You are foolish, Ceysoda. The fact that we have won many contests and -games from our friends surely wouldn’t give them a reason to plot any -harm.” - -“I do not say that they want to harm us; but in some way they will try -to make sure we do not win the foot races tomorrow. Wait and see, -Naltan.” - -The two boys spoke no further and soon it was time to return to their -wigwams for the evening meal. When Naltan and his father had finished -eating, Naltan told his father that he would like to get his advice. So -father and son sat down by the blazing coals of the fire in the middle -of their wigwam. - -“Father,” Naltan began, “today Ceysoda told me that our friends were -planning some trick to make us lose in the foot race tomorrow. He also -said that he did not know why he had this feeling, but he did have it. -Surely, father, our friends would not try to harm us?” - -“No, my son, I do not believe that your friends would want to harm you, -but is there any reason that you would have to believe that what your -friend Ceysoda tells you might be true?” - -“No, father, there isn’t anything—yes, wait a minute! There might be. -Late this afternoon when Ceysoda and I had finished working on our bows, -I went down to Beartooth’s wigwam to borrow some thongs for my -moccasins. Just as I reached the small clearing near Beartooth’s home, I -saw almost all of our friends gathered together talking; but when they -saw me they scattered, each one heading for his own home. When I -questioned Beartooth about it, he said that they had been talking about -the coming winter and the foot races tomorrow, and had just finished -when I arrived.” - -“Well, do not worry about it, my son. Whoever is strongest and fastest -will win tomorrow. It will soon be time for bed. Go out and play for a -little while, but when your mother calls, come to bed, for you will need -your rest for the foot races.” With that Naltan’s father rose to leave. - -“You know, father, my thoughts became so confused when I saw the crowd -of boys that I forgot to ask Beartooth for the thongs. I will go down -now before he goes to sleep so that I may work a little more on my bow -tonight before I go to sleep.” - -Naltan left his home and walked quickly to Beartooth’s home. As he -neared Beartooth’s wigwam he heard voices. Beartooth was talking to one -of the other young braves. “Yes, that’s right,” he was saying, “make -sure that you are next to Naltan at the start of the race tomorrow. When -the signal is given, pretend to trip so that you will fall against -Naltan and tumble him to the ground. I will do the same to Ceysoda. Then -we can be sure that someone else will win the race.” - -Naltan decided that he did not need the extra thong that night, but -hurried to see his friend, Ceysoda. Reaching the wigwam where he lived, -he called until Ceysoda came to the entrance. - -“What do you want, Naltan? It is late and I am tired. I was just about -to go to bed.” - -“Ceysoda, I have discovered what our friends plan for us tomorrow.” -Naltan repeated what he had heard at Beartooth’s wigwam. When he had -finished, he waited to see how Ceysoda would take the news. He did not -have to wait long, for suddenly Ceysoda’s face took on an angry look. -“Those crawling mud worms,” he cried. “Have they become so jealous -because they cannot win at the games and contests that they have to use -trickery against us? I knew that the feeling I had was a true one. Now -we know exactly what they are going to do. But how can we prevent this -from happening tomorrow, Naltan?” - -“I have a plan,” said Naltan. “Tomorrow when we line up for the race we -will ask that the others be given a slight lead over us because we have -won so many races. We should be able to tell by what they say to that -whether or not they would still try to carry out such a plan.” - -“That is a very good idea, Naltan,” said Ceysoda, yawning. “Now I must -say goodnight, for I am tired, and we have some hard running ahead of us -tomorrow.” - -The boys said goodnight. Ceysoda turned back into his wigwam and Naltan -started to go home to his own bed. On the way, he wondered whether he -should tell his father what had happened. He decided to handle this in -his own way, without the help of any adults. - -The following day was very crisp and cool. Off to the northwest clouds -warned that a snowstorm might be building up. But everyone was too -excited to take much notice of anything besides the preparations going -on all around for the big foot race. Fathers and sons together made the -final inspection of the boys’ clothing for the big race. The boys’ -moccasins especially were looked over carefully for any weak spots where -the leather might break. A torn moccasin could mean lost time and a lost -race. - -At last, the call went up through the village for all who were entering -the race to gather at the starting line just outside the village on the -border of a great meadow. The young boys gathered, joined by their proud -fathers, each of whom hoped that his son would cross the finish line -first and win the beautiful bone-handled hunting knife which the tribe’s -medicine man had offered as the first prize. - -When all the contestants had gathered at the starting line, the warrior -in charge of the race began to give instructions. He called for the -attention of all the runners. At that moment, Ceysoda and Naltan stepped -forward and asked that they be allowed to start ten paces behind the -others so that this could be a more even race. There were many shouts -from the other boys that Ceysoda and Naltan were only boasting. They -said that they wanted the two boys to start with them. If Ceysoda and -Naltan won the race, all well and good! But if they had to start back -and lost the race then someone would always complain that it was not an -even race. The warrior in charge then made his decision. - -“I believe,” he said, “that Naltan and Ceysoda are being very fair. So -far they have won all foot races by a great margin. Now they offer to -start late in order to give every one of you a better chance to win. I -have no doubt that many of you have been practicing hard for this event, -but these two have been practicing just as hard. So it would be a very -unfair race unless I did give them a handicap to even up the chances for -you all.” - -Beartooth knew that if they argued against this ruling, suspicion might -be aroused. So he bade his friends be quiet and line up again for the -race. - -The course for the race this year had been chosen very carefully. The -boys were to run across the meadow and into the woods up the game trail -until they reached the blaze marked on a fallen birch. Then they were to -turn off the trail and head east until they came to the singing rock. -That, Naltan knew, was the rock from which water trickled during and -after a heavy rain, and made an unusual, almost tinkling sound. At the -rock the boys would turn south, break from the forest, cross the meadow, -and head for home. The first one to cross the finish line would be -declared the winner and receive the coveted hunting knife. - -The instructions were clear. The boys waited eagerly. When the warrior -had made sure that all were lined up correctly, he gave them the -starting signal. Instead of leaping forward, the racers began to mill -around. Then several boys broke from the group and started to run along -the course. Five young Indian braves, including Beartooth, Naltan, and -Ceysoda, could be seen lying on the ground. Naltan and Ceysoda leaped -quickly to their feet and began running. They had already lost a great -deal of valuable ground, but the desire to win this race now burned -especially bright in their hearts. They ran swiftly across the meadow in -pursuit of the fast-disappearing figures of the leading braves, while -others trailed behind them. - -As they reached the woods, they began to overtake the other boys one at -a time, because the running became harder as they got deeper into the -woods. There were rocks and branches to hinder their way, and the -footing was often unsure. As the two boys reached the blazed birch tree -they turned eastward and continued swiftly on their way. They soon -passed more of the young braves. As they reached the singing rock and -turned for home only two boys were still between them and the finish -line. When they broke into the open and reached the meadow, the gap -between the boys narrowed rapidly, and they were greeted by cheers. It -was clear to all that Naltan and Ceysoda would overtake the two leaders. -The cheering grew louder when, with a sudden burst of speed, Naltan and -Ceysoda passed them and sped across the finish line at exactly the same -moment. They were declared winners in a tied race, and each was given a -beautiful knife. - -After the award was made, Naltan looked around for Beartooth, but could -not find him. On the way home, Naltan asked his father if he had seen -Beartooth. - -“Why, my son,” his father said, “he was standing close to me as you and -Ceysoda broke from the woods into the meadow on the last part of the -race. Then he disappeared. Why are you so concerned. When you had picked -yourself up from the ground and started after the other boys, the -warrior in charge of the race spoke to Beartooth. Beartooth confessed -his plan which, it seems, did not work out successfully. He will be -punished for his plot. There is no need for you to be worried.” - -“But I am worried, father, for there is no need to punish Beartooth. -What he did was wrong, but I am sure he is sorry. And after all, no harm -was done. I will go to him and speak with him and show him that I am not -angry. Then I will talk to the warrior who started the race?” - -Naltan left his father and went to Beartooth’s house. He called to his -friend but there was no answer. When he called again, Beartooth’s mother -came out of the wigwam and told him that her son had not returned from -the foot race. - -“But all the contestants have finished in the race and are home by now. -Where could Beartooth have gone? I will look for him.” - -Naltan left to find Ceysoda, who was showing his beautiful knife proudly -to his many friends. - -“Ceysoda,” Naltan called as he drew near. “Come, I must talk with you.” -When he finished telling Ceysoda about Beartooth’s not returning home, -the two boys went in search of him. They looked all through the village -but could not find him anywhere. They asked all the children but they -had not seen him. Finally, they found the boy to whom Beartooth had -spoken about the plot and who was to have helped him. At first the boy -denied knowing anything about where Beartooth might be; but finally -after continued questioning from Naltan, the boy told them. - -“Beartooth was afraid when the warrior at the racing field told him that -he would have to be punished. So while everyone was milling around and -shouting at the end of the race, he stole off and ran into the wood. He -feared not only the punishment of the warrior and council, but also the -punishment that you and Ceysoda would bring down upon him for playing -such a trick.” - -While they were talking, a few snowflakes began to fall. - -“Come,” said Naltan, “we must go after him quickly. From the looks of -the sky and this snow, there will be a heavy storm. Beartooth has had -little experience with snow. His days alone in the forest have been few. -If we do not go after him, he may be lost in the storm and threatened by -the wild animals of the forest.” - -“I cannot go,” the boy answered. “My father would not allow it. Besides, -how would we know where to look?” - -The boys stepped back and stared at the boy. “You are a coward,” Naltan -said angrily. “I cannot waste time arguing with you. Come, Ceysoda, we -must leave immediately.” - -Without further words, the two friends turned and started for the -forest. The snow was beginning to fall faster and thicker now. As they -reached the forest, they stopped to choose the most likely trail that -Beartooth would follow. The race had tired Ceysoda, and he was breathing -heavily now. - -“Wait, Naltan,” he pleaded. “The boy was right. How would we know which -direction Beartooth would take? Besides, at the rate this snow is -falling any trace of him would be covered. Is it wise to go on?” - -“Wise or not, Ceysoda, we must go on. Beartooth must be found. Not -knowing the forest too well, he would probably travel the main trail -toward the north. We will go in that direction. If we hurry, we may be -able to pick up a sign of his route before the snow has a chance to -cover it completely, and reach him before he goes too far.” - -The boys spoke no further but hurried up the trail to the north, keeping -their eyes toward the ground to look for signs of the boy’s having -passed that way. Soon Naltan stopped and pointed to a place in the trail -where the snow had been disturbed. - -“He must have fallen here. See the way the snow has been pushed aside. -Come, quickly, Ceysoda, he cannot be too far ahead.” The two boys -continued swiftly on the trail. Soon they were able to make out signs of -fresh moccasin prints in the snow. But just when they felt they were -getting close, the wind began to blow harder, sweeping along the trail -and covering any tracks or other signs that they might have found. The -boys had been traveling at a fast pace for some time, when Ceysoda -stopped suddenly. - -“Wait, Naltan, I must rest,” he said. “I am tired. I cannot go on -without rest. Just for a moment let me catch my breath. Surely Beartooth -will not continue without rest, too, and we will lose no ground by -stopping for a short while.” - -“All right,” said Naltan, “but just for a moment. The day is growing -late.” The two boys squatted down by the side of the trail and breathed -deeply to get their wind back again. Suddenly, Nathan gazed up through -the trees and then, stretching his hands out in front of him, he said, -“Ceysoda, my friend, look! It has stopped snowing. We are in luck. But -we must hurry even so, because the storm will no longer slow Beartooth’s -pace.” - -The two boys rose and sped on up the trail. Truly they were in luck, for -soon they came upon a place in the snow where someone had stopped to -rest at the side of the trail. The prints of small moccasins were plain -in the snow and led straight up the trail. Now the boys increased their -efforts, for they knew they must be close. Suddenly, the tracks stopped -and turned off the trail into the thick woods. This puzzled Naltan, but -he turned to follow them. The two boys began finding the going a little -rougher. Suddenly, they found that they not only were following moccasin -tracks, but another set of tracks now appeared not far behind the boy’s. -These were the tracks of a bear! - -The bear, Naltan thought, must have been late in going into hibernation -for the winter because he had not found enough food. Now a delicious -morsel of warm-blooded food was on the trail ahead of him. Now Naltan -understood why Beartooth had left the trail; he must have seen the bear -ahead on the trail and turned off to escape him. But the hear was not -going to be avoided so easily. Naltan suddenly stopped and turned to -Ceysoda. - -“What shall we do if we do come upon the bear and Beartooth?” he asked. -“We are not armed with our bows and arrows. We could hardly defend -ourselves against such a worthy opponent as a bear. Two young Indians -such as we, no matter how brave, would be easy prey for a large bear. -Yet we must go on and see if there is any help we can give. To turn back -now would certainly mark us as cowards.” - -Ceysoda did not like the idea of fighting a full-grown bear; yet he -liked less the thought of turning his back on danger and returning to -the village to meet his friends’ ridicule and his father’s anger for -having been so cowardly. They would have trouble enough as it was, for -having left the village without letting their parents or friends know -where they had gone. Naltan’s voice swung his thoughts back to his -present plight. - -“I have an idea, Ceysoda. Between us we have two knives. Let us cut a -couple of stout saplings to use as spears if we should need them. At -least we will have some chance, even if it is not a very good one, -against the bear.” - -So the two boys immediately began cutting stout saplings to hack into -crude spears—poor weapons against an angry bear, but the best the boys -could think of at the moment. When they sharpened the points on their -spears, they continued following the very clear trail in the snow. They -did not travel as fast now because they sensed a danger lurking ahead of -them. They did not know just how far ahead the bear was, whether he was -still following Beartooth, or whether he had discovered them. In fact, -at this very moment, he might be awaiting them, hidden among the rocks -up ahead, which they could plainly see now as they watched the forest in -front of them cautiously while following the tracks carefully in the -snow. - -They were continuing their anxious march in silence when they were -startled by a sound that echoed through the forest, a sound all too -familiar to them—the growl of an angry bear. It had come from in front -and to the right of them. So the boys went on with even more caution. -Suddenly, Naltan signaled to Ceysoda and the two boys crouched low to -the ground. Ahead of them, about a hundred paces, the natural trail they -had been following came to an end in a boxlike formation of rocks. The -rocks reached almost straight up to the height of an elm tree. On top of -this enclosure stood the bear and about ten feet below him on a ledge -sticking out from the rocks was Beartooth. Behind the bear the boys -noticed that the rocks continued to rise and they figured that they had -come upon almost a dead end. Beartooth, Naltan figured, had reached the -dead end and panic-stricken because of the bear, had either fallen or -jumped to the ledge. For the moment he was safe, for the bear did not -want to chance jumping to the ledge and there was no way that he could -climb down. Suddenly he turned to the side and calmly walked around and -down beside the wall until he was once again on the forest floor. He -trotted to a spot directly beneath where the boy lay and studied the -situation, trying to figure a way to get at this thing that had invaded -the privacy of his forest at a time when he had been almost mad with -hunger. - -The wind was blowing into the faces of the boys so they knew for the -time being they were safe because the bear could not smell them, but if -the wind should shift they would then be in trouble, for the bear would -turn his attention to them. This also gave them time to think and work -out a plan. Suddenly Ceysoda touched Naltan’s shoulder. - -“My brother,” he said, “he moved. Beartooth moved; he is alive. We must -do something.” “Yes,” said Naltan, “for in his present situation he -might fall from the ledge and then it would be all over. If we can -somehow drive the bear off, we could then rescue Beartooth and return to -the village.” - -“That is a good idea, Naltan, but tell me, friend, how do we get -Beartooth off the ledge once we have chased the bear away, if we can -chase him away?” - -This was a serious problem, for the boys had nothing they could use as a -rope and, besides, Naltan could for the moment think of no way to get -rid of the bear. - -Just then the boys noticed Beartooth moving again, but this time he -rolled even closer to the ledge. Without thinking, Ceysoda stood -straight up and shouted at Beartooth. “Look out, Beartooth, you are -right at the edge of the ledge. Look out, you will fall.” - -Then Ceysoda realized what he had done, and he stood frozen as the bear -turned and raising himself on his hind legs, emitting a terrible growl, -started for the boys. Ceysoda’s shouts had roused Beartooth and he -worked his way back from the edge of the ledge close to the wall and -safety. Meanwhile the bear was increasing his speed toward the two boys. -The boys stood almost frozen with fear, but suddenly they were able to -shake off the paralysis that had gripped them, and both boys drew their -rustic spears in front of them to await the charge of the bear who was -coming ever closer. - -Naltan stepped slightly in front of Ceysoda in order to take the brunt -of the attack, but Ceysoda would have none of it and edged up right next -to Naltan. By this time the bear was almost upon them and with a -terrifying snarl came rushing the last few yards. - -Naltan and Ceysoda, with the ends of the spears jammed into the ground -held fast as the bear rushed right into the sharp points. The bear -stopped in his tracks as if suddenly he had forgotten something and then -with an agonizing snarl fell over dead, the two spears protruding from -his body. Immediately Naltan and Ceysoda ran forward to the base of the -ledge. Climbing to the top above Beartooth, the boys cut a long stout -staff and lowered the end to Beartooth who grasped it and was pulled to -safety. Then swiftly the three boys started for the village. On the way, -each in turn told their story. - -First Beartooth told of how he had run away and how he had been chased -to the top of the rock formation by the bear and, in trying to avoid -him, had fallen. The two boys told how they had followed Beartooth to -bring him back and of their coming upon the bear and their narrow -escape. - -When they reached the warmth and security of their village again, Naltan -and Ceysoda went with Beartooth to his wigwam and there assured him that -they had no desire to punish him in any way for his trickery of that -morning. “What you did was wrong, but what has happened to you today we -firmly believe is punishment enough. Let us forget the incidents of this -day. We are still friends and friends we must remain, for only through -unity and friendship will we grow into strong good Oneida warriors.” - -Beartooth smiled and thanked his two friends, and he continued to smile -as Naltan and Ceysoda walked off arm in arm toward their homes and large -suppers that awaited the returning heroes. - - - - - LITTLE THUNDERBIRD TELLS THE TRUTH - - -The Blackfoot tribe was on the move. The buffalo had begun to search for -new pasture. So the tribe had packed all its tepees on the travois and -were moving to follow the herd. Their lives depended upon these prairie -beasts, and they did not dare to be too far from them. For two days the -herd moved until it found enough grass and water, and then it milled -around and started to graze. How long or how short a time they would -stay in this new place, no one knew; but here the tribe must make its -camp until the buffalo forced them to move again. - -As soon as his family’s tepee was set up, Little Thunderbird wandered -off in search of some excitement. He was a Blackfoot lad who seemed to -be able to get into trouble no matter where he was—like the day he cut -the string on his father’s bow, or the day he burned a hole in his -mother’s new dress. These are only samples of the kinds of mischief -Thunderbird got himself into. So today he planned to stay far from his -home until mealtime and in that way keep out of trouble. - -Skipping through the village, he saw some of his friends throwing stones -to see who could throw the farthest, and he ran up to them to ask if he -could play. His friends told him to get in line and wait his turn. Soon -he was throwing stones along with the other children. After they had -played this game for a while, the children decided to play Follow the -Leader. There was a great deal of talk about who would be leader for the -game. Finally, one of the older boys was chosen, and he led off by -dodging through a rack of drying buffalo meat. - -After everyone had run through the rack, the leader headed for the -strings of ponies which were picketed out on the edge of the village. -Here he ducked under the lines of many ponies that reared and whinnied -from fright as the shouting youths leaped past them one after another. -This kept on until one of the braves who was guarding the ponies chased -the boys back into the village. The leader ran over boulders, danced -between tepees, and did many other stunts which each boy repeated until -finally the leader sat down, tired out. All the other boys admitted they -were tired, too, and the group sat around talking about their fathers’ -great deeds. - -Soon it was Little Thunderbird’s turn and he stood and walked to the -center of the circle, the way the big braves did in council. Then he -raised his hands for silence from the group. - -“My father is the greatest of Blackfoot warriors,” Thunderbird began. -“One day, while he was out on a hunt with some other braves of the -tribe, he spotted a mountain lion. They were high in the hills and they -had been looking for some ponies that had strayed from the herd. When my -father saw the mountain lion, he spoke with the other braves and they -decided to kill the beast. As you know, the mountain lion preys upon our -pony herds. By killing this one, that would be one less lion to worry -about. My father looked around the circle of braves and asked who would -go with him to kill the lion. The braves talked a great deal and at last -two of them stepped forward and said that they would go. - -“Slowly the three men began the climb into the hills. The lion had seen -them coming and headed for higher ground. But finally he came to a solid -wall and could climb no farther. My father stepped forward and drew his -bow and shot an arrow toward the lion. He missed and the lion started -toward him, snarling. The other braves turned and ran for their lives. -There was no time to shoot another arrow, so my father drew his knife -and waited for the lion’s charge. - -“The beast leaped, and my father caught the lion on his knife. Again and -again, he plunged the knife into the lion. The fight ended quickly. The -lion lay dead at my father’s feet. My father had not even been -scratched. Dancing around his victim, my father cut the lion’s tail off -and placed it in his pouch. Then he caught up with the other braves -farther down the trail, and they continued on the hunt for the ponies. - -“After they found the ponies and brought them back to the village, my -father told the council of his brave fight and held the tail of the lion -on high for all to see. For his courage, he was allowed to wear another -feather in his headdress. Now he is really a brave worthy of honor from -all. But the two who deserted him were cowards and do not deserve to be -members of our tribe.” - -When Little Thunderbird had finished, he seated himself in the circle -once again. He was proud of the way the other boys listened to his story -and the way they talked of his father as a great brave. Little -Thunderbird enjoyed the attention he was getting, but in his heart he -was troubled. He had made up the whole story. There was no truth at all -in it. Then the test came. - -“Take us to see the lion’s tail, Little Thunderbird,” one of the boys -said. “We want to see the lion’s tail.” And the rest of the boys took up -the cry. - -Now what was Little Thunderbird to do? But he decided to bluff it out -anyway. He led the boys to his father’s tepee. When they got there, he -searched hurriedly for something that looked like a lion’s tail. But he -could not find anything. The boys began to get angry. - -“You lied to us, Little Thunderbird,” one of them said. “Your father -never killed a lion, and he is not the greatest brave in the tribe!” - -The other boys agreed. They ran out, leaving Little Thunderbird standing -at the entrance to his father’s tepee. Suddenly, Little Thunderbird felt -very much alone. In the next few days, he began to feel even more lonely -because the other boys would not play with him or speak to him. This -went on, until one day Little Thunderbird refused to leave the tepee. -His mother asked him if he felt sick, and he told her he was “just a -little tired.” But Little Thunderbird’s mother knew that something must -be wrong and so she talked with her husband about it. - -“I know what is wrong, my dear wife. My friends have told me of Little -Thunderbird’s tale to the other boys one day about the brave deed of his -father, the greatest warrior the Blackfoot have ever known. When they -asked Little Thunderbird to prove the story, he could not. He had lied -to his friends and his conscience is punishing him.” - -“But can’t you help him?” the boy’s mother pleaded. - -“There is nothing I can do. Many moons ago I taught my son the strength -of truth. He does not have to lie now. If he is not proud of his father, -let him say so. I am not ashamed that I have not done something great -and have not done something very brave. I have done no more and no less -than most of the braves of the tribe. Surely I am not the greatest -warrior in the tribe, and I have never given Little Thunderbird any -reason to say that I am. The boys will not make fun of him if he tells -the truth. They know that their fathers are like me. The boys will -probably praise him if he admits that he lied.” - -Little Thunderbird lay just inside the tepee and had heard his father -speaking with his mother. Rising from his bed, he ran out of the tepee -and headed through the village to find his friends. His parents -understood and did not try to call him back. Finally, he found them, -once again seated in a council circle like the men of the tribe. When -they saw him coming, the tallest arose from his place and stopped Little -Thunderbird before he could reach the circle. - -“What is it you want here, teller of lies?” he asked angrily. “We do not -want you for a friend. Go from this place. There is none here that you -could call a friend.” - -“Wait, let me speak,” Little Thunderbird begged. “I have something -important to say and I want to be heard.” - -“All right, speak,” the tall lad said, “but be brief—and none of your -lies!” - -Little Thunderbird stepped to the center of the circle. He was about to -raise his arms for silence as he had done before, but he thought better -of it and waited until the boys were quiet once again. - -“The last time I stood before you I told you of my father’s brave deed -in fighting a mountain lion.” The boys began to laugh, but Little -Thunderbird went on. “I lied to you. My father is a brave man but he has -never had to fight a mountain lion. My father taught me to tell the -truth when I was very young. He trusted that I would, and I have broken -that trust. But I have learned my lesson. Lies can bring nothing but -hurt to the liar and to all who trust him. If we speak with a straight -tongue, our friends will believe in us and trust us. I ask you now to -trust me. I will never lie again. Your friendship means too much to me.” - -The tall boy rose from the circle. The other boys watched him closely to -see what he would do. Everyone was very quiet. - -“Here truly is a brave Blackfoot,” the tall boy said. “It took real -courage for Little Thunderbird to come before this council and admit he -was wrong.” He paused and looked at Little Thunderbird. “I offer you my -hand in friendship once again. Come, take your place in the council.” - -Little Thunderbird smiled and took his place. A short distance from the -circle, a tall brave smiled, too. Little Thunderbird’s father had been -sure to speak loudly so that his voice would be heard by the young boy -inside the tepee. - - - Based on an idea from a story told to the author by Mr. Walter - Elliott. - - - - - THE PRIZE NO ONE COULD SEE - - -The dawn came slowly as the sun tried to fight its way through the mist -that hung in the valleys. The spring had been cool, and for nearly a -moon rain had been drenching the ground. By midmorning, the sun had -burned away the haze, and its rays beat down upon the little Kickapoo -village, warming and drying everything that had been wet and cold for so -long. - -When Little Snapping Turtle walked from his father’s wigwam and saw the -bright sun and the blue skies, he called to his father who was still -inside. - -“Father, father, come here! See, the sun has won. The storm clouds have -run from the battle with the sun. Once again we have light and warmth. -Is this not a good reason for a celebration?” - -“Yes, my son, it is reason enough for you and your friends to celebrate. -But we should be glad for the rain we have had because it makes the -forest green and gives the streams new strength and makes the lakes rise -so that all the animals may drink. Of course, it has also kept the young -braves in their houses, so now that the sun is out again we should have -a celebration.” - -“What shall we do, father? Can we go on a hunt or a fishing trip? Can -we, father?” - -“No, my son, there is not time for that yet. Now that the sun is with us -again, there is much gardening to do right here in the village. But late -this afternoon we shall have a race to see who has lost the most speed -during this lazy vacation. Go to the other young braves in the tribe and -tell them that I, Big Snapping Turtle, Medicine Man of the Kickapoo -tribe, will give a fine belt and knife as a prize to the young brave who -wins the race this afternoon.” - -“What kind of a race will it be, father?” - -“Oh, it would not be fair to tell you, my young son, for then you would -have an advantage over the other young braves. Just spread the news and -this afternoon we will gather in the meadow for the race.” - -Eagerly Little Snapping Turtle ran to tell all the young boys to gather -in the meadow north of the village late in the afternoon for a race. He -also told them about the prize that any young brave would want. Most of -the boys he talked to were working hard in the gardens to make up for -time lost during the rain. But they stopped long enough to listen -excitedly to the news Little Snapping Turtle brought. All of them said -they would be there, and then went back to work. The rain had been good -for the seed, but it had also been good for the weeds. When Little -Snapping Turtle got back home, he went to work cheerfully with his -father in their garden to clear out the weeds. - -Finally the time neared for the big contest, and the young boys began to -gather in the meadow. Soon every boy in the village was present, and Big -Snapping Turtle stepped to the front to explain the rules. - -He first gave each boy a small container made of birch bark. After this -had been done, Big Snapping Turtle signaled for all to be quiet. - -“A quarter of a mile from here there are several small lakes,” he said. -“In one of those lakes, as you know, there are some very small fish. -Each of you has a container. At the signal you will run to that lake and -trap a small fish. Making sure to keep the fish in the container, you -will run back to the meadow. The first boy to return with a fish still -alive in the container will win the race. Then after the prize has been -awarded, we will put all the fish you caught into the stream that runs -through our village so that they can swim to the great lake to the -south.” - -The boys waited impatiently for the signal. When it was given, they -shouted and laughed as they raced toward the lake that held the small -fish. Little Snapping Turtle soon was far ahead of the other young boys. -When he reached the lake shore, he waded knee deep into the lake and -placed his container halfway under and then stood perfectly still, -waiting for the curious little fish to swim into the trap. - -As he stood there quietly, peering at the sandy bottom, several of the -others arrived and began to follow his lead. Soon there were fifteen or -twenty of them spread out near the shore standing motionless waiting for -the fish. Now and then a boy would shout that he had made a catch only -to find that the fish had escaped. - -Finally patience rewarded Little Snapping Turtle. With a flick of his -wrist, Little Snapping Turtle scooped his container into the water. When -he looked into it, he discovered that he had trapped two fish instead of -one. Quickly he waded toward shore and he saw that two boys had also -trapped their fish and were on the way back to the meadow. He stopped -only a moment to tear a large leaf from a plant that grew along the lake -shore. Then he wrapped it tightly over the mouth of the container and -started running again. - -The two boys were running swiftly ahead of him along the trail, each -with a container in his hand. Suddenly, one of the boys slipped and fell -and his container and fish went flying off into the brush. Now only one -boy, Crying Hawk, stood between Little Snapping Turtle and victory. -Using all the strength he had, he began to catch up with the young boy -ahead of him. - -As he began to pass Crying Hawk, he noticed that the boy was limping. -Looking at the boy’s feet, he saw that Crying Hawk’s moccasins were -loose, and he guessed that a pebble must have fallen into one of them. -The boy stopped to take the pebble out. As he did, Little Snapping -Turtle sped by him. Turning to look at Crying Hawk, Little Snapping -Turtle found that the boy had just sat down and was crying. He stopped -and went back to him. - -“What is the trouble, Crying Hawk?” Little Snapping Turtle asked kindly. - -“I thought that for once I could win a game and own a new knife and -belt. But a pebble has cut my foot, and I cannot hope to win now. I was -lucky enough to catch my fish first and I thought that I had a good head -start. But as it always has happened, an accident will make me lose the -race. I will never be a winner. Don’t wait for me, Little Snapping -Turtle. If you stay with me any longer, the other boys will catch up -with you.” - -Then Little Snapping Turtle remembered that Crying Hawk had never won -any contest. He was a little slower than the other boys, and not so -skilled as many of them. He, Little Snapping Turtle, had won many -contests and many prizes. Quickly he took off his own new doeskin -moccasins and slipped them onto Crying Hawk’s feet. - -“These will protect your feet,” he told Crying Hawk. “Run quickly now, -for you still have a chance. Take my container, too. I have sealed a -leaf tightly over the top and little water will spill. Today you will -win the race.” - -Crying Hawk started to complain, but Little Snapping Turtle silenced -him. He pulled the other boy to his feet and, shoving the container into -his hand, sent him on his way. With the new moccasins, the boy ran more -easily and soon was out of sight. Little Snapping Turtle picked up -Crying Hawk’s container and put his feet into the ill-fitting moccasins. -He trotted slowly after Crying Hawk, keeping just far enough behind to -make sure the boy would win. - -He heard several pairs of feet moving swiftly along the trail just in -back of him. From here to the meadow, the trail narrowed and only one -boy could use it at one time. So Little Snapping Turtle kept his slow -pace and kept the others from passing Crying Hawk. Little Snapping -Turtle could see the clearing now and he sped toward the meadow. There -he saw Crying Hawk standing proudly next to Little Snapping Turtle’s -father. He ran up to Crying Hawk. - -“Say nothing of what happened on the trail,” he whispered. “You have run -a good race, Crying Hawk.” - -Soon all the boys were back and the inspection of the containers began. -When Big Snapping Turtle had seen all of them, he stepped to the front -and declared Crying Hawk the winner. Everyone cheered as the boy -received the knife and belt from the smiling Medicine Man. Then they all -started back toward the village to place the fish in the stream and then -go home. - -As Little Snapping Turtle and his father walked along the trail, the -Medicine Man asked, “Where did you get that container, my son?” - -Little Snapping Turtle blushed as he looked up at his father, but his -father smiled. “It is well, my son. I knew each container that I had -given out and at the end of the race you did not have the one you had -started with. I also noticed the beautiful moccasins that Crying Hawk -was wearing. I discovered, too, how big my son’s heart really is. Today -you lost a race, but the happiness you won is the best possible prize.” - - - - - THE MYSTERIOUS PONY RAIDERS - - -Among the American Indians truth was respected as most sacred. Parents -took great pains to teach their children that above all else, a good -Indian was one who had honor and spoke nothing but the truth, or, as the -Indians would say, spoke with a straight tongue. It is about the power -of truth that this story is told. - -The Blackfoot Indians were a wandering tribe of the Western plains. -Their very lives depended upon the great buffalo herds. From the buffalo -meat and hides, the Blackfeet were able to get their food, skins for -clothing, and their tepees; and from the head, horns, and tail, -decorations for costume and headdress. - -Blackfoot villages were always moving, since they were set up near the -grazing herds of buffalo. When the herd moved, the whole tribe would tie -its belongings onto travois drawn by horses, and move with the buffalo -until the animals stopped once again to graze where there was more -prairie grass. - -Young Deerfoot, the son of a great warrior of the Blackfeet, Sleeping -Bear, prided himself on being one of the strongest of the tribe’s young -braves. While growing into young manhood, he had won many honors in his -tribe as a warrior and a great hunter. Blind Dog was another young brave -about Deerfoot’s age. The son of Black Dog, he also had become quite -famous among the Blackfeet for his honors in war and hunting. - -Both young braves were guarding the tribe’s horses, one very warm summer -evening as the chiefs of the Blackfeet were gathered in the center of -the village around the blazing campfires. The chiefs had met to talk of -tribal problems and to plan ahead for fall and winter. At this time, -life had been unusually peaceful on the plains. There had been some -horse stealing and a few occasional skirmishes among small parties of -raiders from different tribes. Outside of that, there had not been much -excitement. - -As the chiefs sat around the fire, Blind Dog and Deerfoot were taking -their job of standing guard over the horses very seriously. The quiet -was broken by a noise off to one side of the herd of horses. Deerfoot -signaled silently to Blind Dog to draw near so that they might speak. -When Blind Dog had reached Deerfoot’s side the two crouched low behind -the horses, and Deerfoot whispered that he had heard a noise slightly to -the west of the herd. - -The two braves crept forward on their hands and knees, keeping the -horses between themselves and whatever had made the noise. The horses -began moving uneasily as the two young braves drew closer to the spot -from which the noise had come. - -Deerfoot stopped abruptly. He slapped Blind Dog’s shoulder and began to -laugh. Not two paces from them was a small mongrel dog which had -wandered down among the horses seeking a cool place in which to lie and -rest for a while. When Blind Dog saw what had amused Deerfoot so much, -he laughed too, because they had been so alarmed by a dog. - -“If it were not so quiet tonight,” Deerfoot remarked, “we would not have -been so worried by anything so unimportant as a puppy.” - -“Yes,” Blind Dog agreed, “it has been much too quiet. We have not had -much excitement. Things have been far too peaceful.” - -“Do you wish to have a war on your hands, Blind Dog?” Deerfoot asked -with a smile. - -“Well, it would be a very welcome change from horse herd duty at night, -and repairing bridles and broken weapons in the daytime.” - -“You are getting restless, my friend.” Deerfoot spoke soberly now. “That -is not good. When one gets restless, one becomes careless. That can be -dangerous.” - -At first, Blind Dog refused to be serious. “Oh, do not worry, Deerfoot. -I may have become restless, but I will never become careless.” Then he -added gravely, “To become careless even for a moment might mean death to -a warrior like myself. There is many a brave in other tribes who would -love to see my scalp hanging from his tepee pole. But I like the feel of -my scalp right where it is. Anyway, nothing—not even a puppy—will ever -catch me off guard.” - -“Do not be so sure of yourself, Blind Dog. Being so sure can make any -brave careless. You must always be alert. It may seem too peaceful to us -here now, but even the quiet shadows of this very night could conceal -our enemies. As we sit here talking noisily about not being careless, -they could be stealing some of our best horses. Let us go back to our -guard posts so that we can watch the herd as we should.” - -Deerfoot and Blind Dog mounted their horses and had started to circle -the herd to see that nothing had disturbed the horses. When they had -finished checking and had dismounted, Blind Dog complained that he felt -ill. - -“Since we have just checked the herd and everything is all right,” -Deerfoot said, “why don’t you return to the village, Blind Dog, and go -to your tepee? It is almost time for the other guards to take our -places. I can stand guard alone for that short time.” - -Blind Dog said that he should not leave his friend, but with Deerfoot’s -urging, he finally agreed and walked slowly back toward the village. -Arriving at his tepee, he found that his father must still be at the -council meeting. The night air had become chilly and he wrapped himself -in a warm buffalo robe and curled up in the corner of the tepee. Blind -Dog was just about to fall off to sleep when he heard men shouting -excitedly and horses snorting and pounding their hoofs. He struggled out -of the robe and stepped outside of the tepee in time to see several -chieftains break from the council ring and head toward the horses. - -As they reached the edge of the herd, they called out for the guard but -there was no response. They called again and again, but their only -answer was the stomping of horses and the frightened neighing of ponies. -It was very dark and it was some time before the chieftains discovered -that about six of their finest animals were missing. Where were the -guards, they wondered, and how had the horses gotten loose? Then someone -noticed Blind Dog and called to him. - -“Blind Dog, were you not on watch with Deerfoot? What did you see? What -happened? Who raided our herd?” - -Blind Dog looked at Great Owl and his father, Black Dog, who stood -waiting for his answer. Just then they heard the clopping of a single -pony’s hoofs. Peering into the darkness, they could make out the figure -of a lone horseman riding wildly toward the standing group. As the rider -came nearer, Blind Dog saw that it was his friend. Deerfoot jumped from -his pony and stood, breathless and bleeding, before the chieftains, -waiting for silence so that he could report what had happened. When -everyone was quiet, Deerfoot began his story. For the moment, Blind Dog -was forgotten. - -“Blind Dog and I were on guard here at the horse herd,” Deerfoot said, -“when we heard a strange noise. We found that it was only a stray dog -that had wandered down here to the horse herd. We went back to our guard -posts and settled down again, keeping careful watch. - -“After some time had passed, I heard another noise much like the dog had -made so I did not pay any attention. Suddenly, the horses became uneasy. -When I went to see what the trouble was, I was struck a blow on the side -of my head. It was not too hard a blow and only made me a little dizzy. -As I shook off the shadows from my brain, I spotted a small group of -warriors who were cutting some of our best ponies loose from the herd. -Then I called for Blind Dog and started after the raiders. By the time I -had reached the place the raiders had been, they were already heading -back into the night, driving several of our ponies before them. I -quickly mounted a pony and started to chase the thieves, but I lost them -in the darkness. Perhaps I was closer to them than I realized because -they let some of the stolen ponies go. I have been able to round up some -of the ponies, but I believe there are still a few missing. I will mount -up again and start after them immediately.” - -But Chief Great Owl stopped Deerfoot with a wave of his hand and said, -“No, Deerfoot, let some of the other braves round them up. You are hurt -and need rest. But first we must speak with Blind Dog. Who has seen -Blind Dog?” - -Without any hesitation, Blind Dog stepped from the circle of braves and -stood next to Deerfoot. - -“You summoned me, Chief Great Owl?” he asked politely. - -“Blind Dog, were you on herd guard duty tonight with Deerfoot?” - -“Yes, Great Chief, I was.” - -“When Deerfoot called you to assist him, why did you not answer?” - -“Because I was not where I could hear Deerfoot.” - -“Where were you then?” - -“When Deerfoot called for help, I was in my tepee just about to go off -to sleep.” - -Great Owl glared at Blind Dog. “Do you mean that you had left your guard -post to sleep in your tepee, leaving Deerfoot here alone to watch the -herd?” - -Black Dog waited for his son to answer. “Speak, my son,” he pleaded. -“Tell Great Owl that you did not desert your friend and leave him alone -on duty.” - -“I am sorry, father, but what he says is true. I was not at my guard -post when the raiders came in the night. I did neglect my duty and for -that I shall take proper punishment.” - -“My son,” Black Dog said with great sorrow in his voice, “do you know -what you are saying? You are admitting that you have shirked your duty. -Is guarding the herd not important to the whole tribe?” - -“Yes, father, it is very important. I am ashamed of what I have done.” - -Great Owl ordered Blind Dog to be held under guard until the council -should decide his punishment. - -Quietly, Blind Dog went with the guards. He glanced back toward -Deerfoot, but Deerfoot would not meet his gaze. Dropping his head upon -his chest, Blind Dog was troubled that Deerfoot had avoided looking at -him. He was worried, too, about why Deerfoot had not told the rest of -the story—how Deerfoot had insisted that he go to his tepee when he had -felt ill. Then he guessed that Deerfoot must have had a good reason, so -Blind Dog would not change his friend’s story unless he really had to. -He vowed, however, that he would try to speak with Deerfoot and discover -for himself just why Deerfoot had not told them the whole story. - -The tepee in which Blind Dog was held under guard was close to the -center of the village where the council had met. Suddenly, he heard many -voices talking excitedly and realized that the council had gathered -again. What had been a calm council before had now become an angry group -of men seeking revenge upon the horse stealers. He heard Deerfoot -repeating his story and the chieftains questioning him closely. Above -all they wanted to know of what tribe the raiders were members. Then he -could hear Deerfoot reply vaguely, “It was dark and I was still confused -from the blow upon my head. I would not want to accuse any tribe unless -I were sure. But who could be this close to us?” - -Many of the chiefs shook their heads in doubt, but Sleeping Bear rose to -plead for war, repeating by his own son’s account of the stealing of -fine horses by a neighboring tribe. - -Crouched in the tepee, Blind Dog realized now why Deerfoot had not told -the complete story. Rushing to the entrance of the tepee, he begged the -guards to take him before Chief Great Owl and the council. One of the -guards ran to the council and reported the prisoner’s mysterious -request. Chief Great Owl said that Blind Dog should be permitted to -enter the council ring and speak to the council. - -With head held high, Blind Dog stepped to the center of the ring and -gazed around at the unfriendly eyes which peered at him from faces of -stone. Finally Blind Dog spoke. - -“Since I was but a tiny boy holding tightly to my father’s hand so that -I would not stumble, I have been taught to respect the property of -others. I have been taught to honor my parents and the elders of our -tribe. I have been taught to learn well the many things a good brave -should learn. Above all, I have learned the power of truth. - -“My father has told me many times that I would never gain by telling a -lie. I have seen the truth of this often. Now, more strongly than ever, -I see the power that truth can have. I wondered a while ago why Deerfoot -had not told the whole story, but now I know. - -“Yes, we were on guard duty together, as he told you, and we did hear a -noise after that of the dog. We circled the herd to see that all was -well. Upon returning to our starting place, I told Deerfoot that I was -not feeling well. I had suddenly become chilled and sick to my stomach. -Deerfoot reminded me that it was almost time for us to be relieved, but -that I should go immediately to my tepee to rest. He said that he would -be glad to stand guard alone. I realized that what I did then was wrong, -but I felt so sick that I followed Deerfoot’s suggestion and went to my -father’s tepee. There I rolled myself in a buffalo blanket and lay in -pain for some time until I, too, heard Deerfoot’s shouts and the -hoofbeats of the horses running away from our camp. - -“I, too, rushed to the herd and reached there a short time before most -of you. I looked around quickly for signs that would show how many -raiders there had been. But oh, Great Chieftain, there were no tracks of -any ponies other than our own. - -“Deerfoot has used this story to try to arouse our tribe to a war. He -thirsts for the excitement that fighting would bring him. Now I am sure -that Deerfoot ran those ponies off himself in order to cause a war -between our tribe and our nearest neighbors. If I am lying now, punish -me doubly; but if I am right, let the punishment fall where it belongs, -even upon my friend.” - -Great Owl rose and called upon Deerfoot to defend himself. All eyes were -turned in his direction as Deerfoot rose to face Blind Dog. - -“Oh, Great Chief,” said Deerfoot, “all that Blind Dog has told you is -true. I sent him from the herd and I ran the ponies off into the night. -I made the wound that you see on my head. We had no raiders in our camp -tonight. Blind Dog has just taught me the true meaning of loyalty to my -tribe. - -“The fact that he was placed under guard and was to be punished made -little difference to him. But when he discovered that my plan was to -hurt more than him and me, he spoke out for what he believed was the -truth. Yes, I had hoped to force our tribe into war. I hoped that I -might be honored for bravery in war, even though I would sacrifice the -honor and friendship of my boyhood companion, Blind Dog, and many of our -braves might be killed in useless fighting. To make myself once again a -man in Blind Dog’s sight, let me repeat his words. ‘I am ashamed of what -I have done.’ Let the council punish me so that I will not forget again -the sacredness of truth and friendship and loyalty to my tribe.” - - - The incident around which this story is woven was told to the author - by Sam Carpin, trapper, hunter, and former member of the Butte, - Montana, Police Force. - - - - - THE CANOE RACE - - -Long Bow for many moons had been the champion of the canoe racers in the -Ottawa village and had accepted every challenge that had ever come his -way. - -From the time he was a young boy he had spent many hours upon the waters -of the great lake practicing his canoeing until he felt there wasn’t -another boy in the tribe that could come at all close to beating him in -a fair race. - -Soon the great hunt was upon them, and the warriors gathered their -weapons and headed north to hunt the elusive deer. Whenever they went -off on these hunts Black Rock, a short husky young warrior, always could -be seen as the constant companion of Long Bow. - -As the hunting party trotted along the woodland trail getting farther -and farther from the village, Black Rock and Long Bow would hold -conversation in sentences with very few words. - -“I think we will have a good hunt, Long Bow.” - -“Yes, Black Rock, for the signs of deer in this area are many.” - -“We have had a good year, and if the gods bless us we will have another -good year.” - -“Soon the winter will be upon us and we must wait a long time for the -spring.” - -“Long Bow, you speak of the winter when here it is just late spring.” - -“It will be a long summer for me.” - -“Why so, friend Long Bow?” - -“It used to be that during the summer when we held our games and -contests there would be excitement and thrills.” - -“Are there still not excitement and thrills for you?” - -“Black Rock, my friend, I have become so skilled that there are none -left in our tribe who give me any competition.” - -“That is not a wise way to talk, Long Bow. One must never set himself -above all others; that can be said only by the council.” - -As they continued along the trail, Black Rock said no more to his -friend, and Long Bow did not seem concerned that his friend offered no -more conversation. - -Soon they both forgot about the talk, for the hunting party had begun to -split up in search of the game. For the next few hours the party made -many fine shots and then it was time to return to the village. - -Each of the two braves had a fine buck strung upon a pole between them -as they walked easily along the trail homeward. Once again Black Rock -and Long Bow were a team. - -Now the excitement of the hunt was over and the catch was good, and all -the braves were feeling very good about their success. And so as a -result there was much talk and laughing and joking about the misses and -successful shots. Long Bow noticed that Black Rock was especially quiet -as they walked along the trail. - -“Black Rock, my friend, what makes your tongue so still? You have made a -fine kill this day and there will be much fresh meat for the village, -yet you walk with a heavy step and your voice is still.” - -“I am silent for a good reason, Long Bow my friend, for I fear that if I -speak my heart will speak rather than my lips.” - -Long Bow said nothing for a long while, trying to figure out what Black -Rock meant by such a statement. Finally the leader of the hunt called a -halt and the warriors placed their heavy burdens upon the ground and -seated themselves under the shade trees to rest and drink of the water -pouches before the journey homeward. - -As Black Rock and Long Bow sat beneath a tree, Long Bow chanced a -question of his friend. - -“What did you mean, friend Black Rock, that your heart would speak -rather than your lips?” - -“As we approached the hunting grounds, my friend, you said that your -summer would not be enjoyable because there was no competition for you. -Would the fact that you are among your people not give you joy enough? -Must there always be competition or contests to make your blood run -fast?” - -“Black Rock, you are one who can be contented with every-day living in -our village. I cannot, and the yearly games and contests I have always -looked forward to with great anticipation; but for the past three years -there has been no competition among the braves, especially in the king -of contests, the canoe race. Eagerly the young braves have met me on the -lake, but I am so skilled that no one has been able to come even close -to winning in the canoe race.” - -“This is not a good way to feel, friend Long Bow, so I guess it is time -that someone told you so. I, Black Rock, will challenge you upon the -lake and then we shall see if there is no competition left in the -village.” - -Now Long Bow had never raced against his friend Black Rock, for Black -Rock had never entered the canoe race, leaving the glory to his friend -Long Bow. He also knew that Black Rock was considered a good man in a -canoe but not good enough to defeat the great Long Bow. - -“Then this is a challenge, friend Black Rock?” - -“Yes, Long Bow, when the moon is full, on the following dawn we shall -man our canoes on the great blue water. We shall race and see who best -handles the canoe.” - -Long Bow laughed. “Oh, Black Rock, are you serious? Do you really think -that you can beat your friend Long Bow in a canoe race?” - -“I do not know, Long Bow, but someone has to try.” - -The leader called, and the men picked up their burdens and continued on -their way home. - -In the days that followed, whenever Long Bow had no work to do he could -be found out on the lake paddling up and down the shore line practicing -hard for the coming event. Black Rock on the other hand very rarely -would be seen in a canoe unless he were fishing or trapping. - -Word had spread swiftly through the village about the canoe race, and -the excitement was growing as each night the moon appeared more full. -Finally the moon was full and that night there was a great celebration -in the camp in preparation for the big event. - -Many of the braves were making wagers as to who would win, and there -even were some hot words; but the men realized that this was to be a -friendly challenge. Suddenly one of the braves realized that Black Rock -was nowhere to be seen. This was unheard of the night before a great -contest and they looked high and low but could find no trace of him. -Finally one of the men thought to ask his wife who had been sitting -quietly off to one side. - -“He has taken a walk before retiring. He said that he wished to be alone -this night.” - -Black Rock was alone. He had walked to a small glen a short way from the -camp, and there if one had come he would have seen a young warrior -kneeling talking to someone although no other person could be seen. - -“O, Great Manitou, who guides the lives of all red men, give me strength -tomorrow to wield a strong and sure paddle. Carry my canoe swiftly -across the waters and on to victory. Not for the glory that it will -bring me but to wipe from the heart of my friend Long Bow his feeling -that he is above the other men of the tribe. If he can be made to see -right again, as a good Ottawa brave should, this is all that I ask.” - -When he had finished Black Rock rose and returned to his home. The -celebrating was still going on, but quietly Black Rock said good-night -to his wife and wrapped himself in his blanket and was soon asleep. He -had been troubled, but his walk and his prayer had eased his mind, for -now he knew that it rested with the great spirits. - -The following day dawned bright and clear, and before the sun had risen -very far in the heavens the lake shore was crowded with eager spectators -waiting for the start of the race. - -The rules were outlined to the two warriors and then each took his -position along the shore, standing in their respective canoes. About a -mile down the shore of the lake a warrior stood with a gayly colored -coup stick. This was the point which would indicate the finish line. The -signal was given, and the two men bent to the task. - -The crowd cheered as the two canoes sped down the shore line, neither -one getting far ahead before the other would pull alongside. As they -neared the finish line, the watchers on the shore could see the muscles -of the two men striving in their backs and shoulders. - -Finally the finish line was just a few yards away, and with a mighty -surge, Black Rock drove his canoe across the finish line first. - -There was a mixed chorus of groans and cheers as the men returned to the -starting point and beached their canoes. The crowd milled around Black -Rock as he stepped ashore, but he raised his arms for silence. - -“Long Bow has lost the race this day, but let no man say that he is not -a good man with the canoe; for there are none among us who to this day -have been able to defeat him. I shake the hand of my brother Long Bow -and to him I say, it was a great race and I have won, but it was a close -race and if we raced again I might not be so lucky.” - -“No, Black Rock, it was not luck this day that won the race, but rather -a strong back being helped by a true loyal heart. I know now why you -challenged me and I could not have won if you had tied one hand behind -your back. I have been selfish and ungrateful for the many friends and -good things that have been showered upon me. I have lost this battle of -the canoes, but it has helped me win a battle with myself. I thank you, -Black Rock, for bringing a straying warrior once again into the camp of -good Ottawas.” - - - - - STANDING FAWN MAKES A DOLL - - -When the excitement was over in Flying Arrow’s wigwam and all the -Shawnee had returned to their own homes to sit and talk of the birth of -a new son to Flying Arrow, Standing Fawn, daughter to Flying Arrow, -wandered off from the wickiup to think about this thing that had -happened. - -Until this day, little Standing Fawn had been the center of attention in -the home of her mother and father and also when they went to visit -friends; but now a new baby boy had been born, and everyone was very -excited. When Standing Fawn had come running to tell her mother how she -had helped her grandmother to dry rabbit skins and to make furry ropes -for blankets her mother had said how nice that was, but went right back -to taking care of the little boy Indian that now held the place of honor -in the home of Flying Arrow. - -This Standing Fawn could not understand, but for the time being she did -not think about it any more but went to join the other girls that were -gathering nuts. The girls had to hurry so that they gathered enough nuts -for the tribal families before the squirrels got them all. - -The walnut and butternut hulls were used for dyeing quills and so many, -many nuts had to be gathered that soon the baskets were bulging with -these and beechnuts, hazelnuts, and hickory nuts. When the task was over -Standing Fawn returned home to her father and mother and her little -brother. - -As she entered the wickiup she could hear her mother singing softly to -the new baby. There against the wall was the carrying case for the baby -which Standing Fawn had helped her mother to make. That was fun working -with her mother, but now mother was busy with the new baby and so -Standing Fawn felt that she was no longer loved. - -After supper, she crawled into her warm blankets and was soon asleep, -but she awakened a short time later as the new baby cried for food. The -crying continued until he was fed and then Standing Fawn was asleep once -again. - -For many weeks there was a great deal of work to be done with the new -baby in the house, and Standing Fawn found that more and more she was -asked to carry on the duties that her mother had done before this time. - -When friends came to visit, they still had a smile and warm pat on the -head for Standing Fawn, but most of the attention was given to her -little brother, or so it seemed to Standing Fawn. - -One night the little baby was very restless and did a lot of crying. -Standing Fawn did not sleep well that night and in the morning when she -rose to stir the coals for the morning fire and prepare to cook the -breakfast she was feeling very cross. Her mother called to her from the -wickiup. - -“Standing Fawn, will you go to the stream and fetch some fresh water and -heat it for me, please?” - -“Yes, mother, I will go, but I am so tired,” Standing Fawn heard herself -answer. “Today I would like to go to grandmother’s to help her with the -quills if I may.” - -“But, Standing Fawn, I need your help here today.” - -“I want to go to grandmother’s today.” - -“All right, Standing Fawn, you may go to grandmother’s today. I will -manage alone.” - -So after Standing Fawn had fetched the water she skipped merrily on her -way to join her grandmother who was busy this winter in making fancy -quill work upon moccasins and leggings, knife sheaths, and anything else -that needed bright decoration. - -“Welcome, Standing Fawn, you have not been to see your grandmother for a -long time. I was beginning to think that you had forgotten old Granny.” - -“No, grandmother, it is just that with the new baby I have been kept so -busy that I have not been able to leave home for very long at all. I -wish the new boy had never come to our home.” With that Standing Fawn -kicked her foot at some soft rabbit hides that lay on the floor of the -wickiup, more angry at herself than anything else. - -“Now, now,” said her grandmother. “That is no way to feel, especially -about a little boy who was not able to choose whether he would come to -the house of your father or not. He is very small and he does not -understand if you are angry with him, but he does understand love and -attention.” - -“Yes, grandmother, and he is getting plenty of that from everyone who -comes to our house. Since he has come I have been very unhappy, and I -shouldn’t be unhappy, should I, grandmother?” - -“No, Standing Fawn, that is not the right feeling to have in your heart. -Let me explain something to you as best I can. - -“When you were born your father was disappointed, for you were a girl -and he had hoped so for a warrior son, but he loved you as much as if -you were a boy; for, as your mother said to him, your daughter will bear -many sons. Your parents loved you and cherished you and did everything -they could to make your life a happy and pleasant one. When your mother -was heavy with child you were a great help to her around the wickiup. -When your brother was born, there was much excitement in the village, -for it was a boy and now your father had a warrior son and a beautiful -daughter. - -“For this he was very thankful and went to the hills to thank the great -spirit for blessing his home so. When he returned there was great -rejoicing once again just as there was when you were born, but then the -work started just as when you were born, and your mother had no one to -help her when you were a very small baby, but now she had you and she -depends a great deal upon you to help her with your little brother. Soon -he will be big and strong and you will be very proud to be called his -sister. But now he is small and needs your love and attention.” - -“I understand, grandmother, and I have been a very foolish girl. I will -try to make up to my brother for this feeling I have had in my heart -that is bad.” - -“I am glad, granddaughter, to hear you say that. Now you had best run -along, for your mother will be needing help this day.” - -“Yes, my grandmother, but first I have something I must do.” So Standing -Fawn strolled off to a corner of her grandmother’s wickiup and there she -gathered some items into her lap and began working busily at something. -Soon it was finished and she rose and saying good-bye to her -grandmother, walked back to her own wickiup. Her mother was busy -preparing supper, for the project Standing Fawn worked on had taken most -of the day. - -“Well, my daughter, did you have a nice day with your grandmother?” - -“Oh yes, mother, a very nice day.” Standing Fawn was sure to keep her -hands behind her back so that her mother could not see what she held. - -Finally she excused herself and ran into the wickiup. There where he -usually hung was her baby brother in his cradleboard, warm and sleeping. -To the large cradle loop above his head, Standing Fawn hung a dainty -little doll, all dressed in buckskin, that she had been so busy making -that day. Next to the doll she placed a very small bow and arrows and -tiny moccasins. Just at that moment her father entered the wickiup. - -“See, father, what I have made for my little brother, who will one day -be a great warrior. When he sees this doll it will make him want to run -fast and shoot straight and carry himself as a warrior should.” - -As Standing Fawn talked her mother had entered and was standing next to -her father. - -Flying Arrow motioned for his daughter to come to him and then kneeling -on the ground and placing his hands upon his daughter’s shoulders he -said: - -“Surely, my daughter, if he were not destined to be a great warrior he -would not be blessed with such a fine and beautiful sister. I am a very -proud man to have such a wonderful family.” - -Standing Fawn looked at her mother, and her mother was smiling. And -inside, Standing Fawn felt all warm and good. - - - - - BLACK CLOUD REMEMBERS - - -It had been many weeks since the Seneca hunting party had seen the -friendly smoke of their own village and as they lay among the pines, -resting now, they were thinking of how it would be in their village when -they returned the following day to speak of their success on the hunt. -Their catch was large and there would be much dancing and celebration -when they did return. - -Black Cloud, leader of the hunting party, lay stretched out beneath the -boughs of a large pine and gazed up through the branches at the clear -sky lighted this evening by a bright full moon. The heavens were filled -with stars, and this would mean a good clear day for travel when dawn -finally broke upon the forest. - -The party had traveled far in search of food but their labors were not -in vain for they were returning loaded down with good fresh meat for -their tribe. - -The trip had been an exciting one from the standpoint of the hunt, but -now the excitement was over and the warriors were tired. A half day’s -journey lay between them and their homes, and they were eager to start -the next morning. - -The canoes had been pulled up the side of the lake and rigged for -shelter in case of rain but all the party were sleeping in the open. As -Black Cloud lay gazing at the stars he remembered back to his days as a -boy when he had made his first hunting trip with his father. - -“Come, father, hurry, we must get started!” Little Black Cloud had -called as he waited at the beach for his father to join him. His father -finally arrived and, approving of the canoe which his son had chosen, he -turned it upright and pushed it into the lake. They loaded their packs -and hunting weapons and soon Black Cloud was seated in the middle of the -canoe as his father pushed from shore. - -“Where are we going to hunt, father?” asked Little Black Cloud. - -“Well, my son, I thought that we would try Bear Lake; for many of our -warriors have reported fine deer around Bear Lake, and you saw the two -beauties that were brought to the camp last week.” - -“Yes, father, they were beautiful bucks, and I hope we are as -fortunate.” - -“We have a hard long journey ahead, my son, and so pull hard upon the -paddle; for we must reach the upper end of the lake before nightfall. -There we will make camp and tomorrow we shall carry our canoe to the -upper lake known as Bear Lake. It is quite a distance and though it may -seem close it will take us some time to reach our destination.” - -Father and son pulled upon the paddles, and soon the canoe was moving -steadily forward toward the upper end of the lake. As the craft skimmed -through the water, Little Black Cloud’s father pointed out the many -signs of wild game that could be seen along the shore. - -Here was evidence of where brother beaver had been at work cutting logs -or here was a grey muddy hole near the lake’s edge to which the forest -animals came to drink. Always the canoe was kept near the shoreline, for -this made the trip more interesting since there was much to see. - -As noon approached, Little Black Cloud’s father directed the canoe in to -the shore and beached it in a small cove. Father and son stepped ashore -and pulled the canoe up after them. Near by there were some fine berry -bushes and, walking inland a short way, they came upon a clear swift -flowing stream. They picked some berries and, seating themselves near -the stream, they made a meal of some fried venison they had brought with -them, berries, and water. After eating they relaxed for a few moments -and then the two walked back to the lake edge and climbing aboard their -canoe once again were soon continuing their journey up the lake shore. - -It was near dark when they reached the top of the lake. Little Black -Cloud’s father guided the canoe into a small stream leading from the -lake and, calling to his son to stop paddling, he guided the canoe -softly against the shore of the stream. The two Indians stepped from -their canoe and then, lifting the canoe from the water, set it upon the -shore. - -“We shall make camp here for the night, my son. You will gather some -wood and I will see if I can catch us some fish for our supper. I shall -not be gone long and there will still be plenty of daylight.” Saying -this, Little Black Cloud’s father took up his fishing line and bone hook -and a bright spinner and started back through the woods for the lake -shore. - -Little Black Cloud meanwhile started busily preparing camp and gathering -wood for a fire. In an hour his father was back carrying a fine fish and -soon they were having fresh fish steaks broiled on green sticks. These -they flavored with some sugar, which they always carried, and washed it -down with fresh water. - -“And now, my son, we must sleep, for in the morning we have a long walk -ahead to reach the Bear Lake.” - -Father and son rolled into their blankets and the night noises around -them provided a lullaby. - -When dawn broke, Little Black Cloud found that his father had been up -for some time and that breakfast was ready and waiting. - -Following a hearty breakfast, Little Black Cloud picked up his pack. His -father strapped his own pack upon his back and, balancing the light -birch bark canoe upon his head, led the way through the forest toward -the lake. The woodland Indians often had to make portages like this in -order to reach their final destination. - -After traveling for some time in this manner, Little Black Cloud noticed -a clear space among the trees ahead. His father seemed to sense what he -was thinking, for he called to his son, “That is Bear Lake just ahead. -It was given that name many moons ago by our people, for it used to be -the home of many bears who lived and thrived here, but when our people -discovered that many fine fish lived in these waters they had to drive -the bears off in order to make the fishing grounds safe for our people. - -“Since the disappearance of the bears the deer have flocked to the -shores of this fine lake, and now whenever fresh meat is needed a small -party of us come to the lake and in a short time we have enough meat for -the needs of our people.” - -Soon the two had reached the shores of Bear Lake and, looking out upon -the calm waters, Little Black Cloud said, “My, how peaceful the waters -look, father. It seems as though nothing or no one had ever visited -these shores before.” - -Then a short distance down the shore there was a rustling in the brush -and a splash, and soon the head of a doe would be seen bending to drink, -and then another and another; and then the eight-pointed head of a buck -could be seen a short distance beyond the does. - -“Look, father, look. How many deer are there?” Little Black Cloud was -very excited, for never before had he seen such a large number of deer -in one place at the same time. - -“Come, my son, we must leave our gear here and go in pursuit of the fine -deer. They abide all along these shores and back away from the lakes in -the shaded glens and the open meadows. It may not be as easy to catch -them as it is to see them.” - -Once again the canoe was placed in the water, and father and son set off -to hunt the deer. They moved quietly down the shore, but no sooner had -they reached a spot near enough to fire an arrow when the deer would -turn and disappear into the woodlands. For several hours they paddled -the shore but try as they might to approach the deer quietly the animals -would turn as if warned and, with a flick of their tails, were deep in -the woods by the time the canoe was within striking distance. - -Soon dusk was drawing nigh, and the two turned their canoe to return to -where they had left their gear. - -“Come,” said Little Black Cloud’s father, “we will have some supper and -when it is dark we shall hunt again.” - -“But, father, how can you hunt when it is dark? You cannot see the -deer.” - -“I will show you, my son. First we must gather some pine knots.” - -And so the supper was prepared and two very hungry Indians feasted and -then sat back to allow the food to settle. Finally the father rose and -taking his boy by the hand they wandered into the woods to gather pine -knots. Finally they had gathered about ten pine knots and these they -placed in the bottom of the canoe. - -Then Little Black Cloud’s father made an attachment on the front of the -canoe which would hold a burning pine knot. It was getting dark faster -now, and so the two Indians loaded their weapons into the canoe and then -strapping a piece of birch bark to the bow of the canoe to act as a -reflector they pushed away from shore after lighting a pine knot and -placing it in the holder which contained sand so the fire would not burn -the canoe. It was then that Little Black Cloud was able to see why his -father wanted the pine knots. - -As they skimmed along the shore, the deer would see the light and be -attracted by it to the shore. This would then make them easy targets, -for their bodies would then be outlined on the shore. - -Slowly the canoe moved along the shore until Little Black Cloud’s father -motioned for him to stop paddling. Placing his paddle in the bottom of -the canoe, Little Black Cloud took his bow and arrow and stood waiting. -Soon the flash of a pair of eyes was seen and then Little Black Cloud -fired. - -There was a splash and all was still. They steered the canoe toward the -place they had seen the deer and there lay a small buck. This was placed -in the canoe and they moved on. - -Little Black Cloud shot another deer that night, and then father and son -returned to camp to skin and dress the two deer. - -The following day they returned to the lake where they had started and -were soon paddling down the lake shore for home. Little Black Cloud’s -father decided not to stop that evening and so continued paddling -swiftly until the friendly fires of the village were in sight. He -beached the canoe, and a proud father and a very tired young Indian boy -entered the village that night with two fine specimens of deer. - -Black Cloud sighed as he lay under the pine. Yes, these were fond -memories he had of the days when he was a youth. - -But soon he would be doing the same thing his father had done twelve -summers ago for when he returned to the village the next day, he did not -know that his wife would be waiting for him with a new-born baby son, a -boy who would some day paddle swiftly along the lake shore with his -father. - - - - - THE MIRACLE OF THE PINE GROVE - - -The drums beat slowly. A cloud of sadness hung over the Iroquois -village. People moved slowly about their tasks. Even the pets of the -village seemed to have lost their playfulness. The little children were -playing quietly at sitting games, rather than the usual noisy running -games that they liked so well. - -As Little Rock, a young Iroquois warrior, rode into the village with a -dead buck slung across his pony, he became suddenly aware of the great -feeling of sadness that was upon his village. Instead of hearing the -usual gay greetings from the people of the tribe, Little Rock noticed -that when he looked at them they would shake their heads and turn slowly -away. Little Rock feared that great trouble had come and wanted to know -what it was. So he dug his heels into his pony’s sides and sped toward -his father’s wigwam. As he drew near, he saw a number of people gathered -close to the entrance. The drums boomed slowly and sadly. As Little Rock -came nearer his friend, Little Red Cloud, stopped him. - -“Wait, Little Rock!” his friend warned gently. “Do not go to your father -now. The Medicine Man is with him.” - -“What is the trouble with my father?” - -“Do not worry, Little Rock. Great Rock is a great and strong Chief. He -will be all right.” - -“As my friend, Little Red Cloud, I ask you once again. What is the -matter with my father? It cannot be so simple, when half the tribe -gathers outside the entrance to my father’s wigwam. They usually come to -talk or seek advice, but now they are silent and their faces are sad. -Tell me, Little Red Cloud, what is wrong?” - -Little Rock could not wait for an answer. He jumped from his pony and -ran swiftly toward his father’s wigwam. He was met at the entrance by -his mother. - -“Wait, Little Rock! Do not come in yet. Tall Spear is making medicine -for your father. He is very ill.” - -“I must go to him. He may need me.” - -Just then the Medicine Man joined Little Rock’s mother. - -“Your father is asking for you, Little Rock,” the old man said. “You can -see him now.” - -Little Rock stepped inside the wigwam and found his father lying on the -great buffalo robe, his head propped up. Great Rock’s face looked drawn -and tired and he breathed with great difficulty. As Little Rock knelt -beside his father, the sick man’s eyes opened wide. - -“My son, you have returned.” Great Rock spoke slowly as though each word -pained him greatly. “Did you have a good hunt?” - -“Yes, my father. There was much game and I was able to bring a really -fine buck back to our village. He will give us much fine meat, and his -skin will make you a fine shirt.” - -Great Rock closed his eyes for a few moments while Little Rock, his -mother, and the Medicine Man waited anxiously in silence. Then Great -Rock opened his eyes, wet his lips, and started speaking with great -effort again. - -“That is good, my son. You have learned the ways of the forest well. -This was your first trip alone into the great forest, yet you have -tracked down a fine buck.” The old chief seemed more tired than before. - -Little Rock reached for a bowl of soup near by and spooned some of this -to his father’s lips. The old man started to sip the soup slowly. Then -he raised his hand weakly. - -“My son, your father is old. Last night this sickness came upon me. I -feel that the time is growing near when I shall journey to the Happy -Hunting Grounds. I have raised you to be a warrior in our tribe. I have -taught you the way of the bear and the way of the fox. You will have to -be the man of the family now and provide for your mother.” - -“But, my father,” said Little Rock, “you must not leave us now. Our -tribe and all the Iroquois need you now more than ever before. There is -trouble among the tribes. Soon the Great Council will meet. If your seat -at the Council is taken by one who is not so wise, the trouble among our -tribes will continue and become greater. You must get well, father, for -much depends upon you.” - -“There are others as wise, my son. My voice is but a small breeze in a -big windstorm. The men who lead our tribes are wise in the ways of -peace. They will make good decisions. Of that I am certain. But now -leave me, my son, for I wish to be alone. I am tired and I must rest for -the final journey.” - -“Yes, my father, I will go now, but it is not to pine and weep, as the -others do. I know you will get well. Tall Spear will make strong -medicine. I have no fear.” - -Little Rock left the wigwam and, without saying a word to anyone, he -mounted his pony and rode swiftly from the village. For many hours he -rode until it was nearly dark. Then he stopped his pony in a pine grove. -Leaving the pony to graze, he walked deep into the grove until he came -to a place where an opening in the trees allowed the last rays of light -to stream in. - -Under the spreading branches of a great pine tree, Little Rock knelt and -started digging with his knife to root up some plants. When he had -gathered a handful of roots, he arose. He walked toward a stream and -near it he picked some berries from a bush. He dropped the roots and -berries into a small leather pouch and rode back to the village. He -thrust the pouch into his mother’s hand and asked her to brew the roots -quickly in some fresh water. - -When the broth had been bubbling for a short time, Little Rock grasped -the gourd from the fire and carried it toward the wigwam where his -father lay ill with fever. As he approached the wigwam, Tall Spear -stopped him. - -“Little Rock, what is it you carry in the gourd?” the Medicine Man -asked. - -“Many moons ago, my father and I traveled deep into the forest. Finally -we came to a large pine grove. Deep within the pine grove, my father -pointed out certain roots and berries that grew there and nowhere else -near our village. He told me that those berries and roots would make -strong medicine for anyone sick with hotness of the skin. When I spoke -with my father, I remembered those roots and berries. I thought that a -broth made from them might save his life. So I have brought them to his -wigwam.” - -The Medicine Man grasped the gourd and was about to turn away when -Little Rock seized his arm. - -“Make him drink, Tall Spear. Tell him this is broth made from the plants -in the pine grove. He will understand and he will drink.” - -“I will give him the medicine and I will tell him. You have done well, -Little Rock. Your respect for your father’s wisdom is very great.” - -With that the Medicine Man disappeared inside the wigwam, and Little -Rock sat upon the ground to wait. Soon Tall Spear came out again. - -“Your father has sipped the broth. He told me to clasp your hand as he -would in thanks for bringing the roots. He is resting now. All we can do -is wait.” - -As time went by, Little Rock became drowsy and soon could keep his eyes -open no longer. As he fell asleep, the old Medicine Man took his blanket -and wrapped it around the young brave’s shoulders. - -A new day was dawning as Little Rock awoke. He looked quickly toward the -entrance of the wigwam. Suddenly Tall Spear appeared, his face looking -cheerful. - -“Your father is asking for you. He is weak but he will not die. He will -sit at the Council soon to decide for peace. Go to him and go with your -head held high, for you have much to be proud of this day.” - -Little Rock entered the wigwam and hurried to his father’s side. At that -moment his father reached out his hand and Little Rock bent down to take -it. The eyes of father and son met in silence. No words were needed to -tell how much more closely their lives were tied together. - -Tall Spear stepped quickly outside. It seemed only a moment to the men -inside the wigwam when they heard the voices of their Oneida brothers -speaking loudly and happily again. - - - - - CROOKED ARROW FINDS A FRIEND - - -Black Hawk was a young Shawnee brave who lived in the earliest days of -the American Indian. Black Hawk had been raised in his village by his -father, Tall Hawk, who was very proud of him. - -Tall Hawk had very carefully taught Black Hawk all there was to know -about hunting, fishing, stalking, and all the other necessary ways of -forest and stream. - -Each year, Tall Hawk would look at his son growing and exclaim to his -wife, Soft Bird, “See how tall and strong he grows. Surely he is the -most handsome brave in our village. Not only is he handsome but brave -and strong as well; he will bring much honor and glory to his father.” -At this Soft Bird nodded, for she knew how much Tall Hawk thought of his -son. - -It was late spring, and the Shawnee were preparing to take the trail of -the wild fish and game. It was time they began thinking of new skins for -clothing and housing and food for their families. Each father who had a -son, carefully trained his son for just this day. - -Finally all was in readiness and the great hunting party, after bidding -good-bye to their friends and loved ones, took the trail to the north -where scouts had earlier reported seeing herd of deer. Perhaps this -would be easier than they had thought, but as they traveled onward, Tall -Hawk began to realize that they were quite a long way from the village. - -He signaled for the party to stop and called two of the leader warriors -to him. “We have traveled far from our village. Do you think it wise -that we go on? Surely along the way we have seen many single deer, but -nowhere have we seen signs of a herd or a large number. This territory -which we now enter is the home and hunting grounds of the Conestogas. We -must leave here, for we are on land that does not belong to us.” - -Tall Hawk was turning to speak to the others of the party when one of -the warriors interrupted him. “Yes, this is Conestoga country, but we -are to stop now because of a few woodland weasels that call this their -land?” - -“But it is their land and we shall do just that, turn around and go -back. Such foolishness this day could bring the angry Conestogas down on -our heads in a very short space of time and we would be badly -outnumbered. Our party is not too strong, and any attack upon us here in -unfamiliar territory would mean that many lives would be lost.” - -“Are you afraid, Tall Hawk? Does your stomach swim and your heart -flutter like a bird? Surely the Conestogas do not concern you?” - -“One Conestoga against one Shawnee, or even two Conestogas against one -Shawnee, and I would not in the least be afraid, for the gods know that -one good Shawnee brave could hold his own against any two Conestogas. -But we are on their home grounds. Any attack by a large force of -Conestogas and any one of us would be lucky to live. No, foolish one, we -shall turn and go back in the direction we came. We shall search -elsewhere for the elusive deer.” - -With that, Tall Hawk turned to the hunting party and repeated what had -gone on between himself and the other two braves. There were some grunts -from braves who disagreed with Tall Hawk, but for the most part they -were willing to return. - -As the party turned to go back down the trail, one of the scouts who had -been sent ahead came running into the circle to report that a large band -of Conestogas were heading for just that place and they would be better -off to start immediately for the home village. Tall Hawk gave the -signal, and the hunting party turned quickly and trotted south toward -the village. - -It was fully a day’s journey and they had no rest. The long grind began -to tell upon their numbers. When they would falter and were about to -collapse, Tall Hawk could be heard to shout, “Keep running, fools! Do -you wish your hair to grace the home of one of our Conestoga neighbors?” - -This threat served its purpose, and the braves who were tiring suddenly -found fresh strength and would continue the grueling run. - -Soon they reached their own hunting grounds and were safe on the other -side when the Conestogas broke from the cover of the forest and into the -meadow which separated the hunting grounds of the two tribes. - -Suddenly the leader of the Conestogas raised his hand, and the band of -braves with him stopped running and listened. The chief explained that -they had reached the border and could go no further. And so the score -was equal. Black Hawk was proud of his father, for once again he had -proved to his fellow braves that he was a wise man. - -The hunting party slowed down a bit now and, after traveling about two -miles, they camped for the night. They were tired and after a hasty -supper they fell off to sleep one by one until all but the guards were -sound asleep. Black Hawk was soon sound asleep as well, but Tall Hawk -lay awake thinking. - -Why did they not sight the deer before they reached the land of the -Conestogas? Surely the scouts that had reported the deer herd to the -village had not imagined seeing so many deer, or had they? And why had -the chase taken them into Conestoga land? Over and over he asked himself -these questions until he could not stay awake any longer and finally he -was asleep with the rest of the party. - -The next morning after breakfast the party continued on its trek, this -time turning westward. Soon they came to a large lake and Tall Hawk -divided the party, requesting some of them to remain here and fish and -the others to continue on around the lake in search of game. Black Hawk -was among those chosen to stay and fish and he was very happy about it. -He saw that he was the only young brave allowed to stay with the fishing -party and he felt it was because he was such a good fisherman. - -When the hunting party had finally gone out of sight, Red Hand, the -second in command, gathered the group and explained to them their -mission. This lake should have plenty of fish, and so they would spend -the next day and night here fishing and in the morning of the second day -return to their village, as they hoped, with a successful catch of fish -from the beautiful lake. - -Red Hand led the way down the shore of the lake to where the last -fishing party had hidden the canoes. Then, asking the party to team up -in pairs, he slipped a pouch from his shoulder and gave out fishing -equipment to each brave. When each one had received his equipment, Red -Hand said, “We shall fish the lake for one day and we shall rest on -shore for one night. On the dawn of the second day the hunting party -will return and we shall all leave for our homes together. Let us pray -that the gods will smile favorably upon us this day and that our catch -will be a large one. Good luck to all of you, and may your lines be -heavy with fish when you return.” - -With these words ringing in their ears the Indians rushed to the canoes -and pushed off into the quiet blue waters of this great lake. Black Hawk -had chosen as his partner an older brave of the tribe by the name of -Crooked Arrow. Perhaps it seemed strange that Black Hawk should choose -his partner because he was so young, but Crooked Arrow very rarely spoke -and many of the Indians of the tribe did not like him. Why they did not -like him, Black Hawk did not know. He did know that Crooked Arrow was -not very good-looking and that he was a little fatter than most of the -other men of the tribe. But, aside from that, Black Hawk could see no -reason for not liking him and so had asked him if he would be Black -Hawk’s partner in the fishing trip. - -Crooked Arrow had shaken his head and without saying a word had followed -Black Hawk to the canoes and helped him lift one into the lake. The -other braves had laughed at Black Hawk when they saw him choose Crooked -Arrow as his partner, but Red Hand had motioned them to be quiet and -stop making fun of the boy. - -When the instructions had been given out and the equipment distributed -among the braves, Black Hawk and Crooked Arrow stepped into their canoe -and pushed away from the shore. They dipped their paddles softly into -the lake and the canoe glided quietly across the waters. - -Soon they had pulled away from the other canoe and Crooked Arrow who had -taken the stern of the canoe, was steering the canoe for a point of land -about a half a mile down the lake shore. Black Hawk turned to him and -asked, “Why do you steer for that part of the lake, Crooked Arrow? I -should think that that section of lake over to the eastward would be -better.” - -“Crooked Arrow knows where the fish are, little Black Hawk.” - -He said nothing more but pulled strongly with his paddle and the canoe -fairly skimmed across the water. Black Hawk thought to himself that they -would probably have gone even faster if he, Black Hawk, had removed his -paddle from the water, for he could not keep up with Crooked Arrow’s -stroke and was causing a backwash with his paddle by dragging it through -the water. - -Finally Crooked Arrow said, “My little friend, dip your paddle deep and -pull strongly back toward the stern of the canoe. When you have -completed the stroke, draw your paddle completely from the water and -reach it forward high in the air before placing it in the water again.” - -Black Hawk followed his instructions, and soon he found that the -paddling was a lot easier by using that technique than the way he had -been trying to paddle. He had been concentrating so hard on his paddling -that he did not realize that they were soon to the place where Crooked -Arrow said that they would be sure to catch some fish. - -Crooked Arrow motioned for Black Hawk to throw his line overboard, which -he did, and with that Crooked Arrow slowed down the canoe to an even, -smooth pace which would take them just past the small jutting of land. - -Black Hawk could see his own lure shining in the water. As the lure came -parallel with the jutting land there was a great swirl of water, and the -fight was on. - -A very large fish had grasped the lure in his mouth and it was now a -fight between the boy and the fish. It was a huge bass that was -threshing around in the water and soon it was obvious that Black Hawk -would be the victor. With some swift overhand strokes he had pulled the -fish up to the side of the canoe. Then with a thrust of his arm, Crooked -Arrow speared the fish with his fish spear and brought him safely -aboard. He was a beautiful big bass and Black Hawk was so proud he -nearly tipped over the canoe in his excitement to see the fish. - -“Be not so excited, my young friend. It is a nice-sized fish, but the -day is young and we must catch many, many more.” Black Hawk cast his -lure in again, and soon the episode was repeated. Back and forth Crooked -Arrow paddled near the jutting land and fish after fish fell victim to -the line of Black Hawk and the spear of Crooked Arrow. - -Soon shadows began to gather and Crooked Arrow turned the bow of the -canoe toward the place they had started from. Black Hawk paddled even -harder now going home, for he was very proud. There in the bottom of the -canoe, all nicely strung on an improvised leather loop, were twelve -plump large fish. - -When they reached the shore, Black Hawk with his fish in hand dashed -ashore to report his success to Red Hand. Red Hand looked with pride -upon the catch Black Hawk held up to show him and then he said, “My, but -that is a fine catch of fish. Did you catch them all by yourself?” - -“Oh no,” said Black Hawk, “Crooked Arrow and I both caught them. They -would strike at my line and when I pulled them to the side of the boat, -Crooked Arrow would spear them and bring them on board. Oh, what an -exciting trip we have had. How did the others make out, or are we the -first to return?” - -“Yes, you are the first to return, but remember you were not too far -from the landing place. The others will be here shortly. Sit down and we -will smoke and rest while we wait for the others.” - -They sat down and waited. Soon the other canoes, one by one, would slip -up to the shore, and the braves would leap out and triumphantly tell Red -Hand of their catch. Soon the last of the canoes had been beached and -the last of the fish carefully packed away for the journey home the -following morning. - -The braves had a supper of delicious fresh lake bass and after they had -sat around the fire telling of their adventures on the lake they all -turned in for the night. Soon the fire had burned to just ashes and all -the braves slept peacefully in the quiet of the night. - -It had been a long day on the lake in the sun, and now the quiet spring -breezes through the trees overhead sang a soft lullaby along the lake -shore. When it had been quiet for a long time, Black Hawk sat up and -noticed that Crooked Arrow was gone from where he lay down to sleep. - -Black Hawk looked around and then suddenly he glanced toward the lake. -There he saw Crooked Arrow standing quiet. Black Hawk rose and quietly -slipped down toward the lake and to where Crooked Arrow was standing. -Approaching the lakeside, Black Hawk respected the brave, Crooked Arrow, -and when he had reached a point about five yards from the brave he -stopped. He could barely hear Crooked Arrow and then he knew that -Crooked Arrow was thanking someone. - -“Finally, O Great Spirit, I, Crooked Arrow, humbly thank you for sending -to me a friend, this boy, Black Hawk, who asked me to go with him on the -fishing trip. For this I am thankful and also I am thankful that you -sent the fish of the lake to his hook so that his catch was a large one. -You have been very kind to Crooked Arrow this day and I will not forget. -I have never known my family, but from this day forth I shall look upon -Black Hawk as if he were my son. I know he has a father, a good and -wonderful man, but I am sure he will not mind if I remain close to him, -for his kindness to me this day has brought great joy to my heart. Thank -you once again, O Great Spirit.” - -Crooked Arrow turned and walked slowly back to where he had been -sleeping and lay down once again. Either he did not look or did not -particularly notice that Black Hawk was missing from his place upon the -ground. - -For a long time Black Hawk sat by the side of the lake thinking about -what Crooked Arrow had been saying. Suddenly he realized what had -happened here. He had made a friend, a very close friend, and it made -his heart warm. Slowly he too returned to where he had slept and, lying -down once again, was soon fast asleep. - -Dawn broke bright and warm upon the lake and soon all the Indians were -astir. - -They all ate a hearty breakfast and as they were packing the remainder -of the equipment and safely storing the canoes away once again, the -first of the hunting party arrived. - -They too had a very successful hunt, and Black Hawk counted five very -plump bucks being carried by the hunting party. - -Some of the braves were quick to point out to him that the largest buck -had been brought down with an arrow from the bow of Tall Hawk and this -made Black Hawk very proud of his father. The party started on the -return trip to the village and it was a happy group which entered the -circle of homes to be greeted warmly by friends and family who viewed -the fine food supply with a great deal of laughter and joy. The party -soon dispersed, each one returning to his own home. - -When Black Hawk and his father returned to their home there was a fine -meal awaiting them; and the rest of the family, his mother and two -sisters, greeted the two hunters with praise for their success which had -preceded them to their home by the little braves’ spreading the word -through the village of the success of the hunters, especially Tall Hawk -and his son Black Hawk, the great fisherman. - -After supper, Black Hawk stepped out of his home and wandered through -the village greeting his many friends and talking with them of the -adventures he had just been through. - -Finally Black Hawk had been to almost all his friends when he noticed -one rather shabby wigwam set off from the rest on the far side of the -village. Slowly puzzling a little bit about this, he wandered toward the -wigwam. He saw one of his playmates, Walking Bird, and he stopped to ask -who lived in the wigwam in the distance. - -“Oh,” said Walking Bird, “that is the home of Crooked Arrow. He lives -off by himself like that, for he seems to enjoy being by himself. He is -a strange sort of man and he very rarely comes out of his wigwam to -participate in the activities of the tribe, except when there is a -hunting or a fishing party or a tribal celebration. Was not he on the -same trip with you?” - -“Yes, he was, and I think I shall pay him a visit.” - -Quickly Black Hawk approached the wigwam of Crooked Arrow and when he -had reached the flap that served as a door he called out and asked if he -might enter. - -“Come in, come in, my friend, Black Hawk,” called Crooked Arrow. - -The boy entered and Crooked Arrow rose to greet him. - -“It is very kind of you to come and see me.” - -“Is it not the thing to do for friends to visit one another?” asked -Black Hawk. “Why do you live here by yourself? Have you no family?” - -“No, Black Hawk, Crooked Arrow has no family, and I have liked living -here on the edge of the village. It is quiet and I get much time to work -on my tools for fishing and hunting. I like it here.” - -Black Hawk stayed until it was quite late and he noticed that Crooked -Arrow talked on and on about many, many things. Finally it was getting -very late and Black Hawk rose to leave. - -“Come again, little Black Hawk. My wigwam is always open to my good -friend. The next time you come we will have another fine talk.” - -“Thank you, friend Crooked Arrow. I shall return often for you have been -a good friend.” - -With that, Black Hawk turned and walked to his own wigwam. As he -approached his home he noticed his father just leaving. When Tall Hawk -saw his son, he stopped and called to him. “Black Hawk, my son, where -have you been? It is quite late and your mother was getting quite -concerned.” - -“I was visiting with a friend, my father, a very good friend.” It was -then that Black Hawk spoke with his father about the events on the -fishing trip and about how Crooked Arrow had knelt at the lakeside and -thanked the Great Spirit for his friend, Black Hawk. - -His father listened attentively and then when Black Hawk had finished he -said, “My son, I am very proud of you. You have done a great and -generous thing. Crooked Arrow has been a lonely person. You have brought -much joy to his life. To have a friend is a wonderful thing.” - -“But, my father, if this is such a wonderful thing, why has no one -befriended him before? Why does he still live alone on the edge of the -tribe? Why is he alone on the hunt though he is with many braves?” - -“He is not an easy person to talk to, my son. You, a boy, have spoken to -him as an equal; this has meant much to him. The rest of us should be -ashamed. We have been so busy that we have not taken time out to look at -what is around us. It has taken a young Indian boy to bring to our -attention this lack of concern for a fellow member of the tribe. If he -had been a worthless brave who had sought pity and help from others, the -treatment he had been given would have been what he deserved.” - -But in thinking back, Tall Hawk realized that Crooked Arrow had always -carried his share of the responsibility in the tribe. - -When a hunting party was forming, he always volunteered; when a battle -was in progress, Crooked Arrow was always found to be in the middle. -When there was distasteful jobs to be done around the village or a new -lodge to be built or some repairs needed or someone to stand night -watch, Crooked Arrow would always be among the first to volunteer. - -Yes, thought Tall Hawk, here is a man who has been treated with scorn -who should have been treated with honor by his fellow braves. - -The following day after giving much thought to the question, Tall Hawk -went to consult with the leaders of the village. - -After many hours, a delegation was formed and they proceeded to the -wigwam of Crooked Arrow. The fat ugly warrior stepped from his wigwam -and suddenly his eyes grew a little wild until he saw in the delegation -Black Hawk, his friend. - -“Why have you come to the humble wigwam of Crooked Arrow?” he asked of -the leaders. “What have I done to cause you to come? If I have done -wrong tell me and I shall do all in my power to make it right.” - -“No,” said Tall Hawk, “It is we who have done wrong. We come to invite -you to rebuild your wigwam within the village circle. There is a fine -place right next to mine, and I would consider it an honor if you would -build there and become my neighbor. My son has told me quite a bit about -you and I can see now where we have been very unfair in the way we have -neglected making you a part of our tribe. Come, become a part of our -family. Share our fires and our food and we shall talk together of the -great hunts. This we ask you to do as a sign that you will forgive us -for this wrong which has existed so long.” - -“Yes, I will come, but listen. You have done me no wrong. I have been -happy living here on the edge of the village, watching the children play -and taking part in the hunt. I have had a good life. I have never known -what real friendship was from the time I was a little boy going from one -to the other begging for food to keep me going. But Black Hawk has -brought the meaning of friendship to my heart, and for that reason I -have desired these last few days to live closer to my people. Yes, I -will come. With gladness in my heart, I will come.” - -The group turned and started for the center of the village to proclaim -what had just happened; and, as they walked, a small boy, Black Hawk, -and a not so ugly, fat, young man could be seen walking hand in hand—a -certain lightness in their step that had not been there before. - - - - - THE BOY AND THE WARRIOR CHIEF - - -Flying Owl was a very happy little Seneca brave. He had all he could -wish for. His father was a very brave and honored member of the tribe. -His mother was kind and made the best-tasting dishes of food for him -when he was hungry. His sister and he would quarrel now and then, but -most of the time they played and lived together very happily. - -Their home was strong and warm in the winter and cool in the summer. -There were always many nice clothes to wear and plenty to eat. Flying -Owl was learning from his father every day about the ways of the forest -and the stream. When anyone watched Flying Owl at play, he would think, -“Now there is a lucky and happy little boy. I wonder if he knows how -fortunate he is.” But Flying Owl was a rare little Indian brave, for he -did realize how lucky he was. When he was still young, Flying Owl gladly -shared his toys and other things with his friends. For this reason he -was very much liked by both the braves and women and by the other boys -and girls of the tribe. - -One bright summer day, Flying Owl rose early from his bed and looked out -at the bright warm sun shining down on the green forest and the -blue-green lake at the edge of their village. He thought to himself, -“What a wonderful day this is to go fishing. Only a short way from our -home is the beautiful little hidden lake which my father has shown me. -Surely there must be big fish in that lake. If I could catch some of -them all by myself, my father would be proud of me and we would have a -delicious supper this evening.” - -So without any delay, Flying Owl gathered together his fishing tackle -which he and his father had made with such care during the cold winter -nights. Flying Owl was often allowed to go off by himself on short trips -like this, so long as he did not go too far or stay away from his home -after dark. He packed his fishing gear and some food and started out, -waving good-bye to his mother and sister who stood at the entrance to -their wigwam. His mother called to remind him to be back in time for -supper. Flying Owl shouted that he not only would be back before supper -but would bring their supper home with him. Then his mother and sister -watched him trotting from the village until he was out of sight. - -Flying Owl ran gaily along the forest paths, thinking that the many wild -creatures had been awake since dawn. Now they were scurrying through the -brush and the tree tops, enjoying the warm sunshine and cool breezes -which blew gently through the forest. Flying Owl’s heart felt very -happy. It was good to be alive, discovering new wonders of nature here -in the forest instead of playing in the village that he knew too well. -And he thought, “Perhaps some great adventure is waiting for me here in -the green forest!” - -He hurried on, impatient to reach the secret lake and catch the many -large fish that he was sure were there. At the pace he was keeping, it -was not long before he saw, through an opening in the trees, the -blue-green, shimmering waters of the lake. Running faster, he reached -the lake shore quickly and stopped a moment to look out across the -waters and wonder where he would find the best place to fish. - -He saw a tree that had fallen out into the lake, and decided to stand on -the end of the log in the lake. He cast his line into the water and -settled down to await the first nibble. He did not have to wait long. -There was a sharp tug upon his line and he felt the line go taut in his -hands. In fact, it had come so suddenly that Flying Owl was almost -thrown off balance. Bracing the heels of his moccasins against the curve -of the log, he started pulling at the line and brought in a fine fat -fish. The catch now lay on the bank next to him and he was ready to cast -again. In only a few moments, he felt another sharp tug and soon had -landed another plump fish. “This is really fun!” Flying Owl said aloud. - -Just then he heard a movement behind him. Turning quickly, he saw a tall -handsome Indian brave dressed in the costume of the Woodland Indians, -wearing the headdress of a chieftain. Flying Owl was startled, but the -tall brave reached out his hand in friendship. - -“Do not be afraid, Flying Owl,” he said. “I will not hurt you.” - -“Who are you?” Flying Owl asked as he looked up at the brave. “I do not -recognize you as a member of our tribe. How do you know my name?” - -The brave smiled, stepped closer, and said, “Oh, I know your name -because I _am_ of your tribe. I remember you as a baby who looked so -much like his father whom I knew well.” - -“But I do not ever remember seeing you and I thought I knew everyone. If -you are one of our tribe, I should know you, and above all because you -are wearing the headdress of our Chief. Surely all, even the children, -know our great Chieftains.” - -The brave drew closer until he was no more than a pace from Flying Owl. -Then he took a small deerskin jacket from his shoulders, laid it on the -ground, and sat cross-legged upon it, facing the boy. “My name is Bear -Claw and I am truly your Chief. If you do not believe me, you may ask -any question you wish about our tribe, and I will give you the answer.” - -Flying Owl accepted the challenge and began to question the tall brave -carefully until he was sure that the man was telling the truth. Still he -had never seen or heard of him. - -“Surely,” the chieftain said, “you must know now that I am one of your -tribe. But let me ask you a few questions. You have been asking me many, -and now it is my turn.” He waited with a laughing sparkle in his eyes -while Flying Owl watched his face closely. “What reason would you have -for questioning me, Bear Claw?” Flying Owl asked. - -“I would merely like to ask why you came to the still lake on such a -beautiful summer day,” replied the brave, not taking his eyes from the -boy for one moment. - -“Well,” said Flying Owl, “I thought it would be fun if I came here today -and caught enough fish for my mother to cook for our supper.” - -“Oh,” said Bear Claw smiling, “that is a very good reason. Please do not -let me stop your fishing.” Then Bear Claw stretched out on the bank of -the lake and lay gazing up through the trees at the bright blue sky. - -Flying Owl hesitated, thinking about this strong brave’s strange -behavior. Then he remembered the fish he must catch and how he must -return home before dark. So he cast his line into the water again and -almost immediately caught another large fish. This he placed with the -other two and went on fishing until he soon had a good catch. Seeing the -sun sinking lower in the afternoon sky, he knew that he must hurry to -reach the village in time for his mother to cook the fish for supper. - -Taking a stout birch branch, he ran one end of the branch through the -gills of the fish to carry his catch over his shoulder. As he turned to -say good-bye to the brave who had kept him company at the lakeside, he -was surprised to find him gone. Beneath the tree, he saw only the -flattened fir needles where the brave had lain watching him. He looked -all around and could find no further trace of him. Flying Owl moved even -faster toward home, because now he certainly had a great deal to tell -his friends. He reached home in plenty of time before supper and handed -the fish to his mother, telling her that, like his father, he had -brought their meal for the evening. His mother was very proud and told -him so. Then she asked, “Did you have any strange and wonderful -adventures today, my little Flying Owl?” - -The boy was just about to blurt out that he had, when he decided that he -should wait to tell his father first about everything that had happened. -So all he said was, “We will talk later, mother. I have much to tell -you.” - -Impatient now to break the news to his father, he went outside to look -for him. Flying Owl found him talking with another brave and waited -respectfully until his father had finished and was starting home. -Planting himself in front of his father, Flying Owl began to tell his -story, but he was speaking so fast that his father could hardly -understand him. - -“Wait, my son! You must speak more slowly. I want to hear about -everything that happened to you today, but your words tumble out so -swiftly that my brain can’t make any sense of them. Now start from the -beginning again.” - -Flying Owl took a deep breath and began slowly this time to tell his -father all about his adventure at the great still lake in the deep -forest. As he talked, his father’s face looked more and more puzzled. -When Flying Owl had finished, his father put one hand on his son’s -shoulder, and they started for the wigwam. Nothing more was said about -the adventure until they reached home. While Flying Owl was washing, his -father turned to his mother and asked her what she thought of their -son’s story. - -“He has not told me about it yet. He wanted to wait until he found you -and tell you first.” - -When the family had begun eating the supper of fish Flying Owl had -caught, the young brave told his story once again for his mother’s -benefit. When he had ended it, his parents looked at each other and -smiled and said no more about it. - -When the children had gone to bed, Flying Owl’s mother said to her -husband, “Surely you do not believe this story that Flying Owl has told -us. It must be something he imagined. He probably had a dull day and -believed that he had to think up some adventure to tell his father.” - -“No,” said her husband, “that is not the reason, for the catching of -many sweet fish would be enough of a story. There is something more -behind this and I must find out what it is. How would he know Bear -Claw’s name? He was only a baby when the great chief vanished. Tomorrow -I will go with the boy and see for myself this place where he says he -met Bear Claw.” - -The next morning, Flying Owl’s father remarked to his son that it was -such a nice day that they ought to go fishing once again at the still -lake. Surely if there were more fish like those they had eaten the night -before, they should try to make another large catch and share them with -other families in the village. Flying Owl was thrilled with the thought -of going fishing with his father and gathered his gear together quickly. -Father and son started off together into the forest, traveling at a -slower pace than Flying Owl had gone the day before. It was almost -mid-day when they reached the side of the lake. Flying Owl’s father -suggested that they eat lunch before they began fishing. When they were -through eating, Flying Owl’s father looked at the boy curiously. - -“My son, show me where you saw this Seneca Chief yesterday.” - -“Certainly, father,” Flying Owl said confidently. - -He took his father’s hand and walked back to the fir tree under which -the warrior had rested. They both looked carefully at the ground. - -“I see no signs of where a person lay under this tree, my son,” Flying -Owl’s father finally said. “Are you sure that you saw a Seneca Chief -when you were here yesterday?” - -“Oh yes, father, I know I did. We can’t find any trace of the spot he -lay on because the fir needles have risen again like the grass on which -a deer has lain. Surely you don’t believe that I would lie to you, -father?” - -“No, my son. I do not believe you would, but I know of no one by the -name of Bear Claw who lives in our village. Perhaps one of our -unfriendly neighbors was playing a trick on you, or maybe your -imagination wanted a little adventure of its own.” - -Flying Owl paused for a moment, thinking seriously. - -“No, father, you have taught me to be truthful at all times, and to tell -you exactly what I have seen and heard. I did see a tall Seneca standing -right there, wearing a Chief’s headdress that was one of the most -beautiful I have ever seen. It was not something in my imagination, and -it was not one of our neighbors, for he wore no mask and no paint to -hide behind. His costume was Seneca, and when I questioned him about our -village, he knew every answer.” - -“All right, my son, we will speak no more about it. But come, we must -cast our lines. It is growing late and we must hurry if we are to bring -home another meal this evening.” - -So they started to fish and waited a long time without getting even a -nibble. They changed their bait and moved to a new position farther -along the lake shore, but nothing did any good. When the sun had sunk -very low, Flying Owl’s father announced that it was time to start for -home. As they trotted back through the forest, neither spoke to the -other, because both were thinking busily about Flying Owl’s story, his -good catch of yesterday, and their poor luck today. - -When Flying Owl’s mother saw them returning empty-handed, she said -nothing of the fact that there were no fish. When the children had -finished their supper and gone to bed, their parents spoke of the boy’s -adventure. Now they were more puzzled than ever. Just at that moment -there was a loud muttering of voices, followed by such shouting and -laughter and cheers as had not been heard in the village for many moons. -Flying Owl’s father dashed from his home, grasping his bow as he went. -Certainly something wonderful must be happening. As he reached the -center of the village, the first thing he saw was a tall Seneca -Chieftain standing amidst many warriors who were shouting and dancing. -It was Bear Claw, a Seneca Chief who had disappeared after a great -battle. His people had returned to their village defeated and heartsick, -believing him dead, and there had been much sadness. It had happened so -many moons ago that Chief Bear Claw had almost been forgotten. Now he -had appeared in the village as if from nowhere. Finally Bear Claw raised -his arms in the air, asking for silence. - -“Your Chief has returned. I have much to tell you, but I must wait -because I am tired and need rest. Tomorrow we shall have feasting and -dancing and a Great Council. Then I will speak.” - -The great warrior turned and walked to his wigwam where his wife and -young son, who had been leading the tribe, waited for him. Flying Owl’s -father walked slowly back to his home where the boy lay sleeping, -unaware of the great event that had been taking place. - -The next day the sun rose and covered the small village with a warm -glow, as though greeting Bear Claw’s return. Flying Owl walked out into -the sunshine and found everyone preparing for a great celebration. He -ran to ask his father about the reason for all the excitement. - -“My son, sit beside your father who doubted you. Today a miracle has -come to pass, and together we will hear how that miracle happened.” - -Although he was bubbling over with curiosity to learn what had happened, -Flying Owl sat patiently and silently beside his father. Soon it was -time for the special meeting. The whole village began to gather in front -of the home of the great Chief who had returned to his people. Flying -Owl and his father joined the others and sat watching the entrance of -the wigwam. Soon a great warrior with a magnificent headdress stepped -out. Flying Owl grasped his father’s arm and whispered, “That’s the -Seneca Chief I told you about, father!” - -“Yes, my son. That is Bear Claw, warrior Chief of our tribe, who has -returned to us after we had believed him dead.” - -Bear Claw signaled for silence. Then he began speaking with great -dignity. - -“Many moons ago, when we were at war with our enemies to the north, I -fell, wounded by an enemy arrow. Before I could escape, the enemy fell -upon me and took me prisoner. I was taken to their village where I was -kept under close guard. They did not kill me but made me a slave—a far -greater punishment for any Seneca. For many moons I worked in the enemy -camp, often being whipped and beaten and spit upon by their warriors and -their squaws, and even their children. Two moons ago I escaped and began -my long trek homeward. But I moved slowly because the path was long and -I was weary. They sent a war party after me to bring me back. So for -many suns I hid in the deep forest. I led their war party in a chase, -first toward our village, and then away from it. I did not want to come -too close to our homes until I was sure they had lost my trail. I knew -they would not dare to attack our village because they were a small -band, but still big enough to take prisoner any of our people who might -have wandered too far away. - -“Yesterday I arrived at the secret lake with the only things that I had -been able to find and bring with me from the enemy camp—my knife, my -bow, and my headdress which they had taken from me when they captured -me. Suddenly I saw a Seneca boy fishing. I approached and spoke with -him. Last night I slept in the forest until it was late and dark enough -to enter our village. The rest of the story you know. But first, before -the celebration, I would like to see that young lad I spoke to at the -lakeside, the young brave who is called Flying Owl.” - -Flying Owl rose and stepped forward to face the Chief. - -“You were the first of my people to see me, young brave, and it was the -sight of you, fishing in the lake, which first made me feel that I was -really home. You are a good fisherman and a bright lad, and I am sure -you will become a great warrior. Because you were the first and because -you appeared so brave in the face of what might have been great danger, -I wish to reward you. Here is the bow which I carried all through my -homeward trip. Keep it and remember the Seneca Chief you spoke to the -day the fish were biting so well and the sun was warm—the day that -happiness once again filled that Chief’s heart.” - -“Thank you, Bear Claw,” the boy replied proudly. “May I hope that some -day my father and I may go fishing with you at the secret lake?” - -Everyone laughed and, most of all, Bear Claw. There was joy in the -village for their leader had returned, and a boy had made him welcome. - - - - - Transcriber’s Notes - - ---Copyright notice provided as in the original—this e-text is public - domain in the country of publication. - ---Silently corrected palpable typos; left non-standard (or amusing) - spellings and dialect unchanged. - ---In the text versions, delimited italics text in _underscores_ (the - HTML version reproduces the font form of the printed book.) - - - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Treasury of American Indian Tales, by -Theodore Whitson Ressler - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREASURY OF AMERICAN INDIAN TALES *** - -***** This file should be named 62855-0.txt or 62855-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/2/8/5/62855/ - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |